huawei cg9812

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/huawei-cg9812 1/519

Part I System Description

Table of Contents i.........................................................................................

Chapter 1 Introduction to the CG9812 1-1.........................................................

1.1 Orientation 1-1........................................................................................1.2 Position of CG9812 in UMTS/GPRS Network 1-1..................................

1.2.1 Network Architecture 1-1................................................................

1.2.2 External Interfaces 1-3....................................................................

1.3 CG9812 Networking Implementation 1-4................................................

Chapter 2 Key Benefits 2-1................................................................................

2.1 Introduction to the Chapter 2-1...............................................................

2.2 System Features 2-1...............................................................................

2.2.1 Multi-access 2-1..............................................................................

2.2.2 Flexible CDR Format Conversion 2-1.............................................

2.2.3 Large Capacity and Powerful Processing Capability 2-1................

2.2.4 High Reliability 2-1..........................................................................

2.2.5 Scalability 2-2.................................................................................

2.3 Networking Capability 2-2.......................................................................

Chapter 3 System Architecture 3-1....................................................................


3.2 Hardware Architecture 3-1......................................................................

3.2.1 Appearance of CG9812 Cabinet 3-1..............................................

3.2.2 Cabinet Configuration 3-2...............................................................

3.2.3 Typical Configuration 3-3................................................................

3.3 Functional Architecture 3-5.....................................................................

3.3.1 Logical Architecture 3-5..................................................................

3.3.2 CG9812 Network Adapters 3-7.......................................................

3.3.3 Communicating with the GSN 3-8..................................................

3.3.4 Communicating with the Billing Center 3-9.....................................

3.3.5 Communicating with the LMT and the NMS 3-9.............................

3.3.6 Heartbeat Path 3-9.........................................................................3.4 Software Architecture 3-9........................................................................

3.4.1 Key Terminologies 3-9....................................................................

3.4.2 Overall Architecture 3-11..................................................................

3.4.3 Service Processes 3-11....................................................................

Chapter 4 Services and Functions 4-1...............................................................


4.2 Network Functions 4-1............................................................................

4.2.1 Interface to GSN 4-1.......................................................................

4.2.2 Interface to Billing Center 4-1.........................................................4.3 Service Functions 4-1.............................................................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


4.3.1 CDR Processing 4-1.......................................................................

4.3.2 Cluster System Function 4-3..........................................................

4.3.3 CDR Browsing and Querying Function 4-3.....................................

Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance 5-1........................................................


5.2 OMC Networking 5-1...............................................................................

5.3 Operation and Maintenance Functions 5-1.............................................

5.3.1 Security Management 5-2...............................................................

5.3.2 Configuration Management 5-2......................................................

5.3.3 Performance Management 5-2.......................................................

5.3.4 Fault Management 5-3....................................................................

Chapter 6 Reliability 6-1.....................................................................................


6.2 System Reliability 6-1..............................................................................

6.2.1 Redundancy Design 6-1.................................................................

6.2.2 Component Selection, Control and Unification 6-1.........................

6.2.3 Maintainability Design 6-2...............................................................

6.2.4 Power Reliability Design 6-2...........................................................

6.3 Hardware Reliability 6-2..........................................................................

6.3.1 Power Supply Design 6-2...............................................................

6.3.2 Common Hardware Design 6-2......................................................

6.3.3 Redundancy Design 6-3.................................................................6.3.4 Over-voltage and Over-current Protection 6-3................................

6.3.5 Hot Backup 6-3...............................................................................

6.4 Software Reliability 6-3...........................................................................

6.4.1 Protection Measures 6-3.................................................................

6.4.2 Error Tolerance 6-3.........................................................................

6.4.3 Fault Monitoring and Processing 6-4..............................................

Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 7-1..............................................................


7.2 System Performance 7-1........................................................................7.2.1 Basic Performance 7-1...................................................................

7.2.2 Reliability Specifications 7-1...........................................................

7.3 Mechanical Data 7-2...............................................................................

7.3.1 Dimensions 7-2...............................................................................

7.3.2 Weight 7-2......................................................................................

7.3.3 Power Consumption 7-2.................................................................

7.4 Environmental Requirements 7-3............................................................

7.4.1 Storage Environment 7-3................................................................

7.4.2 Transportation Environment 7-5.....................................................

7.4.3 Running Environment 7-7...............................................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


Part II System Installation (Netra 240)


Chapter 1 Installation Overview 1-1...................................................................

1.1 Introduction to the Chapter 1-1...............................................................1.2 Installation Flow 1-1................................................................................

1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart 1-1..............................................................

1.2.2 Installation Time Planning 1-2........................................................

1.3 Installation Preparations 1-3...................................................................

1.3.1 Hardware Preparations 1-3.............................................................

1.3.2 Software Preparations 1-4..............................................................

1.4 Resource Planning 1-6............................................................................

1.4.1 HA System Planning 1-6.................................................................

1.4.2 IP Address Planning 1-7.................................................................

1.4.3 Disk Space Planning 1-8................................................................

Chapter 2 Installing and Configuring Hardware 2-1...........................................


2.2 Cabinet Configuration 2-1.......................................................................

2.3 Hardware Description 2-3.......................................................................

2.3.1 Introduction to Sun Netra 240 2-3...................................................

2.3.2 Introduction to SUN StorEdge 3310 Disk Array 2-5........................

2.3.3 Introduction to Quidway S3528G LAN Switch 2-6..........................

2.4 Hardware Connections 2-7.....................................................................

2.4.1 Host Hardware Planning 2-7...........................................................

2.4.2 Disk Array Hardware Planning 2-8.................................................

2.4.3 Hardware Connections 2-8.............................................................

2.4.4 Description for Cable Connections 2-10...........................................

2.4.5 Hardware Power-on 2-15..................................................................

Chapter 3 Configuring SC and Disk Array 3-1....................................................


3.2 Configuring SC 3-1..................................................................................3.2.1 Introduction to SC 3-1.....................................................................

3.2.2 Configuring SC 3-1.........................................................................

3.3 Configuring Disk Array 3-4......................................................................

Chapter 4 Installing and Configuring Solaris 4-1................................................


4.2 Installing Solaris 8 4-1.............................................................................

4.2.1 Connecting Consoles of Netra 240 4-1...........................................

4.2.2 Installing Solaris 8 4-2....................................................................

4.3 Installing Solaris Patches 4-7..................................................................4.3.1 Installing Patch Tools 4-7...............................................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch 4-10..........................................................

4.3.3 Installing SAN Patches 4-10.............................................................

4.3.4 Installing SCSI Card Driver 4-11.......................................................

4.3.5 Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch 4-12............................................

4.4 Configuring Solaris 4-13............................................................................

4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files 4-13................................................

4.4.2 Creating Network Adapter Configuration Files 4-14.........................

4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root 4-15..............................................

4.4.4 Configuring FTP Login for root 4-15.................................................

4.4.5 Executing the .profile File 4-15.........................................................

4.4.6 Modifying the /kernel/drv/sd.conf File 4-16.......................................

4.4.7 Modifying the /etc/system File 4-16..................................................

4.4.8 Modifying the /etc/inet/netmasks File 4-16.......................................

4.4.9 Restarting the Hosts 4-17.................................................................

4.5 Installing Utilities 4-17...............................................................................

4.5.1 Installing the TOP Software 4-17......................................................

4.5.2 Installing the VTS Software 4-17......................................................

Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software 5-1....................................................



5.2.1 Checking the /etc/hosts File 5-1.....................................................

5.2.2 Checking Configurations of the hostname NetworkAdapters 5-3............................................................................................

5.2.3 Checking the /etc/default/login File 5-3...........................................

5.2.4 Cleaning out Data 5-3.....................................................................

5.3 Installing Sun Cluster 3.0 5-3..................................................................

5.3.1 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1 5-3.........................................

5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2 5-10.........................................

5.3.3 Configuring the Quorum Device 5-13...............................................

5.3.4 Checking the Status of the Cluster Nodes 5-14................................

5.4 Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5 5-15...............................5.4.1 Installing Volume Manager 5-15.......................................................

5.4.2 Installing Volume Manager Patches 5-16.........................................

5.4.3 Modifying Disk Management Parameters 5-17.................................

5.4.4 Checking the Installation 5-17..........................................................

5.5 Entering Volume Manager Licenses 5-18.................................................

5.5.1 Checking Hostid 5-18.......................................................................

5.5.2 Checking If the License Is Permanent 5-18......................................

5.5.3 Entering the Permanent License 5-19..............................................

5.5.4 Checking If the License Is Correctly Entered 5-19...........................5.6 Configuring HA System Parameters 5-19.................................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk 5-20...................................................................

5.6.2 Creating the igwbdg Resource Group 5-21......................................

5.6.3 Configuring NAFO 5-24....................................................................

5.6.4 Registering the igwbrg Resource Group 5-25..................................

5.6.5 Installing igwb Monitor Script 5-26....................................................

5.6.6 Checking the Configuration 5-26......................................................

Chapter 6 Installing Billing Interface 6-1.............................................................


6.2 Installing FTP 6-1....................................................................................

6.3 Installing FTAM 6-1.................................................................................

6.3.1 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 6-1............................................

6.3.2 Installation Preparations 6-3...........................................................

6.3.3 Installation Steps 6-4......................................................................

6.3.4 Configuring Parameters 6-11............................................................

6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands 6-14.........................

Chapter 7 Installing CG9812 Server 7-1............................................................



7.2.1 Checking Hardware Connections 7-1.............................................

7.2.2 Checking System Software Installation 7-1....................................

7.2.3 Installation Prerequisites 7-4..........................................................

7.2.4 Key Terminologies You Need to Know 7-6.....................................7.3 Installing Server Software 7-7.................................................................

7.4 Upgrading Server 7-9..............................................................................

7.4.1 General Upgrade 7-9......................................................................

7.4.2 Special Upgrade 7-11.......................................................................

7.5 Rolling Back to Last Version 7-13.............................................................

Chapter 8 Installing CG9812 Client 8-1..............................................................


8.2 Installing Client Software 8-1..................................................................

8.3 Upgrading Client 8-6...............................................................................8.4 Checking Client Software 8-8..................................................................

Part II System Installation (Netra 20)


Chapter 1 Installation Overview 1-1...................................................................


1.2 Installation Flow 1-1................................................................................

1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart 1-1..............................................................

1.2.2 Installation Time Planning 1-2........................................................1.3 Installation Preparations 1-3...................................................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


1.3.1 Hardware Preparations 1-3.............................................................

1.3.2 Software Preparations 1-5..............................................................

1.4 Resource Planning 1-6............................................................................

1.4.1 HA System Planning 1-6.................................................................

1.4.2 IP Address Planning 1-7.................................................................

1.4.3 Disk Space Planning 1-8................................................................

Chapter 2 Installing Hardware 2-1......................................................................


2.2 Cabinet Configuration 2-1.......................................................................

2.3 Hardware Description 2-2.......................................................................

2.3.1 Introduction to Sun Netra 20 2-2.....................................................

2.3.2 Introduction to Sun StorEdge 3310 Disk Array 2-5.........................

2.3.3 Introduction to TC 2-6.....................................................................

2.3.4 Introduction to Quidway S3526 LAN Switch 2-7.............................

2.4 Hardware Connections 2-7.....................................................................

2.4.1 Host Hardware Planning 2-7...........................................................

2.4.2 Disk Array Hardware Planning 2-8.................................................

2.4.3 Hardware Connections 2-8.............................................................

2.4.4 Description for Cable Connections 2-11...........................................

2.4.5 Hardware Power-on 2-14..................................................................

Chapter 3 Configuring TC, Disk Array, and Netra 20 3-1...................................

3.1 Introduction to the Chapter 3-1...............................................................3.2 Configuring TC 3-1..................................................................................

3.2.1 Introduction to TC 3-1.....................................................................

3.2.2 Configuring TC 3-1.........................................................................

3.3 Configuring Disk Array 3-2......................................................................

3.4 Configuring Netra 20 3-26.........................................................................

Chapter 4 Installing and Configuring Solaris 4-1................................................


4.2 Installing Solaris 8 4-1.............................................................................

4.2.1 Connecting Consoles of Host 4-1...................................................4.2.2 Installing Solaris 8 4-1....................................................................

4.3 Installing Solaris Patches 4-9..................................................................

4.3.1 Installing Patch Tools 4-9...............................................................

4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch 4-12..........................................................

4.3.3 Installing SAN Patches 4-12.............................................................

4.3.4 Installing SCSI Card Driver 4-13.......................................................

4.3.5 Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch 4-14............................................

4.4 Configuring Solaris 4-15............................................................................

4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files 4-15................................................

4.4.2 Creating Network Adapter Configuration Files 4-16.........................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root 4-17..............................................

4.4.4 Configuring FTP Login for root 4-17.................................................

4.4.5 Executing the .profile File 4-17.........................................................

4.4.6 Modifying the /kernel/drv/sd.conf File 4-17.......................................

4.4.7 Modifying the /etc/system File 4-18..................................................

4.4.8 Restarting the Hosts 4-18.................................................................

4.5 Installing Utilities 4-18...............................................................................

4.5.1 Installing the TOP Software 4-18......................................................

4.5.2 Installing the VTS Software 4-19......................................................

Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software 5-1....................................................



5.2.1 Checking the /etc/hosts File 5-1.....................................................

5.2.2 Checking Configurations of the hostname NetworkAdapters 5-2............................................................................................

5.2.3 Checking the /etc/default/login File 5-3...........................................

5.2.4 Cleaning Out Device Data 5-3........................................................

5.3 Installing Sun Cluster 3.0 5-3..................................................................

5.3.1 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb1 5-3..........................

5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb2 5-7..........................

5.3.3 Configuring the Quorum Device 5-9...............................................

5.3.4 Checking the Status of the Cluster Nodes 5-10................................

5.4 Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5 5-11...............................

5.4.1 Installing Volume Manager 5-12.......................................................

5.4.2 Installing Volume Manager Patches 5-12.........................................

5.4.3 Modifying Disk Management Parameters 5-13.................................

5.4.4 Checking the Installation 5-14..........................................................

5.5 Entering Volume Manager Licenses 5-14.................................................

5.5.1 Checking Hostid 5-14.......................................................................

5.5.2 Checking If the License Is Permanent 5-15......................................

5.5.3 Entering the Permanent License 5-15..............................................5.5.4 Checking If the License Is Correctly Entered 5-16...........................

5.6 Configuring HA System Parameters 5-16.................................................

5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk 5-16...................................................................

5.6.2 Creating the igwbdg Resource Group 5-17......................................

5.6.3 Configuring NAFO 5-22....................................................................

5.6.4 Registering the igwbrg Resource Group 5-22..................................

5.6.5 Installing igwb Monitor Script 5-23....................................................

5.6.6 Checking the Configuration 5-23......................................................

Chapter 6 Installing Billing Interface 6-1.............................................................6.1 Introduction to the Chapter 6-1...............................................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


6.2 Installing FTP 6-1....................................................................................

6.3 Installing FTAM 6-1.................................................................................

6.3.1 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 6-1............................................

6.3.2 Installation Preparations 6-2...........................................................

6.3.3 Installation Steps 6-3......................................................................

6.3.4 Configuring Parameters 6-10............................................................

6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands 6-13.........................

Chapter 7 Installing CG9812 Server 7-1............................................................



7.2.1 Checking Hardware Connections 7-1.............................................

7.2.2 Checking System Software Installation 7-1....................................

7.2.3 Installation Prerequisites 7-4..........................................................

7.2.4 Key Terminologies You Need to Know 7-6.....................................

7.3 Installing Server Software 7-7.................................................................

7.4 Upgrading Server 7-9..............................................................................

7.4.1 General Upgrade 7-9......................................................................

7.4.2 Special Upgrade 7-11.......................................................................

7.5 Rolling Back to Last Version 7-13.............................................................

Chapter 8 Installing CG9812 Client 8-1..............................................................


8.2 Installing Client Software 8-1..................................................................8.3 Upgrading Client 8-6...............................................................................

8.4 Checking Client Software 8-8..................................................................

Part III Parameter Configuration and SystemCommissioning


Chapter 1 Parameter Configuration 1-1.............................................................

1.1 Introduction to Parameter Configuration Console 1-1.............................

1.2 Common Operations 1-6.........................................................................

1.2.1 Logging in to Parameter Configuration Console 1-6.......................

1.2.2 Locking System 1-9........................................................................

1.2.3 Adding Login 1-9.............................................................................

1.2.4 Logging out Office 1-10....................................................................

1.2.5 Changing Password 1-11.................................................................

1.2.6 Closing Parameter Configuration Console 1-11...............................

1.2.7 Viewing igwb.ini Parameter File 1-12...............................................

1.2.8 Adding Parameter Sections 1-13......................................................

1.2.9 Deleting Parameter Sections 1-15....................................................1.2.10 Adding Parameters 1-16.................................................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


1.2.11 Deleting Parameters 1-17...............................................................

1.2.12 Modifying Parameter Value 1-18....................................................

1.2.13 Comparing Parameters of Different Offices 1-19............................

1.2.14 Saving the Configuration 1-19........................................................

1.2.15 Loading the Parameter Configuration File 1-20..............................

1.2.16 Obtaining the Configuration Information 1-20.................................

1.2.17 Customized Setting 1-21................................................................

1.3 Configuring the igwb.ini File 1-22..............................................................

1.3.1 Common Parameters 1-23...............................................................

1.3.2 Cluster Parameters 1-23...................................................................

1.3.3 Access Point Parameters 1-24.........................................................

1.3.4 MML Server Parameters 1-26..........................................................

1.3.5 Log Parameters 1-28........................................................................

1.3.6 Disk and File Control Parameters 1-28.............................................

1.3.7 Network Backup Parameters 1-29....................................................

1.4 CG9812 Dual-System Configuration Instance 1-31..................................

1.4.1 Networking Diagram 1-31.................................................................

1.4.2 Configuration of IP Addresses of Network Adapters 1-32................

1.4.3 Content of the igwb.ini Configuration Files 1-34...............................

1.5 Port Usage 1-37........................................................................................

1.6 Modifying Client Settings 1-38..................................................................

1.7 Network Backup Configuration Instance 1-39...........................................1.7.1 Network Backup Instance 1-39.........................................................

1.7.2 Simplest Backup Configuration 1-41................................................

1.7.3 Configuring Two Backup Tasks 1-42................................................

1.7.4 Configuring Two Backup Tasks with Different User Namesand Passwords 1-42..................................................................................

1.7.5 Configuring Defaulted Backup Mode 1-43........................................

1.7.6 Configuring Backup Time List 1-44...................................................

1.7.7 Configuring the Backup Start Time and End Time 1-45...................

1.7.8 Configuring One-off Backup List 1-46...............................................1.7.9 Configuring the Last File Backup 1-46..............................................

1.7.10 Configuring the Deletion of Source File after Backup 1-47.............

1.7.11 Configuring the Deletion of the Second Bill Copy withoutDate Directory after Backup 1-48..............................................................

1.7.12 Configuring the Save Days for Files under the DestinationPath 1-49...................................................................................................

1.7.13 Configuring Connection Retry Times When Backup Fails 1-49......

1.7.14 Configuring the Source Backup Path for Status Files 1-50............

1.7.15 Backup Precautions 1-51................................................................

Chapter 2 System Running 2-1..........................................................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


2.1 Introduction 2-1.......................................................................................

2.2 Program Startup on the CG9812 Server 2-1...........................................

2.3 Program Close at the CG9812 Server 2-2..............................................

2.4 Running Status of the CG9812 Client 2-2...............................................

Chapter 3 System Commissioning 3-1...............................................................

3.1 Introduction 3-1.......................................................................................

3.2 Typical Networking in Packet Switched Domain 3-1...............................

3.2.1 CG9812 and GSN 3-1....................................................................

3.2.2 CG9812 and Billing Center 3-2.......................................................

3.2.3 CG9812 and NMS 3-2....................................................................

3.3 CG9812 and Other Devices 3-3..............................................................

3.3.1 CG9812 Receives CDRs 3-3..........................................................

3.3.2 Billing Center Collects CDRs 3-3....................................................

3.3.3 Connectivity Between NMS and CG9812 3-3.................................

Part IV Basic Operations


Chapter 1 Quick Start 1-1...................................................................................


1.2 Introduction to CG9812 Client 1-1...........................................................

1.3 GUI of the CDR Console 1-2...................................................................

1.4 GUI of the Debugging Console 1-6.........................................................

Chapter 2 Common Operations 2-1...................................................................


2.2 Logging in to the CDR Console 2-1........................................................

2.3 Locking CDR Console 2-3.......................................................................

2.4 Logging out of the CDR Console 2-3......................................................

2.5 Closing the CDR Console 2-4.................................................................

2.6 Customizing the Layout 2-4....................................................................

2.7 Managing Operators 2-6.........................................................................

2.7.1 Adding an Operator 2-6..................................................................2.7.2 Deleting an Operator 2-8................................................................

2.7.3 Modifying an Operator 2-8..............................................................

2.8 Managing Offices 2-10..............................................................................

2.8.1 Adding an Office 2-10.......................................................................

2.8.2 Deleting an Office 2-11.....................................................................

2.8.3 Modifying an Office 2-12...................................................................

2.9 Customizing the System 2-13...................................................................

2.9.1 Customizing Timeout Setting 2-13....................................................

2.9.2 Customizing Lock Time 2-14............................................................2.10 Managing CDRs 2-15..............................................................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


2.10.1 Browsing CDRs by Type 2-15........................................................

2.10.2 Browsing CDRs by Format 2-18.....................................................

2.10.3 Browsing CDRs by Multiple Conditions 2-20..................................

2.10.4 Saving CDR Information 2-22.........................................................

2.10.5 Printing a CDR 2-22........................................................................

2.11 Managing Performance 2-23...................................................................

2.11.1 Querying System Performance Status 2-25...................................

2.11.2 Setting State Query Properties 2-27...............................................

2.11.3 Clearing State Information 2-28......................................................

2.12 Managing Logs 2-29...............................................................................

2.12.1 Browsing Logs 2-29........................................................................

2.12.2 Saving Logs 2-32............................................................................

2.12.3 Clearing Logs 2-34.........................................................................

2.12.4 Printing Logs 2-34...........................................................................

2.13 Manual Switchover 2-35..........................................................................

2.14 Auxiliary Upgrade 2-36............................................................................

2.15 Logging in to the Debugging Console 2-37.............................................

2.16 Exiting the Debugging Console 2-38.......................................................

2.17 Managing Debugging Messages 2-39....................................................

2.17.1 Browsing Debug Messages 2-40....................................................

2.17.2 Saving Debug Messages 2-41........................................................

2.17.3 Masking the Debug Level 2-42.......................................................2.17.4 Setting Debug Colors 2-44.............................................................

2.18 Managing Protocol Messages 2-45.........................................................

2.18.1 Browsing Protocol Messages 2-46.................................................

2.18.2 Saving Protocol Messages 2-46.....................................................

2.19 Managing Workflow Messages 2-47.......................................................

2.19.1 Browsing Workflow Messages 2-48................................................

2.19.2 Saving Workflow Messages 2-49...................................................

Part V System Maintenance


Chapter 1 System Overview 1-1.........................................................................


1.2 Types of System Users 1-1.....................................................................

1.3 System Directory and Main Files 1-1......................................................

1.3.1 Directory structure and main files of the server 1-1........................

1.3.2 CDR storage directory and main files 1-3.......................................

1.3.3 Common directory structure and main files 1-5..............................

1.4 Directory Structure of the CG9812 Client 1-6.........................................Chapter 2 Routine Maintenance 2-1...................................................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



2.2 System Running 2-1................................................................................

2.3 Hard Disk Detection 2-2..........................................................................

2.4 Operation Maintenance 2-3.....................................................................

Chapter 3 Troubleshooting 3-1...........................................................................


3.2 Fault Positioning Information on the CG9812 3-1...................................

3.3 Fault positioning information on OS 3-3..................................................

3.4 Collection of Fault Positioning Information 3-4........................................

3.5 Trace Information and Maintenance 3-5.................................................

3.5.1 Usable Front Disk Space Insufficient for the MinimumAlarming Space 3-5.................................................................................

3.5.2 Usable Back Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum

Alarming Space 3-5.................................................................................3.5.3 Usable Backup Medium Space Insufficient for the MinimumAlarming Space 3-5.................................................................................

3.5.4 Usable Front Disk Space Insufficient for the MinimumSwitchover Space 3-6..............................................................................

3.5.5 Usable Back Disk Space Insufficient for the MinimumSwitchover Space 3-6..............................................................................

3.5.6 Access Point Type, Access Point Type Being %d 3-6....................

3.5.7 Failure of Reading IP Address from MML Server (DefaultValue %s) 3-7..........................................................................................

3.5.8 Error Code %d Returned in Socket Registration WhenConnecting Kernel Process 3-7...............................................................

3.5.9 Kernel Process Not Running 3-7....................................................

3.5.10 Failure of Opening Listening Port with Error Code %d 3-7...........

3.5.11 Activation Failure of Asynchronous Resource 3-8........................

3.5.12 Dual-System Activation Failure 3-8..............................................

3.5.13 Switchover 3-8..............................................................................

3.5.14 Switchover Failure 3-9..................................................................

3.5.15 Operation Failure at Failover Response End 3-9.........................

3.5.16 Starting to Perform Handover Operation 3-9................................3.5.17 Multiple Failed Activation Attempts at Local Node and canNever be Activated Unless Heartbeat is Interrupted 3-9.........................

Chapter 4 Frequently Asked Questions 4-1.......................................................


4.2 Logging in to CDR console failed 4-1......................................................

4.3 Conflicting TCP Port 6000 4-2................................................................

4.4 Failure to Decode ASN.1 CDR 4-2.........................................................

4.5 Failure to Run Setup Script 4-3...............................................................

4.6 Sequence of Powering on Dual-System 4-4...........................................4.7 Sequence of Powering off Dual-System 4-4...........................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


4.8 Delayed CDR Fetching 4-5.....................................................................

4.9 Failure to Restart Sun Mini Computer after Sudden Power- off 4-5........

4.10 "No utmpx entry" When Logging in Solaris System 4-6........................

4.11 Oversize /var/adm/wtmpx File 4-7.........................................................

4.12 A 3MB Original CDR Generated after One or Two Calls 4-7................

4.13 Connection Failure Alarm During Backup over Network 4-8.................

4.14 Making Generated CDRs Meeting Special Requirements 4-8..............

4.15 SUN Netra 20 cannot be started 4-9.....................................................

4.16 Sun Netra t1405 cannot be switched over 4-10......................................

Chapter 5 System Alarms 5-1............................................................................


5.2 ALM-0001 Insufficient Disk Space 5-2....................................................

5.3 ALM-0003 BS Not Fetch CDRs for a Long Time 5-2..............................

5.4 ALM-0005 Heartbeat Interruption 5-3.....................................................

5.5 ALM-0007 Cluster Switchover 5-3..........................................................

5.6 ALM-0009 Private Network Interruption 5-4............................................

5.7 ALM-0013 IP Resource Failure 5-4.........................................................

5.8 ALM-0015 Volume Resource Failure 5-5................................................

5.9 ALM-0017 Hardware Failure 5-5.............................................................

5.10 ALM-0019 Write File Failure 5-5...........................................................

5.11 ALM-0021 Abnormal CDR 5-6..............................................................

5.12 ALM-0023 File Backup Failure 5-6........................................................5.13 ALM-0025 Backup Connection Failure 5-7...........................................

5.14 ALM-0027 CPU Busy 5-7......................................................................

5.15 ALM-0029 Insufficient Available Memory 5-7........................................

5.16 ALM-0031 Unauthorized Client Login 5-8.............................................

5.17 ALM-0033 License Notice 5-8...............................................................

5.18 ALM-0035 Cluster Handover 5-9..........................................................

5.19 ALM-0037 Hardware Failure 5-9...........................................................

5.20 ALM-0039 Software Reset 5-10..............................................................

5.21 ALM-0051 Alarm Box Disconnection 5-10..............................................5.22 ALM-0053 User information Change 5-11..............................................

5.23 ALM-0055 Insufficient Disk Space (major) 5-11......................................

5.24 ALM-0057 Insufficient Available Memory (major) 5-11...........................

5.25 ALM-0059 No GSN Response 5-12........................................................

Appendix


Appendix A Common UNIX Commands A-1......................................................

A.1 Introduction to the Chapter A-1...............................................................A.2 Common Operations in UNIX System A-1..............................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


A.3 Common Commands for UNIX User Management A-6..........................

A.4 UNIX Utility Commands and Programs A-6............................................

A.5 UNIX System Resource Commands A-7................................................

A.6 UNIX Network Communication Commands A-7.....................................

Appendix B Abbreviations B-1............................................................................

Index................................................................................................

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI

System Description

System Installation (Netra 240)

System Installation (Netra 20)

Parameter Configuration and SystemCommissioning

Basic Operations

System Maintenance

Appendix

HUAWEI CG9812

User Manual

V200R002

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



HUAWEI CG9812

User Manual

Manual Version T2-030187-20050728-C-2.23

Product Version V200R002

BOM 31013387

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support

and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,

Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Postal Code: 518129

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Phone:0755-28560000 8008302118

Fax:0755-28560111

Email: [email protected]

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



Copyright © 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,

TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,

HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,

Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co.,

Ltd.

All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective

holders.

Notice

All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective

holders.

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has

been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but

all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute

the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



About This Manual

Contents

The manual presents the principle, installation, operation, and maintenance of the

CG9812 in the following structure.

The manual contains five parts and two appendixes.

Part I System Description introduces the functional features, hardware structure,

software structure, networking, and technical specifications.

Part II System Installation (Netra 240) details the installation and configuration

of the CG9812 when SUN Netra 240 is used as the server of the CG9812.

Part II System Installation (Netra 20) details the installation and configuration of

the CG9812 when SUN Netra 20 is used as the server of the CG9812.

Part III Parameter Configuration and System Commissioning introduces the

parameter configuration and system commissioning of the CG9812.

Part IV Basic Operations presents the basic operations performed on the

CG9812, including user management, CDR browsing, CDR statistics, CDR query,

log browsing, and debugging trace.

Part V System Maintenance describes the software directory structure, routine

maintenance, troubleshooting, common trace information, common fault handling,

and alarm information of the CG9812.

Appendix A Common UNIX Commands gathers the common UNIX commands

for your reference.

Appendix B Abbreviations lists the full names of the acronyms and abbreviated

used in the manual.

Intended Readers

The manual is intended for the following readers:

Installation engineers

Project engineering technicians

Operation & maintenance specialists

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



Conventions

The manual uses the following conventions:

I. General conventions

Convention Description

Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Arial Narrow Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.

Terminal Display Terminal Display is in Courier New. Message input by the

user via the terminal is in boldface.

II. GUI conventions

Convention Description

< >Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, clickthe <OK> button.

[ ]Window names, menu items, data table and field names areinside square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User]window.

/ Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. Forexample, [File/Create/Folder].

III. Keyboard operation

Format Description

<Key>Press the key with the key name inside angle brackets. Forexample, <Enter>, <Tab>, <Backspace>, or <A>.

<Key1+Key2>Press the keys concurrently. For example, <Ctrl+Alt+A>

means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

IV. Symbols

Eye-catching symbols are also used in this document to highlight the points worthy of

special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:

Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.

Note: Means a complementary description.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



Environmental Protection

This product has been designed to comply with the requirements on environmental

protection. For the proper storage, use and disposal of this product, national laws andregulations must be observed.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



HUAWEI

HUAWEI CG9812User Manual

Part I System Description

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part I System DescriptionHUAWEI CG9812 Table of Contents


i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction to the CG9812......................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Orientation ......................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Position of CG9812 in UMTS/GPRS Network ................................................................... 1-1

1.2.1 Network Architecture............................................................................................... 1-1

1.2.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 1-3

1.3 CG9812 Networking Implementation................................................................................. 1-4

Chapter 2 Key Benefits ................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 Introduction to the Chapter ................................................................................................2-1

2.2 System Features................................................................................................................ 2-1

2.2.1 Multi-access ............................................................................................................ 2-1

2.2.2 Flexible CDR Format Conversion ........................................................................... 2-1

2.2.3 Large Capacity and Powerful Processing Capability .............................................. 2-1

2.2.4 High Reliability......................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2.5 Scalability ................................................................................................................ 2-2

2.3 Networking Capability........................................................................................................ 2-2

Chapter 3 System Architecture.................................................................................................... 3-1


3.2 Hardware Architecture....................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2.1 Appearance of CG9812 Cabinet............................................................................. 3-1

3.2.2 Cabinet Configuration ............................................................................................. 3-2

3.2.3 Typical Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-3

3.3 Functional Architecture...................................................................................................... 3-5

3.3.1 Logical Architecture................................................................................................. 3-5

3.3.2 CG9812 Network Adapters ..................................................................................... 3-7

3.3.3 Communicating with the GSN................................................................................. 3-8

3.3.4 Communicating with the Billing Center ................................................................... 3-9

3.3.5 Communicating with the LMT and the NMS ........................................................... 3-9

3.3.6 Heartbeat Path ........................................................................................................ 3-9

3.4 Software Architecture ........................................................................................................ 3-9

3.4.1 Key Terminologies................................................................................................... 3-9

3.4.2 Overall Architecture............................................................................................... 3-11

3.4.3 Service Processes ................................................................................................ 3-11

Chapter 4 Services and Functions .............................................................................................. 4-1


4.2 Network Functions............................................................................................................. 4-1

4.2.1 Interface to GSN...................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2.2 Interface to Billing Center........................................................................................ 4-1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




ii

4.3 Service Functions .............................................................................................................. 4-1

4.3.1 CDR Processing...................................................................................................... 4-1

4.3.2 Cluster System Function......................................................................................... 4-3

4.3.3 CDR Browsing and Querying Function ................................................................... 4-3

Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance........................................................................................ 5-1


5.2 OMC Networking................................................................................................................ 5-1

5.3 Operation and Maintenance Functions.............................................................................. 5-1

5.3.1 Security Management ............................................................................................. 5-2

5.3.2 Configuration Management..................................................................................... 5-2

5.3.3 Performance Management...................................................................................... 5-2

5.3.4 Fault Management .................................................................................................. 5-3

Chapter 6 Reliability...................................................................................................................... 6-1


6.2 System Reliability............................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2.1 Redundancy Design................................................................................................ 6-1

6.2.2 Component Selection, Control and Unification ....................................................... 6-1

6.2.3 Maintainability Design ............................................................................................. 6-2

6.2.4 Power Reliability Design ......................................................................................... 6-2

6.3 Hardware Reliability........................................................................................................... 6-2

6.3.1 Power Supply Design.............................................................................................. 6-2

6.3.2 Common Hardware Design..................................................................................... 6-2

6.3.3 Redundancy Design................................................................................................ 6-3

6.3.4 Over-voltage and Over-current Protection.............................................................. 6-3

6.3.5 Hot Backup.............................................................................................................. 6-3

6.4 Software Reliability ............................................................................................................ 6-3

6.4.1 Protection Measures ............................................................................................... 6-3

6.4.2 Error Tolerance ....................................................................................................... 6-3

6.4.3 Fault Monitoring and Processing............................................................................. 6-4

Chapter 7 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................7-1


7.2 System Performance ......................................................................................................... 7-1

7.2.1 Basic Performance.................................................................................................. 7-1

7.2.2 Reliability Specifications.......................................................................................... 7-1

7.3 Mechanical Data ................................................................................................................ 7-2

7.3.1 Dimensions.............................................................................................................. 7-2

7.3.2 Weight ..................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.3.3 Power Consumption................................................................................................ 7-2

7.4 Environmental Requirements ............................................................................................ 7-3

7.4.1 Storage Environment .............................................................................................. 7-3

7.4.2 Transportation Environment.................................................................................... 7-5

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




iii

7.4.3 Running Environment.............................................................................................. 7-7

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part I System DescriptionHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 1 Introduction to the CG9812


1-1

Chapter 1 Introduction to the CG9812

1.1 Orientation

The CG9812 (Charging Gateway) is a product developed with well compliance with

relevant 3GPP standards by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. (hereinafter referred to as

Huawei) for Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) solutions. It can

help operators construct cost-efficient and future-oriented mobile communication

networks.

The CG9812 is located between the UMTS network entities (including GGSN and

SGSN) and the billing center, and provides the mechanism to transfer charginginformation from the UMTS network entities to the billing center. It supports

R98/R99/R4 protocol and related functions:

Collecting CDRs from the UMTS network entities.

Intermediating CDR storage buffering.

Processing CDR data.

Transferring the CDR data to the Billing Center.

This chapter contains the following:

Position of CG9812 in UMTS/GPRS Network

CG9812 Networking Implementation

1.2 Position of CG9812 in UMTS/GPRS Network

1.2.1 Network Architecture

Figure 1-1 illustrates the typical networking of the CG9812 in UMTS/GPRS subsystem.

In the UMTS/GPRS network architecture, the CG9812 is a separate network element

(NE) installed in one cabinet and sits between GSN and the billing center, and provides

the functionality to transfer CDRs from the UMTS/GPRS network entities to the billing

center.

In doing so, the CG9812 interconnects with GSN and the billing center by LAN/WAN. In

addition, the CG9812 provides O&M interface and supports interconnection with the

NMS by LAN/WAN.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-2

R

GGSN

SGSN

CG server

DDN/E1/X.25

Billing center

CG client (Local end)

Ga

Ga

FTP/FTAMTCP/IP

CDR collector

NM center Equipment room

NM center

MML

Custom interface

CG client (Remote end)

MML

WAN

GGSN: Gateway GPRS Support Node SGSN: Serving GPRS Support Node

MML: Human-Machine Language(formerly Man-Machine Language)

FTP/FTAM: File Transfer Protocol/ FileTransfer, Access & Management

Figure 1-1 Typical networking of the CG9812

The external network entities/systems with which the CG9812 interconnects include

the GSN (including GGSN and SGSN), the Billing Center and the Network

Management System (NMS).

I. GSN

The CG9812 is interconnected with the GSN through LAN or WAN. A separate

10M/100M network adapter is provided on the CG9812 for this purpose.

The CG9812 supports the simultaneous accesses from the GSN (GGSN/SGSN) with

different versions. The GSN transfers CDRs in real time to the CG9812. Then the

CG9812 processes the CDRs and generates the final ones which will be transferred to

the billing center.

II. Billing Center

The CG9812 can interconnect with the billing center through LAN or WAN. A separate

10M/100M network adapter is provided on the CG9812 for this purpose.

The CG9812 supports the open and standard FTP/ FTAM protocol for the transfer of

CDR data to the billing center, which facilitates the integration with the billing center.

In the case of FTP, the CG9812 supports two modes, that is, the PULL mode and

the PUSH mode. In the PULL mode, the CG9812 acts as the server, and the CDR

collector as the client. The CDR collector collects the CDR file from the CG9812.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-3

In the PUSH mode, the CG9812 acts as the client, and the CDR collector acts as

the server. The CG9812 sends the CDR file to the billing center.

In the case of FTAM, the CG9812 supports the PULL mode. It acts as the

responder, and the CDR collector acts as the initiator in a way similar to FTPcommunication. The CDR collector collects the CDR file from the CG9812.

III. LMT and NMS

The CG9812 provides the O&M interface and supports the management from the Local

Management Tool (LMT) and NMS. The CG9812 can interconnect with LMT/NMS by

LAN/WAN. A separate 10M/100M network adapter is provided on the CG9812 for this

purpose.

The LMT, which is the client end of the CG9812, is a friendly GUI tool, and can be run

on a PC placed at the local end of the CG9812 or remote NMS. The LMT can be easily

integrated into the remote NMS. The LMT talks with the CG9812 through MML over

TCP/IP, and provides abundant functions, for example, User Management,

Configuration Management, Fault Management, CDR Query and Browse, and so on,

which facilitate the O&M of the CG9812 locally or remotely from the NMS. The CG9812

can report all fault events to the NMS, accept instructions on respective fault events

from NMS, and trigger respective mechanisms, through MML over TCP/IP.

1.2.2 External Interfaces

Figure 1-2 shows the external interfaces of the CG9812.

CG9812

BC

GSN(GGSN/SGSN)

MML FTP/FTAM

Ga

M2000

OSS

Core Network

OSS: Operating Support System

Figure 1-2 External interface of the CG9812

The CG9812 complies with UMTS specifications, and provides standard, open protocol

interfaces. Table 1-1 lists the major external interfaces of the CG9812.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-4

Table 1-1 External interfaces of the CG9812

Connected entities Interface name Applied protocol

GSN(GGSN/SGSN)—CG Ga GTP’

CG——Billing Center Billing Center Interface FTP/FTAM

CG——NMS O&M Interface MML Over TCP/IP

1.3 CG9812 Networking Implementation

The CG9812 features excellent compatibility and scalability, and can be smoothly

evolved to UMTS R98, R99, R4, and so on.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part I System DescriptionHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 2 Key Benefits


2-1

Chapter 2 Key Benefits

2.1 Introduction to the Chapter

The CG9812 features advanced and stable system architecture, powerful networking

capability, and abundant service functions.

This chapter presents the features of the CG9812 in following aspects:

System Features

Networking Capability

2.2 System Features

2.2.1 Multi-access

The CG9812 supports the simultaneous accesses from GSN (GGSN/SGSN) with

different versions. It can collect CDRs from GSN (GGSN/SGSN). The CDRs originated

from GSN (GGSN/SGSN) with different versions can be stored separately and open to

the billing center.

2.2.2 Flexible CDR Format Conversion

The billing center of the operator has special requirements on the CDR formats. For

example, the system may require converting the original CDRs of binary format into the

final CDRs of other formats like binary, text or ASN.1 format, or require extracting some

specific fields in the original CDR to combine into a new CDR to provide to the billing

center. The CG allows you to configure and convert the CDR format. This meets the

requirements of operators.

2.2.3 Large Capacity and Powerful Processing Capability

The valid capacity of hard disks configured for the CG is directly related to the CDR

buffer capability of the CG. The higher the CDR buffer capability, the less urgent for

CDR storage in the billing center and the more secure for CDRs. Currently, the valid

capacity of the hard disk configured for the CG is enough to support 1,800,000

subscribers. The CDR processing capability can be 3000 CDRs/second. What’s more,

the CDR data can be stored for at least seven days in the CG. In addition, this capacity

can be further expanded.

2.2.4 High Reliability

The CG9812 has implemented the following mechanisms to ensure its high reliability:

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part I System DescriptionHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 2 Key Benefits


2-2

The CG9812 employs two minicomputers to compose a High Availability (HA)

System which supports auto-switchover between the primary and the secondary

nodes. When the current active node fails or cannot work properly, the peer node

will activate itself automatically to ensures its service uninterrupted. The storage device is highly secured with 1+1 backup, each of which adopts

RAID5 plus hotspare.

Key interface/Path redundancy for the Ga interface and CG-BC interface. For

reliable communication, the CG9812 can connect to a SGSN, GGSN and BC

respectively by two redundancy links.

The CDRs can be transferred in real time to multiple remote workstations for

backup and reserved there for a pre-defined or configured period before being

deleted automatically. When required by the billing center, these CDRs can be

reopened to the billing center.

At least two copies of system data are kept in separate locations for redundancy

and in case of any accident. These copies of system data will be loaded and

validated against each other automatically by the restoration or recovering

process.

The whole system can be backed up to the tape drive regularly. In this case, you

can recover the system if a fault occurs.

2.2.5 Scalability

The CG9812 employs a modular structure. It is convenient and flexible in capacity and

function expansion, for which new modules can be added to import new functions and

technologies and to extend application areas.

When the capacity of the CG9812 need to be expanded to satisfy the requirement of

increased system capacity, the following measures can be considered, including

adding CPU and memory, adding hard disks, and so on.

2.3 Networking Capability

The CG9812 provides separate 10M/100M network adapters for interconnection with

GSN, the billing center, and the NMS respectively, and supports interconnection with

the GSN, billing center and NMS by LAN/WAN. The WAN can be DDN, E1, X.25, and

so on.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part I System DescriptionHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 3 System Architecture


3-1

Chapter 3 System Architecture


This chapter presents the system architecture in the following aspects:

Hardware Architecture

Functional Architecture

Software Architecture

3.2 Hardware Architecture

3.2.1 Appearance of CG9812 Cabinet

The CG9812 adopts N68-22 cabinet of Huawei, which is a standard 19-inch cabinet

and accords with IEC297 standards, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 CG9812 cabinet

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-2

3.2.2 Cabinet Configuration

The CG9812 is installed in one cabinet. The main hardware components include active

and standby CG9812 servers, two LAN Switches and two disk arrays.

1) If Netra 240 minicomputer is employed for the UNIX platform, the internal

configuration of the cabinet is shown in Figure 3-2.

CG9812 Cabinet

Power distribution frame (2U)

Quidway 3528G-1 (1U)Cabling frame（1U）

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Non-standard dummy panel (1U)

SUN StorEdge 3310-1 (2U)



Non-standard dummy panel (1U)Reserved for tape drive (1U)


SUN Netra 240-1 (2U)


Reserved for tape drive (1U)

Non-standard dummy panel (1U)SUN Netra 240-0 (2U)

Quidway 3528G-0 (1U)Cabling frame (1U)

46U

Figure 3-2 Configuration of cabinet (with Netra 240 plus StorEdge 3310)

2) If Netra 20 minicomputer is employed for the UNIX platform, the internal

configuration of the cabinet is shown in Figure 3-3.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-3

CG9812 Cabinet


Quidway 3526-1 (1U)Cabling frame (1U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)






SUN Netra 20-1 (4U)


SUN Netra 20-0 (4U)

Quidway 3526-0 (1U)

Cabling frame (1U)

TC (Perle LOLAN) (1U)Non-standard dummy panel (1U)

Figure 3-3 Configuration of cabinet (with Netra 20 plus StorEdge 3310)

3.2.3 Typical Configuration

The CG9812 is configured in a separate cabinet. To adapt to different requirements of

capability and capacity, the CG9812 supports customized configuration. Under the

standard configuration, it supports 1,800,000 subscribers can be supported, and the

CDR data can be stored for at least seven days.

Table 3-1 and Table 3-2 present typical configurations of the main components of the

CG9812 under the UNIX platform.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-4

I. SUN Netra 240 plus StorEdge 3310

Table 3-1 Typical configuration of the CG9812 (with Netra 240)

SerialNo. Components Vendor/Model Quantity Description

1 Mini computer Sun Netra 240 2 PCS

Each Sun Netra 240configuration:

CPU: 2*1.28 GHz

Memory: 2 GB

Hard disk: 2*73 GB

Ethernet adapter: 1*4integrated adapter/1*2interfaces adapter

2 Disk arraySun StorEdge3310

2 PCS

Each Disk Array

configuration: SCSI card: 2*

bi-channel SCSI card

Hard disk: 5*73 GB

3 LAN switchHuaweiQuidwayS3528G

2 PCS NA

II. SUN Netra 20 plus StorEdge 3310

Table 3-2 Typical configuration of the CG9812 (with Netra 20)

SerialNo.

Components Vendor/Model Quantity Description

1 Mini computer Sun Netra 20 2 PCS

Each Sun Netra 20configuration:

CPU: 1*1.2 GHz

Memory: 1 GB

Hard disk: 2*73 GB

Tape drive: DDS4

Ethernet adapter: 1

integrated adapter/1*1interface adapter/1*4interfaces adapter

2 Disk arraySun StorEdge3310

2 PCS

Each disk arrayconfiguration:

SCSI card: 2*bi-channel SCSI card

Hard disk: 5*73 GB

3Terminalconcentrator

Perle LOLAN orothers

1 PCS NA

4 LAN switch

Huawei

Quidway S3526 2 PCS NA

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-5

Note:

Because minicomputer might be updated, the minicomputer module might be different

from the actually delivered model.

3.3 Functional Architecture

This part presents the following aspects:

Logical Architecture

CG9812 Network Adapters

Communicating with the GSN

Communicating with the Billing Center Communicating with the LMT and the NMS

Heartbeat Path

3.3.1 Logical Architecture

The CG9812 adopts a dual-system design. Two servers are operating in the active and

standby mode. Heartbeat link is set up between the servers. Handshake messages are

exchanged between them for each server to monitor the operating status of the other.

Whenever the active node becomes faulty, the standby node automatically becomes

active. The purpose is to ensure the services uninterrupted. In addition, each serverprovides separate network adapters for communication with the GSN, the Billing Center,

and the NMS, respectively. The key interface/path, for example, the Ga interface and

CG-BC interface, supports 1+1 redundancy. That is, with every SGSN/GGSN and BC,

two logical links can be provided respectively on two physical links. So, the system has

a dual-plane structure, which further improves the reliability of the system.

1) If Netra 240 minicomputer is employed, the logical architecture of the CG9812 is

shown in Figure 3-4.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-6

Mirror Mirror

NET Mgt

Netra 240-0 Netra 240-1

NET Mgt

SCSI card

bge0,bge1,bge2,bge3bge0,bge1,bge2,bge3

ce0 ce0

LAN

Heartbeat

ce1 ce1

NAFO NAFO

LAN

LAN

To NMS and LMT To GSN To BC

float IP float IPfloat IP

Maintenance terminal

Private network

3310-0

3310-1

Mirror

SCSI card

Figure 3-4 Logical architecture of the CG9812 (with Netra 240)

2) If Netra 20 minicomputer is employed, the logical architecture of the CG9812 is


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-7

Mirror Mirror

ttya

Netra 20-0 Netra 20-1

ttya

SCSI card SCSI card

qfe0,qfe1qfe2,qfe3

eri0 eri0

LAN

Heartbeat

hme0 hme0

NAFO NAFO

LAN

LAN

To NMS and LMT To GSN To BC

float IP float IPfloat IP

TC

Private network

qfe0,qfe1,qfe2,qfe3

3310-0

3310-1

Mirror

1 2 3 4

Figure 3-5 Logical architecture of the CG9812 (with Netra 20)

3.3.2 CG9812 Network Adapters

The CG9812 servers provide sereval network adapters for communication with other

equipment and each other, as listed in Table 3-3.

Table 3-3 Network adapters of the CG9812 Server

No.Network

adapters ofNetra 240

Networkadapters of

Netra 20Function

1

bge0 qfe0

Connected to the LMT and NMS.

2 bge1/bge2 qfe1/qfe2 Connected to the GSN(SGSN/GGSN).

3 bge3 qfe3 Connected to the billing center, providing abilling interface.

4 ce0 eri0 Heartbeat link 1.

5 ce1 hme0 Heartbeat link 2.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-8

3.3.3 Communicating with the GSN

I. Communications Solution

The SGSN/GGSN connects with the CG9812 and sends the CDRs to 129.2.1.3 (the

default float IP configuration) through LAN Switch.

The CG9812 receives the CDRs from the SGSN/GGSN through Ga interface.

II. Implementation Mechanism

The CG9812 communicates with the host of the SGSN/GGSN through the network

adapter bge1 and adapter bge2 (with Netra 240).

The bge1 (qfe1 for Netra 20) of the active/standby CG9812 server connects with

the LAN Switch-0 and forms the active plane.

The bge2 (qfe2 for Netra 20) of the active/standby CG9812 server connects with

the LAN Switch-1 and forms the standby plane.

The two core LAN Switches are interconnected via the cascade cables.

III. Acquiring CDRs from the SGSN/GGSN

The CDR sending process is automatically triggered by the internal timer of the

SGSN/GGSN. The timer monitors the CDRs in the CDR pool. If there are CDRs in the

CDR pool, they will be sent to the CG9812 immediately. The software is set in ms level.

So the process can be considered as real-time sending.

IV. Distinguishing CDRs

The CG9812 eliminates the transmitting overhead of the CDRs sent by the

SGSN/GGSN, consolidates and saves the CDRs in the directory of /var/frontsave/R4.

The CDRs are called original CDRs. R4 is the access point name. The directory name

depends on the APName parameter value in igwb.ini configuration file. Here is only an

example.

Based on the distinguishing and conversion conditions, the CG9812 distinguishes and

converts the original CDRs into the CDRs that you need. This process is called CDR

distinguishing and conversion. The distinguished and converted CDRs are called finalCDRs.

CDR distinguishing is implemented in accordance with the format library. The format

library is in the directory of /opt/igwb/config/format.

Before generating the final CDRs, the CG9812 generates a temporary buffering file.

Then, the CG9812 generates the formal CDR files based on the trigger conditions (file

size or time interval) configured in igwb.ini.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-9

3.3.4 Communicating with the Billing Center

The CG9812 server communicates with the billing center by using bge3 (qfe3 for Netra

20) for the billing center to collect CDRs. The communication protocol can be FTP or

FTAM.

Normally, the billing center simultaneously logs in to the active and standby CG9812

servers. The active and standby CG9812 servers provide one float IP address to the

billing center.

3.3.5 Communicating with the LMT and the NMS

The bge0 (qfe0 for Netra 20) is used for connection between the NMS and the LMT,

providing a man-machine interface.

The bge0 (qfe0 for Netra 20) of the active/standby CG9812 server shall be set with thesame float IP address and shall be in the same network segment as the LMT/NMS.

3.3.6 Heartbeat Path

Heartbeat paths are configured between the active and standby CG9812 servers to

exchange handshake messages. With the heartbeat paths, each CG9812 server can

monitor the operating status of the other and back up the status for future switchover.

The status backed up includes CDR sequence number, front disk state, back disk state,

and so on. The system provides two heartbeat paths, which are called the “private

network” inside the system.

The first heartbeat path is two ce0 (eri0 for Netra 20) between active/standby servers

linked with the RJ45 cable. The second heartbeat path is two ce1 (hme0 for Netra 20)

between active/standby servers linked cross over RJ45 cable. When the first heartbeat

path is broken, the CG9812 servers use the second heartbeat path for communication.

3.4 Software Architecture

This section introduces the key terminologies, overall architecture and service process

of the CG9812.

3.4.1 Key Terminologies

This section introduces the key terminologies of the CG9812. Correct understanding of

the key terminologies will facilitate the use and maintenance of the CG9812.

I. Access Point

To access the GSNs of different release versions, “access point” is used in the design

of the CG9812. Based on the parameter configuration and operation maintenance, one

access point is associated with one ap_proc process. This process realizes the

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-10

modules that communicate with the GSNs and the modules that store and convert the

CDRs.

II. Channel

Channel is a logical concept. A channel refers to the CDR processing modes and

storage directories that match a certain distinguishing condition. Simply speaking, one

channel is associated with one CDR storage path. Only the back save disk has the

channel.

III. Original CDR

The original CDRs refer to the unprocessed CDRs that the CG9812 receives from the

switches. The original CDRs are saved in files with a fixed size of 3MB for each in the

CG9812 disk. These files are called original CDR files.

IV. Final CDR

The CDRs that have been preprocessed (distinguishing and format conversion) by the

CG9812 are called final CDRs. The final CDRs can be saved as fixed-size or

fixed-interval files. These files are called final CDRs.

V. Format Library

The format library is the core that the CG9812 converts the CDRs. It is associated with

one format conversion module (dynamic link library) and a series of format

configuration files. The format library is designed to make the CDR format dynamicallyconfigurable, but not hard-coded.

VI. Active/Standby

Active/standby is a pair of basic concepts for a cluster system. In a cluster system, if a

node provides external services, its state is called “active”. If a node currently does not

provide external services, its state is called “standby”.

VII. Primary/Secondary

Primary/secondary is a basic concept for a cluster system. In a cluster system, two

nodes may be peered or not peered. If they are not peered, then they can be defined as

primary or secondary. In this case, one node will be set with higher priority. If this node

runs normally, it has the priority to control the resources of the cluster system.

VIII. Resources

The physical equipment and logical equipment that are shared by the nodes of the

cluster system are called “resources”, such as shared storage media, and float IP

address.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-11

3.4.2 Overall Architecture

Overall, the CG9812 is a client/server system with multi-processes and multi-threads.

Based on independent services, the CG9812 software is set with the thread modules.Then the thread modules with most related service functions are combined into one

process. So the entire software forms a multi-process and multi-thread architecture.

For the communication modes between processes, the CG9812 adopts the

client/server mode (currently, this is the most mature application mode). Specially, the

CG9812 has one process as the core process with other processes as sub-processes

so that one process can schedule and monitor the sub-processes of other services.

The overall software architecture of the CG9812 is shown in Figure 3-6.

Parameter

configuration

process

Kernel process

CG9812 Server

GSN

Operation &

maintenance

process

Dual-process

process

Access

point

process

iGWB

Client

Figure 3-6 CG9812 software architecture

3.4.3 Service Processes

As shown in Figure 3-6, the CG9812 server is composed of a kernel process, a

dual-system process, an access point process, and an operation and maintenance

process. Each process contains several service thread modules that are relatively

independent of each other.

I. Kernel Process

The kernel process is the core of the whole software. It acts as the Transmission

Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) server for the other processes. It isresponsible for starting, stopping, and monitoring the access point process and the

operation and maintenance process.

II. Access Point Process

The access point process incorporates the main service functions of the CG9812,

including CDR reception, CDR processing, and CDR storage. The service functions

are integrated to be a network module, a front disk module, a CDR processing module,

and a back disk module. The four modules constitute a CDR processing flow, in which

the service logic is uni-directional and can be cut down, as shown in Figure 3-7. (The

arrows stand for the flow directions of the CDR data.)

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-12

Bill processing flow

Receives bills and uses a particular

protocol to ensure bill transmission

against repetition or lossNetwork module

Saves the bills received by network

module to form original bills

Front disk module

Combines and sorts bills as required,and transmits bills to back disk module

Bill processing module

Saves bills by channel to form final

bills and provides bills to billing center

Back disk module

FTP/FTAM Billing

center

GSN

Generates and

transmits bills

Figure 3-7 CDR processing flow

III. Operation and Maintenance Process

The operation and maintenance process integrates the operability and maintainability

functions of the CG9812.

IV. Dual-system Process

It starts and manages kernel process to implement functionality details of the dual

system.

V. Parameter Confiugrtion Process

The parameter configuration process is the parameter configuration module of the

CG9812. The CG9812 supports remote parameter configuration through the GUI of theparameter configuration console.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part I System DescriptionHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 4 Services and Functions


4-1

Chapter 4 Services and Functions


This chapter describes the functions and services available on the CG9812.

The functions of CG9812 fall into three categories: network functions, service functions

and operation & maintenance functions.

Network functions include interface to GSN, and billing center.

Service includes CDRs processing functions, Cluster Functions, CDRs Browsing

and Querying, and so on.

Operation and maintenance functions include security management, configurationmanagement, performance management, and fault management.

Network functions and service functions are described in this chapter. Operation &

maintenance functions are described in Chapter 5 “Operation and Maintenance”.

4.2 Network Functions

4.2.1 Interface to GSN

CG9812 supports standard Ga interface to GSN, and collects CDRs from GSN in real

time through GTP’ protocol, and processes the CDRs and output final CDRs which will

be provided to the billing center.

4.2.2 Interface to Billing Center

The CG9812 provides industry standard FTP/FTAM protocol interface to the billing

center. The CDRs can be transferred to the operator’s designated billing center. Both

pull mode and push mode can be supported.

4.3 Service Functions

4.3.1 CDR Processing

CG9812 supports abundant CDR processing functionalities including but not limited to:

I. Collecting CDRs

The CG collects CDRs from SGSN/GGSN. Currently, the supported CDR formats

include S-CDR, G-CDR, M-CDR, S-SMO-CDR, S-SMT-CDR, LCS-MT-CDR,

LCS-MO-CDR, and LCS-NI-CDR. The last three types of CDRs are only available in

R4 or later versions.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-2

II. Pre-processing CDRs

1) Consolidating CDRs

This function is optional.

The CG can consolidate multiple intermediate CDRs generated during one PDP

activation into a final CDR.

Currently, the CDR formats that can be consolidated include S-CDR and G-CDR.

2) Sorting CDRs

The CG raises the concept of “channel”. The CG stores the collected CDRs to different

channels according to some sorting condition. The sorting conditions are configurable.

Currently, the supported modes include sorting by CDR type and by billing feature.

3) Confirming CDR validity

The CG supports CDR validity confirmation. The CG decodes the collected CDRs. The

error CDRs, possibly caused by SGSN/GGSN or network errors, cannot be decoded by

CG and cannot be sent to the billing center.

III. Storing CDRs

1) Original CDR storage

The CDR collected from SGSN/GGSN system and not processed by CG is called an

original CDR.

The CG supports original CDR storage. The original CDRs are stored in physical media

for some days (configurable) before they are deleted.

2) Final CDR storage

The CDR processed by CG is called a final CDR, which will be transferred to the billing

center.

The CG supports final CDR storage. The final CDRs are stored in physical media for

some days (configurable) before they are deleted.

IV. Auto-deleting CDRs

The CG supports auto-deletion of original and final CDRs. The original and final CDRsare stored as files. The expired CDR files will be deleted automatically. You can set the

number of days the original and final CDRs are stored. The default value is seven days.

V. Auto-backup CDRs

The CG supports auto-backup of original and final CDRs. After proper configuration,

the CDRs can be backed up to local or remote disks or other storage media.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-3

4.3.2 Cluster System Function

I. Auto switchover

The CG supports auto switchover between active and standby servers. When the faultoccurs to the active server, the standby one will activate itself and take the service over

automatically.

II. Auto synchronization

The CG supports auto synchronization between the active and standby servers. If the

dual system does not install the shared disk array, the active server can transmit the

status information of the local end to the peer end regularly.

III. Manual switchover

The CG supports manual switchover between active and standby servers. You can

perform the manual switchover on CG maintenance terminal.

4.3.3 CDR Browsing and Querying Function

The CG9812 supports CDR browse. The contents of the CDRs can be browsed in

human readable format on the LMT.

The CG9812 also supports CDRs query. The CDR query criteria can be a logical

expression based on a CDR field or a combination of CDR fields. The CDR query result

can be browsed on the LMT.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part I System DescriptionHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance


5-1

Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance


This chapter presents the followings contents:

OMC Networking

Operation and Maintenance Functions

5.2 OMC Networking

The CG9812 supports customized man-machine interface and offers Security

Management, Configuration Management, Performance Management, and Fault

Management.

The CG9812 OMC can not only be controlled through the LMT, but also be managed by

iManager M2000 in a centralized way. The O&M networking of the CG9812 is

illustrated in Figure 5-1.

CG9812

LMT

Billing Center

LAN

WAN

LAN/

WAN

GGSN/SGSN

iManager

M2000

Figure 5-1 CG9812 O&M networking

5.3 Operation and Maintenance Functions

The operation and maintenance functions of the CG9812 include:

Security Management

Configuration Management

Performance Management

Fault Management

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-2

5.3.1 Security Management

I. Overview of Security Management

The CG9812 O&M supports multiple users. For the purpose of security andconvenience, the system adopts authority management and log management.

II. Authority Management

The CG9812 supports authority management to prevent unauthorized access to the

system. In doing so, two user levels, including the administrator and the common user,

are defined and supported. The administrators have complete and unrestricted access

to all the system functions including user adding, user edition, user deletion, and user

rights assignment, and so on. The common users has a separate account. The user’s

operation rights are authorized by the system administrator.

III. Log management

It enables the querying of user operation records and system operation records. The

user operation records provide details on user name, user operation, and so on. The

system operation records provide details on the system running status, critical events,

and so on.

5.3.2 Configuration Management

The CG9812 parameter configuration function supports to add, delete, modify or query

the configuration data necessary for system operation.

The data configuration of the CG9812 provides the following functions:

Offline and online data configuration

Remote and local data configuration

Data backup and restoration

5.3.3 Performance Management

The CG9812 performance management function measures the following items:

Heartbeat

CPU usage

Physical memory available/total

Front storage available/total

Back storage available/total

The performance measurement provides original data of the equipment operation

status, equipment management situation and network optimization.

The heartbeat, CPU, memory, and storage measurements are done and reported in

real time.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-3

5.3.4 Fault Management

I. Overview of Fault Management

Fault management function helps to check, locate and fix system faults during itsoperation. In addition, useful tools are available for routine maintenance of the system

and against the occurrence of faults. Fault management includes the following items:

System Self-Test

Alarm Management

Maintenance Management

Trace Management

II. System Self-Test

The CG9812 regularly tests itself on working conditions of hardware, software as wellas heartbeat, working environment, and so on. The CG9812 checks the occurrence

and severity of the event, processes the issue, and minimizes the impact on the

system.

III. Alarm Management

The CG9812 alarm management function supports to:

Detect and report in real time any fault or abnormity of the equipment

Generate audio and visual alarm signals through the alarm box

Present the alarm information as well as handling suggestion at the local

maintenance terminal to help troubleshoot the faults efficiently

IV. Maintenance Management

Maintenance management, as the basic function of the CG9812, can be conducted

conveniently through the LMT which is provided as a friendly GUI tool. Based on the

functions of the maintenance commands, maintenance management can be divided

into the following classes:

Table 5-1 Classification of maintenance management operations

Maintenance management class Including

Equipment Management Equipment state query

Signaling Message Management

Tracking diameter message

Tracking work flow message

Tracking debug information

CDRs Management

Browsing CDRs

Querying CDRs

CDRs Statistics

Printing CDRs

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-4

Maintenance management class Including

Other maintenance functions Setting software parameters, and so on

V. Trace Management

The CG9812 trace management function supports to trace protocol messages and

workflow messages. The protocol message means messages exchanged between the

CG9812 and the GSN. The workflow message means internal workflow messages

exchanged between the thread service modules and/or processes. The tracing

messages can be output and displayed in real-time on LMT. This function helps to

locate and fix the network or communication problems.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part I System DescriptionHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 6 Reliability


6-1

Chapter 6 Reliability


CG9812 is a bill handling and cache device. Its reliability design covers system,

hardware and software.

This chapter contains the following sections:

System Reliability

Hardware Reliability

Software Reliability

6.2 System Reliability

The system reliability design founds itself on the all-round reliability analysis to the

system. The CG9812 is designed with such reliability design methods as redundant

configuration and backup. Besides, it improves the system maintainability by optimizing

system fault detection/isolation technologies.

6.2.1 Redundancy Design

For the CG9812, the system redundancy design which shall be considered and have

been implemented includes:

Table 6-1 Redundancy Design

Module name Feature

Power supply moduleWorking in load sharing mode.

Without affecting the system in case one fails.

Servers

Working in active/standby mode (1+1 backup).

In case that the active server fails, the standby serverwill activate itself and take over the job automatically,

and all services will not be interrupted.

6.2.2 Component Selection, Control and Unification

Selection and usage of components are the keys to ensuring component reliability. For

the CG9812, component types, specifications and suppliers are selected according to

the requirements of product reliability, with the component replacement and unification

focused. The component unification and reliability model analysis reduce the number of

components used and improve the system usability.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-2

6.2.3 Maintainability Design

Maintainability design aims at meeting the specified quantity and quality requirements

for maintainability, especially the requirement for reducing maintenance time. The

maintenance design covers product design and maintenance simplification,

reachability, standardization and exchangeability, modularization, error prevention

design and identifier, testing and diagnosis technology, and human and environment

factors. The details are described as follows:

The LMT, developed as a friendly GUI tool with abundant O&M functions, is

convenient and practical for the O&M of the CG9812.

The servers support automatic or manual switchover, and the disk arrays can be

hot-pluggable.

The implemented mechanism of system monitoring and self-management

supports real time detection of fault automatically and respective dealing of the

fault. The corresponding alarm will be issued or reported to NMS and cleared

when the fault has been eliminated.

6.2.4 Power Reliability Design

Power reliability design is to improve the reliability of the power supply through such

measures as power over-current/over-voltage protection, internal temperature

adjustment and protection, redundancy design, and independent protection device.

6.3 Hardware Reliability

In the CG9812, the widely applied reliability design methods include redundant

configuration supporting automatic switchover. Besides, it improves the system

maintainability through system fault detection/isolation technologies.

6.3.1 Power Supply Design

Adopting distributed power supply scheme, and supplying power by the redundant

high-frequency DC. This scheme features high efficiency and excellent stability.

Adopting N+1 backup design to ensure the reliability of the power system.

6.3.2 Common Hardware Design

Adopting two minicomputers to compose a High Availability (HA) System which

supports auto-switchover between the primary and the secondary nodes. All

service-critical components, for example, control card, power supply module, LAN

port, hard disk, server, and so on, are duplicated.

The storage device is highly secured with 1+1 backup, each of which adopts

RAID5 plus hotspare.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-3

6.3.3 Redundancy Design

In case of software or hardware fault, the system will not be interrupted because of

redundancy design. It is ensured that services will be switched to backup devices

without affecting the normal running of the system.

6.3.4 Over-voltage and Over-current Protection

The +5 V/-48 V power input is protected by the over-voltage/over-current protection

measures. They comply with the ITU-T Recommendation G.703 and relative

specifications.

6.3.5 Hot Backup

To improve system reliability, hot backup is one of the most commonly used methods intelecommunications equipment. These two aspects are considered in the design of the

CG9812.

Fault detection: Performing online monitoring of the modules and components to

detect any fault in real time.

Switchover mechanism: Implementing auto-switchover between the active node

and standby node through two more path signals between them.

6.4 Software Reliability

6.4.1 Protection Measures

Modularization idea is adopted to design the software. The software modules are

based on loose coupling mechanism, for which other modules will not be affected in

case that one module fails. Besides, error detection, error isolation and error recovery

are added to avoid potential problems.

6.4.2 Error Tolerance

The error tolerance of the software system can avoid the breakdown of the entire

system in case of the failure occurring to a software portion. That is, the system has the

self-healing ability when errors occur. The software error tolerance capabilities include

the following aspects:

Periodical check of key resources

Task monitoring

Storage protection

Data check

Operation log storage

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-4

6.4.3 Fault Monitoring and Processing

The reliability and health of the software system, to a great extent, is ensured by the

fault monitoring system and proper troubleshooting, especially after the software is

commercialized. Fault processing includes the following parts:

Backup and switchover mechanism

Isolation

Restarting and automatic recovery

Overload control

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part I System DescriptionHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 7 Technical Specifications


7-1

Chapter 7 Technical Specifications


This chapter describes the technical specifications. It contains the following sections:

System Performance

Mechanical Data

Environmental Requirements

7.2 System Performance

7.2.1 Basic Performance

Table 7-1 Performance specifications for the CG9812

Parameter Specification

Hardware capacityStandard configuration: 219 GB

Full configuration: 730 GB

Performance of the integratedequipment

3000 CDRs/second

7.2.2 Reliability Specifications

Table 7-2 Major reliability specifications for the CG9812

Parameter Specification

System Availability (A) ≥99.999%

System MTBF ≥10 years

Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) ≤30 mins (excluding preparation time)

DOWN duration <3 mins/year

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-2

7.3 Mechanical Data

7.3.1 Dimensions

Table 7-3 Cabinet dimensions of the CG9812

Item Performance specification

Hardware platform SUN Netra 240 or SUN Netra 20

Width 600 mm

Depth 800 mmCabinetdimensions

Height 2,200 mm

Available height of cabinet 46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

7.3.2 Weight

Table 7-4 Cabinet weight of the CG9812


Cabinet weight 310 kg

Designed bearing capacity of thefloor in the equipment room

450 kg/m2

7.3.3 Power Consumption

Table 7-5 Power consumption specifications of the CG9812


Rated voltage –48V DCPower supply

Voltage fluctuations –57V–40V

Power consumption SUN platform ≤ 1.5 kW

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-3

7.4 Environmental Requirements

7.4.1 Storage Environment

I. Climate Environment

Table 7-6 Climate environment requirements

Item Range

Height above sea level ≤ 5,000 m

Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Temperature –40°C to +70°C

Temperature change rate ≤ 1°C/min

Relative humidity

10% to 100%

Solar radiation ≤ 1,120 W/s²

Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s²

Wind speed ≤ 30 m/s

II. Biological Environment

It is required to avoid propagation of epiphyte, mildew and other microorganism.

It is required to prevent rodent animals, such as mouse.

III. Air Cleanness

There is no explosive, conductive, magneto-conductive or corrosive dust.

The density of mechanically active materials shall comply with the requirements listed

in Table 7-7.

Table 7-7 Density requirements for mechanically active materials

Mechanically active material Unit Content

Suspending dust mg/m³ ≤ 5.00

Precipitable dust mg/m²·h ≤ 20.0

Sand mg/m³ ≤ 300

Note:

1) Suspending dust: diameter ≤ 75 µm

2) Precipitable dust: 75 µm ≤ diameter ≤ 150 µm

3) Sand: 150 µm ≤ diameter ≤ 1,000 µm

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-4

The density of chemically active materials shall comply with the requirements listed in

Table 7-8.

Table 7-8 Density requirements for chemically active materials

Chemically active material Unit Content

SO2 mg/m³ 0.30 to 1.00

H2S mg/m³ 0.10 to 0.50

NO2 mg/m³ 0.50 to 1.00

NH3 mg/m³ 1.00 to 3.00

Cl2 mg/m³ 0.10 to 0.30

HCl mg/m³ 0.10 to 0.50

HF mg/m³ 0.01 to 0.03

O3 mg/m³ 0.05 to 0.10

IV. Mechanical Stress

Table 7-9 Mechanical stress requirements

Item Sub-item Range

Offset ≤ 7.0 mm /

Accelerated speed

/

≤ 20.0 m/s²Sinusoidal vibration

Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz

Impulse responsespectrum II

≤ 250 m/s²Non-stable impulse

Payload ≤ 5 kPa

Note:

1) Impulse response spectrum: It refers to the maximum accelerated speedresponse curve generated by the equipment under the specified impulse motivation.Impulse response spectrum II means that the duration of half-sine impulse response

spectrum is 6 ms.2) Payload: It refers to the bearable pressure from the upper piled equipment withpackage in prescribed piling mode.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-5

7.4.2 Transportation Environment


Table 7-10 Climate environment requirements

Item Range



Temperature –40°C to +70°C

Temperature change rate ≤ 3°C/min

Relative humidity 10% to 100%

Solar radiation ≤

1,120 W/s²Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s²


Rain ≤ 6 mm/min




III. Air Cleanness


The density of mechanically active materials shall comply with the requirements shown

in Table 7-11.



Suspending dust

mg/m³ No requirement


Sand mg/m³ ≤ 100

Note:




7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-6

The density of chemically active materials shall comply with the requirements listed in

Table 7-12.



SO2 mg/m³ ≤ 1.00

H2S mg/m³ ≤ 0.50

NO2 mg/m³ ≤ 1.00

NH3 mg/m³ ≤ 3.00

Cl2 mg/m³ ≤ 0.30

HCl mg/m³ ≤ 0.05

HF mg/m³ ≤ 0.03

O3 mg/m³ ≤ 0.10



Item Sub-item Range

Offset ≤ 7.5 mm / /

Accelerated speed / ≤ 20.0m/s²

≤ 40.0 m/s²Sinusoidalvibration

Frequency range

2 Hz to 9Hz

9 Hz to200 Hz

200 Hz to 500Hz

Spectrum density ofaccelerated speed

10 m²/s³ 3 m²/s³ 1 m²/s³

Random vibration

Frequency range

2 Hz to 9Hz

9 Hz to200 Hz

200 Hz to 500Hz

Impulse response

spectrum II

≤ 300 m/s²Non-stableimpulse

Payload ≤ 10 kPa

Note:

1) Impulse response spectrum: It refers to the maximum accelerated speedresponse curve generated by the equipment under the specified impulse motivation.Impulse response spectrum II means that the duration of half-sine impulse responsespectrum is 6 ms.

2) Payload: It refers to the bearable pressure from the upper piled equipment withpackage in prescribed piling mode.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-7

7.4.3 Running Environment


Table 7-14 Temperature and humidity requirements

Climate item Working for a long term Working for a short term

Temperature +5 °C to +45 °C –5 °C to +55 °C

Relative humidity 5% to 85% 5% to 95%

Note:

1) The measurement points of temperature and humidity of the CG9812 refer to thevalues measured 1.5 meters above the floor and 0.4 meter away from the front of theCG9812 shelf when there are no protection panels in the front and back of theCG9812 shelf.

2) Short term means that the consecutive working duration is not more than 48 hoursand that the accumulated working duration of a year is not more than 15 days.

Table 7-15 Other climate environment requirements

Item Range



Temperature change rate ≤ 5 °C/h

Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s²

Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s²


IP level IP50




III. Air cleanness


The density of mechanically active materials should comply with the requirements

shown in Table 7-16.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-8



Dust particle particle/m³ ≤ 3 × 105

Suspending dust mg/m³ ≤ 0.2


Sand mg/m³ ≤ 30

Note:

1) Dust particle: diameter ≥ 5 µm




The density of chemically active materials should comply with the requirements

shown in Table 7-17.



SO2 mg/m³ 0.30 to 1.00

H2S mg/m³ 0.10 to 0.50

NO2

mg/m³ 0.50 to 1.00

NH3 mg/m³ 1.00 to 3.00

Cl2 mg/m³ 0.10 to 0.30

HCl mg/m³ 0.10 to 0.50

HF mg/m³ 0.01 to 0.03

O3 mg/m³ 0.05 to 0.10

CO mg/m³ ≤ 5.0



Item Sub-item Range

Offset ≤ 5.0 mm /

Accelerated speed / ≤ 2.0 m/s²Sinusoidal vibration

Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-9

Item Sub-item Range

Impulse responsespectrum II

≤ 50 m/s²Non-stable impulse

Payload

0

Note:

1) Impulse response spectrum: It refers to the maximum accelerated speedresponse curve generated by the equipment under the specified impulse motivation.Impulse response spectrum II means that the duration of half-sine impulse responsespectrum is 6 ms.

2) Payload: It refers to the bearable pressure from the upper piled equipment withpackage in prescribed piling mode.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



HUAWEI


Part II System Installation (Netra

240)

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part II System Installation (Netra 240)HUAWEI CG9812 Table of Contents


i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Installation Overview................................................................................................... 1-1


1.2 Installation Flow................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart............................................................................................. 1-1

1.2.2 Installation Time Planning....................................................................................... 1-2

1.3 Installation Preparations .................................................................................................... 1-3

1.3.1 Hardware Preparations ........................................................................................... 1-3

1.3.2 Software Preparations............................................................................................. 1-4

1.4 Resource Planning ............................................................................................................ 1-6

1.4.1 HA System Planning ............................................................................................... 1-6

1.4.2 IP Address Planning................................................................................................ 1-7

1.4.3 Disk Space Planning............................................................................................... 1-8

Chapter 2 Installing and Configuring Hardware......................................................................... 2-1


2.2 Cabinet Configuration........................................................................................................ 2-1

2.3 Hardware Description ........................................................................................................ 2-3

2.3.1 Introduction to Sun Netra 240 ................................................................................. 2-3

2.3.2 Introduction to SUN StorEdge 3310 Disk Array...................................................... 2-5

2.3.3 Introduction to Quidway S3528G LAN Switch ........................................................ 2-6

2.4 Hardware Connections ...................................................................................................... 2-7

2.4.1 Host Hardware Planning .........................................................................................2-7

2.4.2 Disk Array Hardware Planning................................................................................ 2-8

2.4.3 Hardware Connections............................................................................................ 2-8

2.4.4 Description for Cable Connections........................................................................ 2-10

2.4.5 Hardware Power-on .............................................................................................. 2-15

Chapter 3 Configuring SC and Disk Array.................................................................................. 3-1


3.2 Configuring SC................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2.1 Introduction to SC ................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2.2 Configuring SC........................................................................................................ 3-1

3.3 Configuring Disk Array....................................................................................................... 3-4

Chapter 4 Installing and Configuring Solaris ............................................................................. 4-1


4.2 Installing Solaris 8.............................................................................................................. 4-1

4.2.1 Connecting Consoles of Netra 240 ......................................................................... 4-1

4.2.2 Installing Solaris 8................................................................................................... 4-2

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




ii

4.3 Installing Solaris Patches................................................................................................... 4-7

4.3.1 Installing Patch Tools .............................................................................................. 4-7

4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch....................................................................................... 4-10

4.3.3 Installing SAN Patches.......................................................................................... 4-10

4.3.4 Installing SCSI Card Driver ................................................................................... 4-11

4.3.5 Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch......................................................................... 4-12

4.4 Configuring Solaris .......................................................................................................... 4-13

4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files............................................................................. 4-13

4.4.2 Creating Network Adapter Configuration Files...................................................... 4-14

4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root........................................................................... 4-15

4.4.4 Configuring FTP Login for root.............................................................................. 4-15

4.4.5 Executing the .profile File...................................................................................... 4-15

4.4.6 Modifying the /kernel/drv/sd.conf File ................................................................... 4-16

4.4.7 Modifying the /etc/system File............................................................................... 4-16

4.4.8 Modifying the /etc/inet/netmasks File.................................................................... 4-16

4.4.9 Restarting the Hosts.............................................................................................. 4-17

4.5 Installing Utilities .............................................................................................................. 4-17

4.5.1 Installing the TOP Software .................................................................................. 4-17

4.5.2 Installing the VTS Software................................................................................... 4-17

Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software................................................................................... 5-1



5.2.1 Checking the /etc/hosts File.................................................................................... 5-1

5.2.2 Checking Configurations of the hostname Network Adapters ................................ 5-3

5.2.3 Checking the /etc/default/login File ......................................................................... 5-3

5.2.4 Cleaning out Data ................................................................................................... 5-3

5.3 Installing Sun Cluster 3.0................................................................................................... 5-3

5.3.1 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1........................................................................ 5-3

5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2...................................................................... 5-10

5.3.3 Configuring the Quorum Device............................................................................ 5-13

5.3.4 Checking the Status of the Cluster Nodes............................................................ 5-14

5.4 Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5.............................................................. 5-15

5.4.1 Installing Volume Manager.................................................................................... 5-15

5.4.2 Installing Volume Manager Patches...................................................................... 5-16

5.4.3 Modifying Disk Management Parameters ............................................................. 5-17

5.4.4 Checking the Installation....................................................................................... 5-17

5.5 Entering Volume Manager Licenses................................................................................ 5-18

5.5.1 Checking Hostid .................................................................................................... 5-18

5.5.2 Checking If the License Is Permanent .................................................................. 5-18

5.5.3 Entering the Permanent License........................................................................... 5-19

5.5.4 Checking If the License Is Correctly Entered........................................................ 5-19

5.6 Configuring HA System Parameters................................................................................ 5-19

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




iii

5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk ............................................................................................... 5-20

5.6.2 Creating the igwbdg Resource Group................................................................... 5-21

5.6.3 Configuring NAFO................................................................................................. 5-24

5.6.4 Registering the igwbrg Resource Group............................................................... 5-25

5.6.5 Installing igwb Monitor Script ................................................................................ 5-26

5.6.6 Checking the Configuration................................................................................... 5-26

Chapter 6 Installing Billing Interface........................................................................................... 6-1


6.2 Installing FTP..................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.3 Installing FTAM.................................................................................................................. 6-1

6.3.1 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0........................................................................... 6-1

6.3.2 Installation Preparations.......................................................................................... 6-3

6.3.3 Installation Steps..................................................................................................... 6-4

6.3.4 Configuring Parameters ........................................................................................ 6-11

6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands ..................................................... 6-14

Chapter 7 Installing CG9812 Server ............................................................................................ 7-1



7.2.1 Checking Hardware Connections............................................................................ 7-1

7.2.2 Checking System Software Installation................................................................... 7-1

7.2.3 Installation Prerequisites......................................................................................... 7-4

7.2.4 Key Terminologies You Need to Know ................................................................... 7-6

7.3 Installing Server Software.................................................................................................. 7-7

7.4 Upgrading Server............................................................................................................... 7-9

7.4.1 General Upgrade..................................................................................................... 7-9

7.4.2 Special Upgrade.................................................................................................... 7-11

7.5 Rolling Back to Last Version............................................................................................ 7-13

Chapter 8 Installing CG9812 Client.............................................................................................. 8-1


8.2 Installing Client Software ................................................................................................... 8-1

8.3 Upgrading Client ................................................................................................................ 8-6

8.4 Checking Client Software .................................................................................................. 8-8

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part II System Installation (Netra 240)HUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 1 Installation Overview


1-1

Chapter 1 Installation Overview


The CG9812 system uses Solaris as the operating system (OS), Veritas Volume

Manager as the disk management software, and the high-availability (HA) SUN Cluster

as the system management software.

This chapter introduces the contents below:

Installation Flow

Installation Preparations

Resource Planning

1.2 Installation Flow

This section introduces the installation steps and time planning.

1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart

Figure 1-1 shows the overall installation flow of the CG9812 server.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-2

Plan hardware, software, and

system resources

Install Hardware

Install Solaris, Cluster, VM, and

related patches

Partition disk space

Map system disk

Install and configure CG9812

server software


client software

Check installation

Install billing interface (optional)

Finish installation

Begin Installation

Configure SCs and disk arrays

Figure 1-1 Installation flow chart

1.2.2 Installation Time Planning

It is estimated to take eight hours to install the CG9812 HA system. For details, see

Table 1-1.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-3

Table 1-1 Time planning

Task No. Task description Estimated time(hour)

1 Installing hardware 0.5

2 Configuring hardware parameters 0.5

3 Installing Solaris (with two sets of CDs) 1

4Installing Solaris patches (with two sets ofCDs)

1.5

5 Installing SUN Cluster 0.5

6 Configuring SUN Cluster 0.5

7 Installing VxVM 1

8 Configuring VxVM 2

9 Installing CG9812 software 0.4

10 Checking installation 0.2

1.3 Installation Preparations

This section introduces hardware and software preparations before the CG9812 is

installed.

1.3.1 Hardware Preparations

The CG9812 uses the SUN Netra 240 minicomputers and the SUN StorEdge 3310 disk

arrays as its main hardware. The required hardware is given below:

Two Netra 240 minicomputers with the same configurations

Two StorEdge 3310 disk arrays with the same configurations

Two S3528G LAN Switches with the same configurations

One or more PC consoles or SUN workstation as the operation terminal for

software installation and routine maintenance

For detailed hardware configuration, see Table 1-2.

Table 1-2 Hardware configuration

Item Configuration

CPU 2*1.28 GHz

Memory 2 GB

Netra 240minicomputer

Hard disk 2*73 GB

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-4

Item Configuration

Network

Adapter

1) One 4-port built-in network adapter. The fourports are bge0, bge1, bge2, and bge3. Thisadapter is used to connect the public network

for application purposes. bge1 and bge2 serveas NAFO links.

2) One 2-port external network adapter. The twoports are ce0 and ce1, which serve asheartbeat links.

3) The serial Mgt port connects with themaintenance terminal, while the net Mgt port isused to manage the 3310 disk arrays.

DVD-ROM 1

Tape drive None

Powersupply

Dual DC power input

Capacity 5*73 GB or higher

SCSI portTwo SUN FastEtherNet SCSI Adapter and each Adapter with one port

StorEdge 3310disk array

Powersupply

Dual DC power input

Networkport

24S3528G LANswitch

Powersupply

Single DC power input

1.3.2 Software Preparations

I. Description of the host system

The CG9812 uses the Netra 240 minicomputers with the SUN Cluster software. The

Sun Cluster is cluster software with high availability (HA). In SUN Cluster, two or more

hosts are organized over various networks into a cluster, and each host is called a

node.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-5

II. Software configuration

Table 1-3 shows the software configuration of the CG9812.

Table 1-3 Software configuration

Type item configuration

Solaris 8 (02/04 SPARC Platform)OS

Solaris Patch

Cluster software SUN Cluster 3.0

Systemsoftware

Volume manager Veritas Volume Manager 3.5 with License

Billing interface

software (optional)

Vertel UTS-FTAM software (Solaris version)

Applications

CG9812 applications

Server: CG9812 V200R002 Server (inSolaris with SC agent script)

Client: CG9812 V200R002 Client ( inWindows)

III. Schematic of software installation

The OS, the cluster software, the disk management software, billing interface software

(optional), and the CG9812 server software are installed on the local disk. The original

bills, final bills, logs, and alarms are stored on the shared disk. See Figure 1-2.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-6

igwbdg (original blls, final bills, logs, and alarms)

SUN OS

Volume Manager

SUN Cluster

SUN OS

Volume Manager

SUN Cluster

MirroringMirroring

igwb1 igwb2

FTP/FTAM(optional)

CG9812 Server

FTP/FTAM(optional)

CG 9812 Server

igwbdg (original bills, final bills, logs, and alarms)

3310-0

3310-1

Figure 1-2 Software installation schematic

1.4 Resource Planning

Resource planning must be done before the software installation, including:

HA System Planning

IP Address Planning

Disk Space Planning

1.4.1 HA System Planning

Table 1-4 shows the planning for the HA system components.

Table 1-4 HA system planning

Item Primary node Secondary node

Cluster name sc-igwb sc-igwb

Cluster node igwb1 igwb2

Transport path 1 ce0 ce0

Transport path 2 ce1 ce1

NAFO Group 0 bge0 bge0

NAFO Group 1 bge1/bge2 bge1/bge2

NAFO Group 2 bge3 bge3

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-7


Quorum devices d4 d4

Root Password root root

1.4.2 IP Address Planning

The CG9812 uses SUN Cluster 3.0 as the cluster management software. It is

configured with two types of IP addresses, including the fixed IP and the floating IP.

Currently, the CG9812 is configured with eleven fixed IPs and three floating IPs. Each

node of the CG9812 uses three fixed IPs. Each disk array is configured with one IP.

One fixed IP is for the ALOM network port of the primary node, and one for the ALOM

port of the secondary node. One fixed IP address is for the maintenance terminal. And

three floating IPs are used for the CG9812 to connect with the external communication

devices. For details, see below:

In SUN Cluster, the heartbeat IP is automatically set by the system.

In configuration, the Netra 240 is provided with a 4-port built-in network adapter,

which is used to connect the public network for application purposes. The four

ports are bge0, bge1, bge2, and bge3. bge1 and bge2 serve as the NAFO links.

Also, the Netra 240 has an external 2-port network adapter. The two ports are ce0

and ce1, which serve as the heartbeat links.

The floating IPs and the fixed IPs are set in the same network segment.

Below is an example of the IP configuration. See Table 1-5 and Table 1-6.

Table 1-5 IP address planning

DeviceFixed IPs of theprimary node

(logical host name)

Fixed IPs of thesecondary node

(logical host name)

Floating IP (logicalhost name)

Description

bge0 129.1.1.1(igwb1) 129.1.1.2(igwb2) 129.1.1.3(ha-igwb)

Connect with theNMS and themaintenance

console.

bge1 129.2.1.1(igwb11) 129.2.1.2(igwb21) 129.2.1.3(ha-igwb1) Connect with theSGSN or theGGSN.

bge3 129.3.1.1(igwb13) 129.3.1.2(igwb23) 129.3.1.3(ha-igwb3) Connect with thebilling center.

ce0 Not required Not required - Heartbeat link 1.

ce1 Not required Not required - Heartbeat link 2.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-8

Table 1-6 Planning for other IP addresses

Device IP address (logical host name) Description

PC

Maintenanceterminal

129.1.1. 4(admin)

Connect with the SC serial

port through the serial port ofthe PC hyper terminal.

igwb1 SC IP 129.1.1.11(igwb1-sc) SC IP of igwb1.

Igwb2 SC IP 129.1.1.12( igwb2-sc) SC IP of igwb2.

3310-0 129.1.1.13 Manageable IP of 3310-0.

3310-1 129.1.1.14 Manageable IP of 3310-1.

1.4.3 Disk Space Planning

The local disk space and shared disk space should be planned before installation.

I. Local disk space planning

The section describes the general planning principles for hard disk space. Hard disk

partition varies with the hardware configurations.

Each Netra 240 is provided with two 73 GB hard disks. These disks are configured as

mirrored partitions (RAID1). In this case, the available built-in hard disk space of each

Netra 240 is the space of a single disk, namely 73 GB. Next follows the description of

several common file systems of the SUN Solaris system:

1) Root Directory

Allocate sufficient space to the root directory since its size cannot be changed with the

UNIX commands. The type of the root file system is User File System (UFS).

2) SWAP

The required disk space for SWAP depends on the size of the host memory and the

expected maximum memory size. In short, the space of SWAP and the host memory

decides the maximum available memory. The size of SWAP shall be at least 1.5 timeslarger than the physical memory. According to the disk capacity and its expansion

requirements, the SWAP is set to 10GB.

3) /globaldevices

This is the global devices partition with 500 MB. It is used by the VxVM.

The recommended system planning is shown in Table 1-7.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-9

Table 1-7 Local disk planning

Slice Number* mount point size Description

c1t0d0s0 / 57 GB Root.

c1t0d0s1 swap 10 GB SWAP.

c1t0d0s2 Overlap 68.35 GB

The size of the whole hard disk,which may be different from theactual number displayed.

Note: Do not change this partition.

c1t0d0s3 - -

This is reserved to encapsulate theVolume Manager.

Note: This partition must bereserved.

c1t0d0s4 - -

This is reserved to encapsulate theVolume Manager.

Note: This partition must bereserved.

c1t0d0s5 - - -

c1t0d0s6 /globaldevices 512 MBThis is used to install SUNCluster3.0.

c1t0d0s7 - -

II. Disk array planning

Each StorEdge 3310 is configured with five 73GB hard disks set in RAID5+HotSpare

mode. Two Sun StorEdge 3310 are set to RAID1, which is partitioned into LUN0 and

LUN1. 200 MB is allocated to LUN0 for the Quorum device, while 209,253 MB is

allocated to LUN1 to store data of the CG9812, including original bills, final bills, logs,

and alarms. Table 1-8 shows the planning for a disk group. For logical volume

partitioning on LUN1, see Table 1-9.

1) Disk group partitioning

Table 1-8 Disk group partitioning

Groupname

Allocated harddisk

hotspare harddisk

Host Description

Rootdg Hard disk of SC1 None igwb1 Rootdg of SC1

Rootdg Hard disk of SC2 None Igwb2 Rootdg of SC2

igwbdg LUN1 on 3310 None igwb1/igwb2Shared diskgroup

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-10

2) Logical volume partitioning

Table 1-9 Logical volume partitioning

Diskgroup

disk (diskused formirror)

Logicalvolumename

Logicalvolume

sizeMount point Remarks

igwbdg-stat 512MB - Fixed size.

log-alarm 4096MB /var/other

Fixed size.This volumestores logsand alarms.

front 101376MB /var/frontsave

The actualsize. Thisvolume

storesoriginal bills.

igwbdgc2t0d1

c3t0d1

back 101376MB /var/backsave

The actualsize. Thisvolumestores finalbills.

Figure 1-3 shows the hard disks in the 3310 disk arrays.

789

101112

3310-1c2t11d0

c2t12d0

c2t8d0

c2t9d0

c2t10d0

789

101112

3310-2c3t11d0

c3t12d0

c3t8d0

c3t9d0

c3t10d0

Figure 1-3 Hard disks in 3310 disk arrays

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part II System Installation (Netra 240)HUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 2 Installing and Configuring Hardware


2-1

Chapter 2 Installing and Configuring Hardware


This chapter introduces how to install the main hardware of the CG9812 and how the

cables are connected. Before you perform these operations, make sure the cabinet and

its internal devices are installed. This chapter includes the following contents:

Cabinet Configuration

Hardware Description

Hardware Connections

2.2 Cabinet Configuration

The CG9812 server uses the N68-22 cabinet. To configure the cabinet, see Figure 2-1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-2

CG9812 Cabinet


Quidway 3528G-1 (1U)

Cabling frame（1U）

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)


SUN S torEdge 3310-1 (2U)


SUN S torEdge 3310-0 (2U)

Non-standard dummy panel (1U)Reserved for tape drive (1U)




Reserved for tape drive (1U)Non-standard dummy panel (1U)


Quidway 3528G-0 (1U)Cabling frame (1U)

46U

Figure 2-1 Cabinet configuration

The internal devices include two Netra 240 minicomputers, two StorEdge 3310 disk

arrays, and two Quidway 3528G LAN Switches.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-3

2.3 Hardware Description

For hardware configuration, refer to 1.3.1 “Hardware Preparations”. The

high-availability CG9812 sever covers two nodes of the Cluster. This section introduces

the Netra 240 and the StorEdge 3310 disk array.

2.3.1 Introduction to Sun Netra 240

I. Configuration and ambient indices

Table 2-1 shows the configuration, ambient indices, and physical spec for the Netra 240

minicomputer.

Table 2-1 SUN Netra 240

Configuration index Value

CPU 2*1.28 GHz (8M Cache)

Memory 2 GB

Hard disk 2*73 GB

Ambient indexparameter

value

AC 90–264 VAC, 47 Hz – 63 Hz. The maximum inputpower is 550 W (AC).Power

supplyDC

–48 – –60 VDC. The maximum input power is 570 W(DC).

Running0°C – 40°C (32°F–104°F) (AC)

–5°C – +45°C(23°F – 113°F) (DC)temperature

Storage –40°C – +70°C (–40°F – 158°F)

Running10%–90%, non-condensation (AC)

5%–93%, non-condensation (DC)Humidity

Storage 5%–93%, non-condensation

Physical spec index Value

Height 87.4 mm (3.44in, 2U)

Width 425.0 mm (16.73in)

Depth 508.0 mm (21in)

Weight 18.6 kg (41 pounds)

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-4

II. Front view of Netra 240

The front view of Netra 240 is shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Front view of Netra 240

III. Back view of Netra 240

The back view of Netra 240 is shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Back view of Netra 240

Netra 240 is provided with the following interfaces:

One 4-port 10/100/1000M integrated network adapter with their ports set to bge0,

bge1, bge2, and bge3 from left to right, where bge1 and bge2 serves as NAFO

links.

Two PCI Ultra SCSI HostAdapter cards, which are used to connect with the 3310

disk arrays.

ce0 and ce1 of host1 and ce0 and ce1 of host2 are used to connect with the

private networks with the crossover cables. Netra 240 includes one DB9 serial port

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-5

(Serial Mgt Port). The ALOM card is the standard alarm card for the Netra 240.

The Netra 240 minicomputer can monitor CPU, fan, and temperature. Besides

these functions, it also supports serial port connections and network connections.

Specifically, it connects with the PC hyper terminal by a DB9<->RJ45 cable, withthe disk arrays by the SCSI cables, and with the LAN Switches by the straight-thru

cables.

2.3.2 Introduction to SUN StorEdge 3310 Disk Array

The universal StorEdge 3310 disk array is a thin, high-density, modular storage system,

which is specially designed for high availability purpose. The 12-drive disk array can

efficiently use the disk space, store the information with hundreds of gigabits, and

support one or two RAID controllers, 128 LUNs, and multiple host connections.

The StorEdge 3310 disk array has the following features:

Each support is provided with the capacity up to 3.6 TB.

RAID based hardware or software.

Redundant components.

2U 12-drive outline dimension.

I. Front view of StorEdge 3310

The front view of StorEdge 3310 is shown in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Front view of StorEdge 3310 disk array

Note:

Typically, five hard disks are inserted into the slots 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 for each disk array.

To add more disks, insert one into slot 12 first, and then slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6

sequentially.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-6

II. Back view of StorEdge 3310

The back view of StorEdge 3310 is shown in Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5 Back view of StorEdge 3310 disk array

2.3.3 Introduction to Quidway S3528G LAN Switch

The S3528G LAN Switch provides twenty-four 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet ports.

Figure 2-6 shows the front panel of the S3528G.

(3) (4)

(2)

(6)(5) (7)

(1)

(1) power supply indicator (2) GBIC port status indicator (3) mode switch button(4) mode switch statusindicator

(5) 100M Ethernet ports withindicator

(6) GBIC ports with indicator

(7) Console interface

Figure 2-6 Front panel of S3528G

The twenty-four ports of the S3528G are arranged as shown in Table 2-2 (front view).In

the arrangement, there are the power supply indicator and twenty –four fixed

10/100Base-TX Ethernet ports with the Console interface. Each 10/100Base-TX port

can be used for subtending. The Ethernet ports are standard RJ-45 connectors.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-7

Table 2-2 24 Ethernet ports for S3528G

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23

Note:

For more information about LAN Switch, refer to Quidway S3528 Series LAN Switch

Installation Manual .

2.4 Hardware Connections

This section introduces how to connect the internal hardware in the cabinet of the

CG9812.

2.4.1 Host Hardware Planning

Table 2-3 shows the model and components of the host.

Table 2-3 Model and components of the host (Netra 240)

Server model Netra 240(DC) igwb1 and igwb2

CPU, memory and harddisks

Purchase No. Description

CPU slots (0–1)

Memory slot (bank0)

Hard disk slots (0–1)

XRA-SC1N2-73G15K

2*1.28 GHz CPU

2 GB memory

2* 73 GB local hard disks

I/O slot Purchase No. Description

0 X4422ADual GigabitEthernet / DualSCSI

1 X6758A PCI Dual Ultra3 SCSI

2 X6758A PCI Dual Ultra3 SCSI

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-8

2.4.2 Disk Array Hardware Planning

Table 2-4 shows the description of disk arrays.

Table 2-4 Description of disk array models (StorEdge 3310)

Disk arraymodel

3310(J-DC)Disk array

name3310-0 3310-1

Jumper switchdescription

Connect with the CH0and the Single Bus

- -

Hard diskslots:

Purchase No. PN No. Description

7–11 XTA-3310-73GB-15K 540-5522 73.4GB - 15000 RPM

2.4.3 Hardware Connections

Make sure all the connections are accurate for the HA system, especially for the SCSI

cables. Wrong connections can cause fatal damage. Before the devices are connected,

make labels and attach them to both end of each cable. For details on labels, see

Table 2-5.

Table 2-5 Description for labeled cables

No.Connection

typeSourcedevice

Source deviceport

Destinationdevice

Destinationdevice port

Remark

01 1G Ethernet host 1bge0 in slot0 ofPCI1

NMS andLMT

-Publicnetwork

02 1G Ethernet Host 1bge1 in slot1 ofPCI1

GSNLANSwitch-0

Publicnetwork


GSNLANSwitch-1

Publicnetwork

04 1G Ethernet host 1 bge3 in slot3 ofPCI1

Billing center(BC)

- Publicnetwork


NMS andLMT

-Publicnetwork


GSNLANSwitch-0

Publicnetwork


GSNLANSwitch-1

Publicnetwork


BC -Publicnetwork

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-9

No.Connection

typeSourcedevice

Source deviceport

Destinationdevice

Destinationdevice port

Remark

091G Ethernet(crossover)

host 1 ce0 Host2 ce0Privatenetwork

101G Ethernet(crossover)

host 1 ce1 Host2 ce1Privatenetwork

11 SCSI host 1SCSI 1 inPCI2slot

3310-0 CH1 port -


3310-1 CH1 port -


3310-0 CH3 port -

14 SCSI host 2

SCSI 1 inPCI1

slot 3310-1 CH3 port -

15 SCSI 3310-0 CH0 port 3310-0Single Busport

-

16 SCSI 3310-1 CH0 port 3310-1Single Busport

-

17100MEthernet

host 1 ALOM portMaintenanceterminal

-Management

18100MEthernet

host 2 ALOM portMaintenanceterminal

-Management

19/20 100MEthernet

3310-0 Two controllerports

- Management

21/22100MEthernet

3310-1Two controllerports

-Management

Figure 2-4 shows the hardware connections on the CG9812 server.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-10

private net

Netra 240-0

Netra 240-1

3310 -1

3310 -0

LMT

BC

GSN

public net

LMT GSN

BC

public net public net

ALOM

HeartBeat

Net MgtPort

SerialMgt Port

bge1

bge2

ce0 ce1bge3

bge0

GSN

GSN

Figure 2-7 Connections between Sun Netra 240 and Sun StorEdge 3310

Netra 240 does not include an external terminal concentrator (TC). The built-in system

controller (SC) is provided, which can be connected through the Net Mgt Port shown in

Figure 2-7:

The SC of igwb1 (Netra 240-0 in Figure 2-7) is set to 129.1.1.11 by default.

The SC of igwb2 (Netra 240-1 in Figure 2-7) is set to 129.1.1.12 by default.

2.4.4 Description for Cable Connections

I. Connections between Netra 240 and LAN Switch

Two LAN Switches are configured in the cabinet of the CG9812. One is LAN Switch-0

(primary), and the other is LAN Switch-1 (secondary). The two bge1 ports are

connected with LAN Switch-0, and the two bge2 ports are connected with LAN

Switch-1 to communicate with the GSN. The LAN Switches to the NMS and the BC are

not configured in the cabinet. All cables are straight-thru cables.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-11

In early stage of the deployment, because the LAN Switches to the NMS and the BC

are not installed, the bge0 and bge3 ports of the HA system are connected to the LAN

Switches in the cabinet of the CG9812. Figure 2-8 shows the cable connections with

the LAN Switches.

igwb1

SC

igwb2

SCigwb2

bge3

igwb1

bge3

igwb2

bge1,bge2

igwb1

bge1,bge2

igwb1

bge0

igwb2

bge0

(2) (4) (2)

(1)

(2)(4)(2)

(3)

(3)

(1)

Figure 2-8 LAN Switch cable connection

In Figure 2-8, each cable represents a virtual LAN (VLAN):

Cable (1). Two LAN Switch ports are coupled for subtending.

Cable (2). These ports are used by OM and SC.

Cable (3). These ports are used by Ga.

Cable (4). These ports are used by BC.

Caution:

Dangling cables must be prohibited.

II. Connections between the primary server and the secondary server

Connect the external ce0 port of the primary server with ce0 of the secondary server.

Connect ce1 of the primary server with ce1 of the secondary server. These two

connections serve as heartbeat links between the primary server and the secondary

server. All cables in use are straight-thru cables (crossover cables).

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-12

III. Connections between Netra 240 SCs and LAN Switches

Connect the SC of the primary server (the Net Mgt port) with the LAN Switch-0 of the

primary server. The SC functions like a TC to give access to the SC by logging in to the

LAN Switch remotely and to give access to the Console outputs of the minicomputer.

Connect the SC of the secondary server (the Net Mgt port) with the LAN Switch-1.

See Figure.

IV. Connections between Netra 240 and StorEdge 3310

Figure 2-9 shows the internal connections in the disk arrays.

Figure 2-9 Connections for StorEdge 3310 disk arrays

Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI2 of the primary server with the CH1 port of the 3310-0disk array. Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI1 of the primary server with the CH1 port of

the 3310-1 disk array.

Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI2 of the secondary server with the CH3 port of the

3310-0 disk array. Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI1 of the secondary server with the

CH3 port of the 3310-1 disk array.

Connect the CH0 port of 3310-0 with the Single Bus port of 3310-0. Connect the CH1

port of 3310-1 with the Single Bus port of 3310-1.

V. Connections between LAN switches

The LAN Switches on the primary server and the secondary server are subtended

through the ports. See Figure 2-8. All cables in use are crossover cables.

VI. Connections related to power cables and ground cables

For connections related to power cables and ground cables, follow the precautions

below:

Connect the PGND bar of the DC distribution cabinet securely with the nearest

PGND bar provided by the equipment buyer through the PGND bus. The PGND

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-13

cables are yellow-green plastic insulated copper wires with the same core

diameter as that of the power cables.

Label each power cable and ground cable before connection.

For Netra 240, connect the power cables and ground cables for the internal devices inthe CG9812 cabinet as indicated in Figure 2-10.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-14

Figure 2-10 Connections of power/ground cables for devices in the CG9812 cabinet

(Netra 240)

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-15

2.4.5 Hardware Power-on

To power on the two Netra 240 minicomputers and the disk arrays, follow the sequence

below:

Disk arrays –> the upper minicomputer –> the lower minicomputer

The power-off sequence is opposite to the power-on sequence.

Caution:

For the minicomputers and disk arrays, sudden power-off is prohibited on the

CG9812 server. Because after UNIX is suddenly powered off, it must be manuallymaintained before it can run.

On the CG9812 server, do not restart the two minicomputers frequently.

It is recommended to power on the minicomputers after the disk arrays are powered

on for three minutes.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part II System Installation (Netra 240)HUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 3 Configuring SC and Disk Array


3-1

Chapter 3 Configuring SC and Disk Array


This chapter describes how to set the SCs and the disk arrays, including:

Configuring SC

Configuring Disk Array

3.2 Configuring SC

This section introduces how to configure the SC.

3.2.1 Introduction to SC

Netra 240 does not include a video adapter or a display. Those minicomputers in earlier

versions are configured with a TC to transfer the control signals from the two hosts and

display them on the monitor console.

In Netra 240, a SC is integrated on the main board. The SC functions as the TC.

Different from the TC, the SC of each minicomputer is configured with a separate IPaddress. To access the IP address of an SC, run the command below:

#telnet <sc_ip>

The SC provides a Net Mgt Port and a Serial Mgt Port. See Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 SC ports

3.2.2 Configuring SC

Configure the SCs on igwb1 and igwb2. The SCs are only required to be configured

once. To configure the SC, follow the steps below:

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-2

I. Connect Netra 240 with the power supply

II. Configure the serial port of the PC maintenance terminal

Use Windows hyper terminal software or any other serial port software to configure the

network management port. See Figure 3-2. To set the serial port of the maintenance

terminal, make sure you follow the parameter settings given below:

Bits per second: 9,600 bauds

Data bit: 8 bits

Parity check: none (non-parity)

Stop bit: 1

Data stream control: none (no handshake)

Figure 3-2 Parameter settings for serial port of the maintenance terminal

III. Log in to SC

The SC starts to work when the power supply is connected. You can log in to the SC

through the maintenance terminal.

1) Use a DB9<->RJ45 cable to connect the serial port of the SC with a serial port of

the maintenance terminal.

2) Start the hyper terminal program to connect and log in to the SC.

3) Enter the user name and password.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-3

Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems Inc. All rights reserved.

Use is subject to license terms.

Sun(tm) Advanced Lights Out Manager 1.3 (igwb1)

Please login: admin

Please Enter password: ***** (admin by default)

sc>

Note:

If Solaris is not installed, SC> is displayed. Otherwise, press Ctrl+Pause to display the

OK system prompt. Then type “#.” to display SC>.

IV. Set SC properties

1) Set the IP address and net mask:

SC>setsc netsc_ipaddr 129.1.1.11 (129.1.1.12 for igwb2)

SC>setsc netsc_ipnetmask 255.255.0.0

2) Restart the SC with the command below:

SC>resetsc

The settings are enabled.

V. Disconnect the serial port

Disconnect the PC hyper terminal.

VI. Finish the settings

Make sure that the Net Mgt ports of the SCs are connected with the LAN Switches by

cables, and then log in to the two minicomputers as indicated below:

#telnet 129.1.1.11 (access igwb1)

#telnet 129.1.1.12 (access igwb2)

Enter the user name and password again. To access the Console, enter the command

below:

SC>console

To return to SC>, enter “#.”.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-4

Note:

If the ports are in use, enter console –f to obtain the ports.

The IP address of the Net Mgt Port is 129.1.1.11. To access this port by Telnet, set

the IP address of the PC to 129.1.1.4.

To change the user password, run SC>password. Remember the password for

later use.

3.3 Configuring Disk Array

Note:

Name the two StorEdge 3310 disk arrays 3310-0 and 3310-1. Both of them need to

be configured.

The numbers given in the following figure is for example purpose, for example, the

disk space of a disk array is 35 GB. The actual capacity is 73 GB by default.

I. Connect the administrative console and StorEdge 3310

Use a DB9–DB9 cable to connect serial port of the maintenance terminal with the COM

port of the StorEdge 3310 disk array. See Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 Connection between maintenance terminal and StorEdge 3310

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-5

II. Set IP address for StorEdge 3310

1) Log in to 3310-0 (3310-1 for the secondary node) through the PC hyper terminal.

Press Enter , and then press ESC three times. Select Terminal (VT100 Mode)

from the menu, and then press Enter to open the main menu.

2) Select View and edit Configuration parameters/Communication

Parameters/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)/LAN0/Set IP Address from the main

menu. The following interface appears. See Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 StorEdge 3310 IP configuration interface

3) Enter the IP address: 129.1.1.13 (IP of 3310-0), 129.1.1.14 (IP of 3310-1); Subnet

mask: 255.255.0.0; And gateway IP address: not set, See Figure 3-5. Note that

the given values are for example purposes only.

Figure 3-5 Set IP address and subnet mask

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-6

4) Press ESC. Click Yes to set the IP address. Then, click Yes to reset the controller.

5) Log in to StorEdge 3310 after it is restarted,

#telnet xxx (xxx for IP address of the Disk Array, such as 129.1.1.13 or 129.1.1.14)

Trying xxx (xxx for IP address of disk array)

Connected to xxx (xxx for IP address of disk array)

Escape character is ‘^]’.

Press Ctrl + L to display the initialization interface.

III. Set SCSI channels for StorEdge 3310

1) Press ESC. Select Terminal (VT100 Mode) from the menu, and then press Enter

to open the main menu.

2) On the main menu, select view and edit SCSI channels. Configure the SCSI

channels as indicated in Figure 3-6. Set CHL1 and CHL3 to Host, that is, the

Primary Controllers.

3) Press Esc to return to the main menu. Click Yes to reset the controller.

Figure 3-6 Set SCSI channels

4) Log in to StorEdge 3310 after it is restarted.

#telnet xxx (xxx for IP address of the disk array, for example, 129.1.1.13 or 129.1.1.14)

Trying xxx (xxx for IP address of disk array)

Connected to xxx (xxx for IP address of disk array)

Escape character is ‘^]’.

Press Ctrl + L to display the initialization interface.

IV. Set Logical drives for StorEdge 3310

1) Select Terminal (VT100 Mode) from the menu, and then press Enter to open the

main menu.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-7

2) On the main menu, select view and edit Logical drives, and then press Enter to

configure the logical drives. See Figure 3-7.

Caution:

For a new disk, no logical disk is created. See Figure 3-7. Delete the existing logical

disks, if any. If LUN is mapped, you may fail to delete the logical disks. Unmap the host

LUN before you delete the logical disks.

Figure 3-7 Select Logical Drive

3) Select the first row, and then press Enter . The system prompts Create Logical

Drive. Click Yes, and then press Enter to continue. The following interface is

displayed. See Figure 3-8.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-8

Figure 3-8 Select logical drive type

4) Select RAID5, and then press Enter . Select the first four disks as RAID5 mirror

disks. In the Slot column, an asterisk (*) is marked if a disk is selected. See

Figure 3-9.


5) Press Esc to confirm your selection. The following interface is displayed. See

Figure 3-10

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-9

Figure 3-10 Select HotSpare drives

6) Select Assign Spare Drives, and then press Enter to select the HotSpare disks.

The following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-11.


7) Select all the rest disks as HotSpare drives. In the Slot column, an asterisk (*) is

marked if a disk is selected. Press Esc to confirm your selection. The following

interface is displayed. See Figure 3-12.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-11

Figure 3-13 Initialize logical drive

9) After RAID5 is finished initialization, press Esc twice. The following interface is


Figure 3-14 Select logical drive

10) Select the RAID5 logical drive, and then press Enter . The following interface is


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-12

Figure 3-15 Select partition

V. Partition logical drive

1) Select Partition logical drive, and then press Enter to partition the logical disk.

The system then prompts Continue Partition Logical Drive? See Figure 3-16.

Click Yes, and then press Enter .

Figure 3-16 Confirm partition

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-13

2) Enter 200 for partition0 in Partition Size (MB), and then press Enter . See

Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-17 Partition0

3) The following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-18. Click Yes, and then press

Enter .


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-14

4) Move to the second row, and then press Enter to allocate space for partition1.

Enter 209053 in Partition Size (MB), and then press Enter . See Figure 3-19. The

value is given for example purpose only.



Enter to complete the partition.


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-15

VI. Map logical drives to Host LUNs

1) Press Esc twice to return to the main menu. On the main menu, select view and

edit Host LUNs, and then press Enter . See Figure 3-21.

Figure 3-21 StorEdge Main menu

2) Select CHL 1 ID 0 (Primary Controller), and then press Enter . See Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22 Select channel1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-16

Caution:

Make sure CHL 1 is set to Primary Controller . If CHL1 ID 0 (Secondary Controller) is

displayed, delete this channel, and then add CHL 1 ID 0 (Primary Controller).

3) Select Logical Drive, and then press Enter . See Figure 3-23.


4) Select row 0, and then press Enter to map the first LUN. See Figure 3-24.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-17

Figure 3-24 Select the first LUN

5) Enter the logical drive selection interface. See Figure 3-25.


6) Select the RAID5 logical drive, and then press Enter . See Figure 3-26.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-18


7) In Figure 3-27, select LUN 0, and then press Enter .

Figure 3-27 Map host LUN

8) In Figure 3-28, select Map Host LUN, and then press Enter .

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-19

Figure 3-28 Confirm to map host LUN


Enter .

Figure 3-29 Select the second LUN

10) Move to LUN 1, and then press Enter to map the second LUN. See Figure 3-30.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-20



displayed. See Figure 3-31,

Figure 3-31 Select logical partition

12) Select LUN 1, and then press Enter . The following interface is displayed. See

Figure 3-32,

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-21

Figure 3-32 Map LUN

13) Select Map Host LUN, and then press Enter . The following interface is displayed.

See Figure 3-33.


14) Click Yes, and then press Enter . Press Esc twice to return to the channel

selection interface. See Figure 3-34.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-22

Figure 3-34 Select channel 3

15) Map host LUN for CH3 in the same way.

16) Then, press ESC till the following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-35.

Figure 3-35 StorEdge 3310 initialization interface

17) Press Ctrl +]. The system prompts.

telnet>quit

18) Enter quit to close the StorEdge 3310 configuration interface.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part II System Installation (Netra 240)HUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 4 Installing and Configuring Solaris


4-1

Chapter 4 Installing and Configuring Solaris


To install and configure Solaris, follow the steps below:

Installing Solaris 8

Installing Solaris Patch

Configuring Solaris

Installing Utilities

4.2 Installing Solaris 8

Note:

Solaris (04/02 or above) must be installed on both hosts.

During the setup process, press ESC+2 to go to the next step, press Up or Down to

locate an option, and press Space or Enter to select the selection.

4.2.1 Connecting Consoles of Netra 240

I. Operation description

Netra 240 is not provided with a display device. The Console of the SUN workstation

can be connected through the maintenance terminal.

II. Operation steps

Step Description

1

On the maintenance terminal console, log in to igwb1 and igwb2 with thecommands below:

#telnet 129.1.1.11

#telnet 129.1.1.12

2 Enter the SC user name and password again (admin/admin).

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-2

Step Description

3

Connect the consoles with the commands below:

sc>break

sc>console -f

4.2.2 Installing Solaris 8

I. Operation description

Generally, Solaris is installed by a designated SUN engineer. The following installation

steps are for your reference only. You can install the HA system software on the two

hosts (igwb1 and igwb2) concurrently. Make sure that the same parameters are

configured for the two hosts.

II. Operation steps

Step Description

1Insert the Solaris 8 System Software 1 of 2 CD into the CD-ROM of theconsole.

2

Enter the OK state.

Method 1: If the workstation is not installed with UNIX, press Ctrl+] on theconsole, type Send brk, and press Enter to show the ok prompt.

Method 2: If Solaris is installed, type halt as the user root to show the ok prompt.

3Boot the host from the CD-ROM. Type boot cdrom after the OK prompt:

ok boot cdrom

4

Select English as installation language. See below:

Select a Language

0. English

1. French

…9. Traditional Chinese

Please make a choice (0 - 9), or press h or ? for help: 0

5

Select the locale. Select English. See below:

Select a Locale

0. English (C - 7-bit ASCII)

1. Albania (ISO8859-2)

…

18. Finland (ISO8859-15 - Euro)

Type the number of your choice and press Return: 0

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-3

Step Description

6

Select the terminal type. Select DEC VT100. Because no monitor isconfigured in the HA system, the installer cannot identify the terminal type. To

select the terminal type, follow the steps below:Press Return to show more choices.


What type of terminal are you using?

1) ANSI Standard CRT

2) DEC VT52

3) DEC VT100

...

13) Other


7

Confirm the selection.

Esc-2_Continue Esc-6_Help

Esc-2_Continue means to press ESC + 2 to continue, and Esc-6_help

means to press ESC + 6 to display the help information. Other operations aresimilar. In the subsequent operations, unless otherwise specified,Esc-2_Continue means to press ESC + 2 to continue.

8

Configure Network connectivity. Click Yes. See below:

Networked

[X] Yes

[ ] No

9

Configure DCHP. Select No. See below:

Use DHCP

[ ] Yes

[X] No

10

Enter the Main Network interface. Select bge0.

Primary network interface

[X] bge0

[ ] bge1

[ ] bge2

[ ] bge3

11Enter the host name. Enter igwb1 for the primary node, and igwb2 for thesecondary node. See below:

Host name:igwb1

12Enter the IP addresses. The IP address of igwb1 is 129.1.1.1, and that ofigwb2 is 129.1.1.2. See below:

IP address: 129.1.1.1 (129.1.1.2 for the Secondary node)

13

Select the subnet mask. Type Yes. The operation is as follows:

System part of a subnet

[X] Yes

[ ] No

14Set Net Mask. Enter 255.255.0.0. see below:

Netmask: 255.255.0.0

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-4

Step Description

15

Determine whether to enable IPv6. Select No. see below:

Enable IPv6

[ ] Yes[X] No

16

Press <ESC + 2> to continue. The settings are displayed below:

Networked: Yes

Use DHCP: No

Primary network interface: bge0

Host name: igwb1 (igwb2 for igwb2)

IP address: 129.1.1.1 (129.1.1.2 for igwb2)

System part of a subnet: Yes

Netmask: 255.255.0.0

Enable IPv6: No

17

Determine whether to configure Kerberos Security. Select No. See below:

Configure Kerberos Security[ ] Yes

[X] No

18

Determine whether to provide Name Service. Select None. See below:

Name service

[ ] NIS+

[ ] NIS

[ ] DNS

[ ] LDAP

[X] None

19

Select the Geographic Region, for example, Asia, Eastern. See below:

Regions[X] Asia, Eestern

[ ] United States

20

Select Time Zone. Select the local time zone, such as Hong Kong. Seebelow:

Time zones

[ ] HongKong

…

[X] Republic of China

21

Set Data and Time. For example,

Date and time: 2004-02-03 09:00

Year (4 digits) : 2004

Month (1-12) : 02 Day (1-31) : 03 Hour (0-23) : 09 Minute (0-59) : 00

22Press ESC + 2 to continue.

Time zone: Republic of China

Date and time: 2004-02-03 09:00:00

23Initialize the setup process. Press ESC + 4 to select Initial. See below:

F2_Upgrade F4_Initial F5_Exit F6_Help

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-5

Step Description

24Press ESC + 2 to select the standard installation.

Esc-2_Standard F3_Go Back Esc-4_Flash F5_Exit F6_Help

25

Select the following character sets from the Geographic Region menu.

Select the geographic regions for which support should be installed.

[ ] Eastern Europe

…

[/] Asia

[ ] PC Kanji (ja_JP.PCK)

…

[X] Simplified Chinese EUC

[X] Simplified Chinese GBK

[X] Simplified Chinese UTF-8

[/] North America

[ ] Canada-English (ISO8859-1)

…

[X] U.S.A. (en_US.ISO8859-1)

26Determine whether to include the 64-bit support. Select Yes.

[X] Select To Include Solaris 64-bit Support

27

Select the components. Select Entire Distribution Plus OEM support forfull install. See below:

[X] Entire Distribution plus OEM support 64-bit 1587.00 MB

[ ] Entire Distribution 64-bit ................. 1549.00 MB

[ ] Developer System Support 64-bit ............ 1498.00 MB

[ ] End User System Support 64-bit ............. 1073.00 MB

28

Select the installation directory. Select c0t0d0. See below:

[X]

c1t0d0 (72538 MB) boot disk 72538 MB (F4 to edit)

[ ] c1t1d0 (72538 MB)72538 MB

29

Determine whether to preserve the existing data on the hard disk. Press ESC+ 2 to select continue to overwrite the data. See below:

Do you want to preserve existing data? At least one of the disks you've

selected for installing Solaris software has file systems or unnamed

slices that you may want to save.

F2_Continue F3_Go Back F4_Preserve F5_Exit F6_Help

30Determine whether to lay out the file system automatically. Press ESC + 4 toselect Manual Layout.

F2_Auto Layout F3_Go Back F4_Manual Layout F5_Exit F6_Help

31The system displays the current hard disk (overlap). Select Continue toconfirm.

32 Partition the hard disk as indicated in Table 1-7, and then select Continue.

33

Press ESC + 2 to confirm the partition.

File system/Mount point Disk/Slice Size

=============================================================

/ c1t0d0s0 57GB

swap c1t0d0s1 10GB

overlap c1t0d0s2 68.35GB

/globaldevices c1t0d0s6 512MB

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-6

Step Description

34

Determine whether to mount software from a remote file server. Pres ESC+2 to select Continue.

Do you want to mount software from a remote file server? This may be

necessary if you had to remove software because of disk space problems.

F2_Continue F3_Go Back F4_Remote Mounts F5_Exit F6_Help

35

Confirm your configurations. Press ESC + 2> to select Continue.

The information shown below is your profile for installing Solaris

software. It reflects the choices you've made on previous screens.

=================================================================

=

Installation Option: Initial

Boot Device: c1t0d0

Client Services: None

Locales: Simplified Chinese EUC

Simplified Chinese GBK

Simplified Chinese UTF-8U.S.A. (en_US.ISO8859-1)

Software: Solaris 8, Entire Distribution plus OEM sup

File System and Disk Layout:

/ c1t0d0s0 57 GB

swap c1t0d0s1 10 GB

/globaldevices c1t0d0s6 512 MB

=================================================================

F2_Continue F4_Change F5_Exit F6_Help

36Press ESC + 2 to ignore the following warning.

WARNING: Unused disk space (c1t0d0)

Esc-2_OK F5_Cancel Esc-2_OK F5_CancelqReboot After Installation?

37

Determine whether to reboot the computer automatically after installation.Select Auto Reboot.

[X] Auto Reboot

[ ] Manual

38Start the setup process, and the setup progress is displayed. The setupprocess takes about 40 minutes. After installation, the system will rebootautomatically.

39

After Solaris is restarted, the system prompts to enter and confirm thepassword of root. Remember the password. See below

Root password:******

Press Return to continue.

Re-enter your root password: ******

40

When the following message appears, select 1, and then press Enter . Seebelow:

Media:

1. CD/DVD

2. Network File System

3. Skip

Media [1]:<Enter>

41

Insert the Solaris 8 Software 2 of 2 CD, and then press Enter . See below,

Please insert the CD/DVD for Solaris 8 Software 2 of 2 (2/02 SPARC

Platform Edition).

After you insert the disc, please press Enter:<Enter>

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-7

Step Description

42

Determine whether to display the installation details. Select 2 to continue.See below:

Installation details:Product Result More Info

1. Solaris 8 packages (part 2) Installed Available

2. Done

Enter the number corresponding to the desired selection for more

information, or enter 2 to continue [2]:<Enter>

43

When the following message appears, select 1, and then press Enter . Seebelow:

Media:

1. CD/DVD


3. Skip

Media [1]:<Enter>

44

Insert the CD for Solaris 8 Languages and press Enter . See below:

Please insert the CD/DVD for Solaris 8 Languages (2/02 SPARC Platform

Edition).

After you insert the disc, please press Enter: <Enter>.

45 Solaris restarts automatically. The installation is complete.

4.3 Installing Solaris Patches

This section introduces how to install the Solaris patches, including:

Installing Patch Tools

Installing Solaris 8 Patch

Installing SAN Patches

Installing SCSI Card Driver

Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch

4.3.1 Installing Patch Tools

I. Operation Description

Install the patch tools on igwb1 and igwb2. Before installation, make sure you have the

latest patch tools. If not, contact SUN Microsystems, Inc. for technical support. The

/.profile file is created during the setup process. The patch tools installation path is set

in this file.

II. Operation steps

Step Description

1Insert the patch tools CD into the CD-ROM of the corresponding host orworkstation console.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-8

Step Description

2*

Install the patch tools as root.

# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/install/

# sh ./setup-standard.sh

3Disable the power saving daemon. Enter y.

Is the power saving daemon to be disabled? [y/n]: y

4Disable the keyboard power button. Enter y.

Sun keyboard Power button to be disabled? [y/n]: y

5Disable the buttons & dials. Enter y.

Are the buttons & dials to be disabled? [y/n]: y

6 Determine whether the remote login of root is allowed. Enter y.Are remote root logins to be allowed? [y/n]: y

7Determine whether to install the Automated Crash Analysis Tool (ACT)software package. Enter y.

Do you want to install the ACT package? [y/n]: y

8Enter the base directory of the package. To select the default /opt/CTEact directory, press Enter.

enter base directory for install (Default /opt/CTEact) [?,q]<Enter>

9Determine whether to enable the Email of Panic Facility. To select thedefault value y, press Enter .

10Enter the Email address. Enter n.

Do you wish to enable the email of panic facility [y] [y,n,?] n

11Determine whether to create the /opt/CTEact directory. Press Enter toselect the default value y.

12Decide whether to install the CTEact package. Press Enter to select thedefault value y.

13

Install the explorer package.

Agree to these terms? [y,n] y

...

Do you want to continue with the installation of <CTEact> [y,n,?]n

14Set the installation directory. Press Enter to select the /opt/SUNWexplo directory by default.

Where should this package be installed? [/opt/SUNWexplo]:

15Enter Company Name. For example,

Company name []:Huawei

16Enter Contract ID. Press Enter .

Contract ID []:

17Enter System Serial Number. Press Enter .

System serial number []:

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-9

Step Description

18Enter Contact Name. Press Enter .

Contact name []:

19 Enter your email address. Press Enter .Contact email address []:

20Enter your phone number. Press Enter .

Phone number []:

21Enter your address (line 1). Press Enter .

Address (line 1) []:



23Enter your city. Press Enter .

City []:

24 Enter your state. Press Enter .State []:

25Enter your zip code. Press Enter .

Zip []:

26Enter your country. Press Enter .

Country []:

27

Select the geographic region where the local SUN branch is located. Forexample. Select APAC: Asia, Pacific. Press Enter .

Geographic Region

1 - AMERICAS - North and South America

2 - EMEA - Europe, Middle-east and Africa

3 - APAC - Asia, Pacific

[]: 3

28

The following information is displayed. Select no. Press Enter .

Would you like all explorer output to be sent to:

[email protected]

at the completion of explorer when -mail or -e is specified?

[y,n] n

29 Send the output to other email address: Enter“-” for none

30 Enter the return address for analysis result. Enter “-” for none.

31

The settings are displayed. Select y to confirm or select n to reset theinformation.

You have answered:Company name: Huawei

Contract ID:

...

Geography: APAC

Mail output to:

Mail output from:

Are these values okay? [y,n] y

28


Would you like all explorer output to be sent to:

[email protected]


[y,n] n

32

The following information is displayed. Select n, and then press Enter .

Do you wish to run explorer once a week? [y,n] n

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-10

Step Description

33

The following information is displayed. Select n, and then pressEnter.

The command to do this would be:/opt/SUNWexplo/bin/explorer -q -e

Would you like to do this now? [y,n] n

34 Select y to create the /opt/SUNWexplo directory.

35The following information is displayed. Select yes, and then press Enter .

Do you … with the installation of <SUNWexplo> [y,n,?] y

36Run /.profile to enable the environment variables.

#. /.profile

4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch


Install the Solaris patch on igwb1 and igwb2.

II. Operation steps

Step Description

1Insert the patch CD into the CD-ROM of the corresponding host orworkstation console.

2

Log in as root, and then run the commands below:

# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/8

# unpatck-patches

3

Run the command below to begin the setup process. This process may takea long time. Please wait.

# cd /tmp/8; /install_all_patches

4

Restart the computer after the installation is complete.

# sync;sync;sync

# reboot

4.3.3 Installing SAN Patches


Install this patch on igwb1 and igwb2.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-11

II. Operation steps

Step Description


2


# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SAN

# unpack-patches

Are you ready to unpack patches into /tmp/SAN? [y/n]: y

3

Run the commands below to install the patches:

#cd /tmp/SAN

#./install_patches

Are you ready to continue with install? [y/n]: y

4

Go to /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SAN/8, and then run the commandsbelow:

#cd cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SAN/8

#unpack-patches

Are you ready to unpack patches into /tmp/8? [y/n]: y

Target for unpacking patches /tmp/8 exists!

May I delete /tmp/8? [y/n] y

5

Install the patch package with the commands below.

#cd /tmp/8

#./install_patches


4.3.4 Installing SCSI Card Driver


For StorEdge 3310, make sure the SCSI card driver is installed on igwb1 and igwb2.

II. Operation steps

Step Description


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-12

Step Description

2

Run the commands below to install the SCSI card driver:

#mkdir -p /export/home/software/scsi

#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/progs/SUNWqus/8

#cp SUNWqus_8_all.tar.gz /export/home/software/scsi/

#cd /export/home/software/scsi

#gunzip SUNWqus_8_all.tar.gz

#tar xvf SUNWqus_8_all.tar

#pkgadd –d.

Select yes if prompted during the setup process.

4.3.5 Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch



II. Operation steps

Step Description

1

Log in as root, and then go to /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SUNWqus/8.Run the commands below:

#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SUNWqus/8

#unpack-patches



May I delete /tmp/8? [y/n]: y

#cd /tmp/8

#./install_patches

Are you ready to continue with install? [y/n] y

2

Restart the computer after installation.

# sync;sync;sync

# reboot -- -r

Use the format command to view all the hard disks on the disk array.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-13

Caution:

Make sure the above software packages are installed in the above sequence. Restart

the computer after a package is installed. The computer can automatically detect the

disk array status during the restart process.

4.4 Configuring Solaris

After Solaris and related patches are installed, modify the configuration file on igwb1

and igwb2 respectively.

4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files

In the /etc/hosts file, add the host name and IP address of the secondary node of the

HA system to make the two nodes access each other.

I. Modify the /etc/hosts file of igwb1.

#

# Internet host table

#

127.0.0.1 localhost

129.1.1.1 igwb1 igwb1.huawei.com loghost

129.2.1.1 igwb11

129.3.1.1 igwb13

129.1.1.2 igwb2

129.2.1.2 igwb21

129.3.1.2 igwb23

129.1.1.3 ha-igwb

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1

129.3.1.3 ha-igwb3

129.1.1.11 igwb1-sc

129.1.1.12 igwb2-sc

129.1.1.13 3310-0

129.1.1.14 3310-1

Make an adjustment based on the actual planning.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-14

II. Modify the /etc/hosts file of igwb2.

#


#

127.0.0.1 localhost


129.2.1.2 igwb21

129.3.1.2 igwb23

129.1.1.1 igwb1

129.2.1.1 igwb11

129.3.1.1 igwb13

129.1.1.3 ha-igwb

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1

129.3.1.3 ha-igwb3

129.1.1.11 igwb1-sc

129.1.1.12 igwb2-sc

129.1.1.13 3310-0

129.1.1.14 3310-1

Note:

The /etc/hosts file records the IP addresses of the local nodes and all the nodes in

the HA system. 129.1.1.1 is the IP address of the primary node, and 129.1.1.2 is the

IP address of the secondary node. For a specific IP address, enter as indicated in

the IP planning table.

In the file, a tab not a space is set between 129.1.1.1 and igwb1.

4.4.2 Creating Network Adapter Configuration Files

Create the network adapter configuration files for igwb1 and igwb2.

I. Create hostname.bge1 and hostname.bge3 in the /etc directory of igwb1

Create hostname.bge1

# vi /etc/hostname.bge1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-15

Add the line below:

igwb11



Add the line below:

igwb13

II. Create hostname.bge1 and hostname.bge3 in the /etc directory of igwb2



Add the line below:

igwb21



Add the line below:

igwb23

4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root

Modify the /etc/default/login file. Comment off the line where CONSOLE is set. For

example, modify

CONSOLE=/dev/console

into:

#CONSOLE=/dev/console

Add a comment on this line. Then the user root can log in to the host by Telnet.

4.4.4 Configuring FTP Login for root

Modify the file /etc/ftpusers. Add # before root to comment off the line. Then, the user

root can log in by FTP.

4.4.5 Executing the .profile File

Open the /.profile files on the two nodes, and then modify the contents related to

TERM. Add the content below to the end of the .profile files.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-16

TERM=vt100; export TERM

Execute the .profile files.

#. /.profile (# is to enable the .profile file.)

4.4.6 Modifying the /kernel/drv/sd.conf File

Add the contents below to the end of the /kernel/drv/sd.conf file:

name="sd" class="scsi"

target=0 lun=1;


target=1 lun=1;


target=2 lun=1;


target=3 lun=1;


target=4 lun=1;


target=5 lun=1;

4.4.7 Modifying the /etc/system File

Add the line below to the end of the /etc/system file:

exclude: lofs

Note:

This line is added because Sun Cluster 3.0 does not support the Loopback file system.

For details, refer to Sun Cluster 3.0 Release Notes.

4.4.8 Modifying the /etc/inet/netmasks File

Add the contents below to the end of the /etc/inet/netmasks file:

129.1.1.0 255.255.0.0

129.2.1.0 255.255.0.0

129.3.1.0 255.255.0.0

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-17

4.4.9 Restarting the Hosts

#sync;sync;sync

#shutdown –y –g0 –i6

4.5 Installing Utilities

This section introduces how to install the utilities, including the TOP utility and the TVS

utility.

4.5.1 Installing the TOP Software

The TOP utility is used to test the hardware states, such as CPU and memory. Installthis software on igwb1 and igwb2.

Step Description

1 Insert the TOP software CD into the CD-ROM.

2

Log in to igwb1 or igwb2 as root, and then go to the setup directory.

# cd /cdrom/cdrom0

# cd sun/tools/top

3

Copy the installation package to the temp directory.

# cp top.3.5b8.SPARC.64bit.Solaris.8.pkg.tgz /tmp

4

Unpack the software package

# cd /tmp

# gzcat -d top.3.5b8.SPARC.64bit.Solaris.8.pkg.tgz|tar xvf-

5

Install the package.

# pkgadd -d .top

Do you want to install these as setuid/setgid files [y,n,?,q] y

If the installation is successful, the information below is prompted:

Installation of <top> was successful.

4.5.2 Installing the VTS Software

Install the VTS utility on igwb1 and igwb2.

Step Description

1 Insert the VTS software CD into the CD-ROM.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-18

Step Description

2

Log in to igwb1 or igwb2 as root, and then go to the following directory.

#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/SunVTS-5.1

In this directory, you can find the files below:

SUNWvts SUNWvtsmn SUNWvtsx

#cd 8


SUNWlxml SUNWlxmlx install-s8xmlpkgs.sh

3

Install the software.

#./install-s8xmlpkgs.sh

The installation is successful if the information below is prompted on thescreen:

## Installing part 1 of 1.

/usr/lib/sparcv9/libxml2.so <symbolic link>

/usr/lib/sparcv9/libxml2.so.2

[ verifying class <none> ]

Installation of <SUNWlxmlx> was successful.

4

Run the commands below:

#cd ..

#pkgadd -d .

5

This is an interactive installation process. You need to select the followingparameters:

Select package(s) you wish to process (or 'all' to process

all packages). (default: all) [?,??,q]:

Do you want to enable the Kerberos V5 based security? n

Do you want to continue with the installation of <SUNWvts> [y,n,?]

y

6Insert the patch CD into the CD-ROM, and then go to the setup directory.

#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SunVTS/5.1

7

Unpack the package.

# unpack-patches

Are you ready to unpack patches into /tmp/5.1? [y/n]: y

# cd /tmp/5.1

8

Add the patch.

# patchadd 112336-02

If the installation is successful, the following information is displayed on thescreen:

Patch packages installed:

SUNWvts

SUNWvtsx

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part II System Installation (Netra 240)HUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software


5-1

Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software


The HA system software includes Sun Cluster (SC) 3.0 and the Volume Manager. To

install the software, follow the steps below:


Installing Sun Cluster 3.0

Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5

Entering Volume Manager Licenses Configuring HA System Parameters


Make the preparations below before installation:

Checking the /etc/hosts File

Checking Configurations of the hostname Network Adapter

Checking the /etc/default/login File

Cleaning out Data

5.2.1 Checking the /etc/hosts File

The file /etc/hosts contains the host names and the related IP addresses of:

Public and private networks

Logical hosts

The HA system uses the names of the network adapters for communication purposes,

so the /etc/hosts file must provide all the related information.

Check whether the /etc/hosts file contains the same contents below. If not, modify it.

I. On igwb1

#


#

127.0.0.1 localhost


129.2.1.1 igwb11

129.3.1.1 igwb13

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-2

129.1.1.2 igwb2

129.2.1.2 igwb21

129.3.1.2 igwb23

129.1.1.3 ha-igwb

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1

129.3.1.3 ha-igwb3

129.1.1.11 igwb1-sc

129.1.1.12 igwb2-sc

129.1.1.13 3310-0

129.1.1.14 3310-1

II. On igwb2

#


#

127.0.0.1 localhost


129.2.1.2 igwb21

129.3.1.2 igwb23

129.1.1.1 igwb1

129.2.1.1 igwb11

129.3.1.1 igwb13

129.1.1.3 ha-igwb

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1

129.3.1.3 ha-igwb3

129.1.1.11 igwb1-sc

129.1.1.12 igwb2-sc

129.1.1.13 3310-0

129.1.1.14 3310-1

Note:

Only the value of loghost is different between the two hosts.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-3

5.2.2 Checking Configurations of the hostname Network Adapters

I. On igwb1

For /etc/hostname.bge1, it is set to igwb11.


II. On igwb2



5.2.3 Checking the /etc/default/login File

Check if "#" is added before CONSOLE=/dev/console to comment off this line.

5.2.4 Cleaning out Data

Execute the commands below on the two hosts:

root@igwb1#devfsadm -C


5.3 Installing Sun Cluster 3.0

The SC software is HA software. In Sun cluster, two hosts form a cluster over the

network. Each host is a node. One or more user processes that run on the two nodes

constitute a data service.

SUN Cluster is used to monitor the running status of the data services and the two

nodes. If one node fails, the data services will be transferred to the other node to avoid

longtime service interruption.

To install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1 and igwb2, follow the steps below:

Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1

Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2

Configuring the Quorum Device

Checking the Status of the Cluster

5.3.1 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1

To install the SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1, follow the steps below:

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-4

Installing SUN Cluster 3.0

Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 patches

Configuring SUN Cluster 3.0

Edit ftp.conf.cluster Install the diagnosis tool package

Restart the computer

Checking the Installation

I. Installing SUN Cluster 3.0

To install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1, follow the steps below:

1) Insert the SUN Cluster 3.0 installation CD into the CD-ROM. Run the command

below:

root@igwb1#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/SunCluster_3.0/Tools

The current directory contains the following files:

Upgrade defaults lib scinstall

2) Run scinstall to install SUN Cluster 3.0.

root@igwb1#./scinstall

The following information is displayed:

*** Main Menu ***

* 1) Establish a new cluster using this machine as the first node

* 2) Add this machine as a node in an established cluster

3) Configure a cluster to be JumpStarted from this install server

4) Add support for new data services to this cluster node

5) Print release information for this cluster node

* ?) Help with menu options

* q) Quit

Note:

On igwb1, select 1) Establish a new cluster using this machine as the first

node.

On igwb2, select 2) Add this machine as a node in an established cluster .

Press Ctrl+D to return to the main menu during the setup process.

Do you want to continue (yes/no) [yes]? y

Is it okay to continue (yes/no) [yes]? y

3) Install SUN Cluster 3.0.

** Installing SunCluster 3.0 **

SUNWscr.....done

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-5

SUNWscu.....done

SUNWscdev...done

SUNWscgds...done

SUNWscman...done

SUNWscsal...done

SUNWscsam...done

SUNWscvm....done

SUNWmdm.....done

SUNWscva....done

SUNWscvr....done

SUNWscvw....done

Hit ENTER to continue:

Press Ctrl+C to stop the setup process.

Note:

Because SUN Cluster 3.0 is not upgraded, it cannot identify those four 1000M

network adapters bge0, bge1, bge2, and bge3.

The installation must be stopped, otherwise, you will fail to configure the private

network.

II. Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 patches

To install the patches, follow the step below:

1) Insert the SUN Patch 4.0.2 CD into the CD-ROM.

2) Run the command below to copy the installation package as root.

root@igwb1#cp -r /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SunCluster/3.0

/install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster

3) Run the commands below to unpack the installation package.

root@igwb1#cd /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster/common

root@igwb1#unpack-patches

Are you ready to unpack patches into /tmp/common? [y/n]: y

4) Run the patch installation script as prompted.

root@igwb1#cd /tmp/common;./install_patches

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-6

III. Configuring SUN Cluster 3.0

Now, SUN Cluster 3.0 can identify the above four network adapters. Continue the

scinstall process.

1) Insert SUN Cluster 3.0 into the CD-ROM, and unpack the installation package.

root@igwb1#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/SunCluster_3.0/Tools



root@igwb1# ./scinstall

Note:

To continue the setup process, refer to 5.3.2 “Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2”.

2) The following information is displayed.

*** Main Menu ***




4) Add support for new data services to this cluster node5) Print release information for this cluster node


* q) Quit

Note:


node.

On igwb2, select 2) Add this machine as a node in an established cluster .

You may press Ctrl+D to return to the main menu during the setup process.



Ignore the following messages:

** Installing SunCluster 3.0 **

Skipping "SUNWscr" - already installed

scinstall: WARNING: but, the installed version is not the expected version!

Skipping "SUNWscu" - already installed

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-7


Skipping "SUNWscdev" - already installed


Skipping "SUNWscgds" - already installed

Skipping "SUNWscman" - already installed


Skipping "SUNWscsal" - already installed


Skipping "SUNWscsam" - already installed


Skipping "SUNWscvm" - already installed


Skipping "SUNWmdm" - already installed

Skipping "SUNWscva" - already installed


Skipping "SUNWscvr" - already installed

Skipping "SUNWscvw" - already installed


What is the name of the cluster you want to establish? hwhlr

Please list the names of the other nodes planned for the initial

cluster configuration. List one node name per line. When finished,type

Control-D:

Node name:igwb2

Node name (Ctrl-D to finish):^D

Note:

On igwb2, the following information is displayed: What is the name of the sponsoring

node? igwb1

3) All the nodes defined in the cluster are displayed. If the information is correct,enter y. Otherwise, enter n to modify it.

Do you need to use DES authentication (yes/no) [no]? <Enter>

Is it okay to accept the default network address (yes/no) [yes]?

Is it okay to accept the default netmask (yes/no) [yes]?

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-8

Note:

The default network address is 172.16.0.0 and the default netmask is 255.255.0.0.

Change the values if necessary.

Does this two-node cluster use transport junctions (yes/no) [yes]? no

4) Select ce0 as the primary private network adapter, and ce1 as the secondary one.

Select the first cluster transport adapter to use:

1) bge1

2) ce0

3) ce1

4) bge2

5) bge3

6) Other

Option:2

Adapter "ce0" is an ethernet adapter.

Searching for unexpected network traffic on "ce0" ... done

Verification completed. No traffic was detected over a 10 second

sample period.

All transport adapters support the "dlpi" transport type. Ethernet

adapters are supported only with the "dlpi" transport; however, other

adapter types may support other types of transport. For more

information on which transports are supported with which adapters,

please refer to the scconf_transp_adap family of man pages

(scconf_transp_adap_hme(1M), ...).

The "dlpi" transport type will be set for this cluster.

Select the second cluster transport adapter to use:

1) bge1

2) ce1

3) bge2

4) bge3

5) Other

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-9

Option: 2

Adapter "ce1" is an ethernet adapter.

Searching for unexpected network traffic on "ce1" ... done

Verification completed. No traffic was detected over a 10 second

sample period.

The default is to use /globaldevices.

Is it okay to use this default (yes/no) [yes]?

Do you want scinstall to reboot for you (yes/no) [yes]? no

Are these the options you want to use (yes/no) [yes]?

Note:

The parameters you configure are displayed. If they are correct, select yes to continue,

or select no to reset the parameters.

Do you want to continue with the install (yes/no) [yes]?

5) Solaris starts to configure SUN Cluster 3.0. Then, enter q to close the main menu.

IV. Edit ftp.conf.cluster

To edit the ntp.conf.cluster file, follow the steps below:

1) Run the vi command to edit the ntp.conf.cluster file.

root@igwb1#vi /etc/inet/ntp.cluster

peer clusternode3-priv






2) Save and exit.

V. Install the diagnosis tool package

To install the diagnosis tool package, follow the steps below:

1) Insert the SUN Patch4.0.2 CD into the CD-ROM.

2) Log in as root and run the commands below to copy the installation package to the

/install directory:

root@igwb1#cd /cdrom/cdrom/sun/progs/SunCluster/3.0

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-10

root@igwb1#cp SUNWscdtk_u3_s8.tar.gz /install

3) Run the commands below to unpack the package.

root@igwb1#cd /install

root@igwb1#gzcat SUNWscdtk_u3_s8.tar.gz| tar xvf -

4) Run the command below to add the SUNWscdtk diagnosis tool package.

root@igwb1#pkgadd -d . SUNWscdtk

The following information is displayed.

Installation of <SUNWscdtk> was successful.

VI. Restart the computer

Run the commands below to restart the computer:

root@igwb1#sync

root@igwb1#sync

root@igwb1#init 6

VII. Checking the Installation

Run the command below to check the status of the node.

root@igwb1#scstat |more

If the configuration is correct, the following information is displayed:

Node name Status

Cluster node: igwb1 Online

5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2

This section includes the contents below:

Installing SUN Cluster 3.0

Edit ftp.conf.cluster

Install the diagnosis tool package

Restart the computer

I. Installing SUN Cluster 3.0


1) Copy SUN Cluster 3.0 and unpack it.

root@igwb2# telnet igwb2

root@igwb2# cd /install

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-11

root@igwb2#gzcat suncluster_3_0_u3_solaris8.tar.gz|tar xvf –

root@igwb2#cd suncluster_3_0_u3_solaris8/SunCluster_3.0

root@igwb2#cd /tools




root@igwb2# ./scinstall


*** Main Menu ***







* q) Quit

Option:2

Do you want to continue (yes/no) [yes]?

Is it okay to continue (yes/no) [yes]?

What is the name of the sponsoring node? igwb1

What is the name of the cluster you want to join? sc-igwb

Hit ENTER to continue: (press Enter)

>>> Check <<<

This step runs sccheck(1M) to verify that certain basic hardware and

software pre-configuration requirements have been met. If sccheck(1M) detects

potential problems with configuring this machine as a cluster node, a list of

warnings is printed.


Running sccheck ... done

All sccheck tests passed.


Do you want to use autodiscovery (yes/no) [yes]?

The following connections were discovered:

igwb1:ce0 switch1 igwb2:ce0

igwb1:ce1 switch2 igwb2:ce1

Is it okay to add these connections to the configuration (yes/no) [yes]?




7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-12



3) Solaris starts to configure SUN Cluster 3.0. Then, enter q to close the main menu

II. Edit ntp.conf.cluster

To edit the ntp.conf.cluster file, run the command below:

root@igwb2#vi /etc/inet/ntp.cluster

Delete the lines below:







Save and exit.

III. Install the diagnosis tool package

1) Insert the SUN Patch4.0.2 CD into the CD-ROM. Log in as root and run the

commands below

root@igwb2#cd /cdrom/cdrom/sun/progs/SunCluster/3.0

root@igwb2#cp SUNWscdtk_u3_s8.tar.gz /install


root@igwb2#gzcat SUNWscdtk_u3_s8.tar.gz| tar xvf -


2) Run the command below to add the SUNWscdtk diagnosis tool package.


The following information is displayed.

Installation of <SUNWscdtk> was successful.

IV. Restart the computer

Run the commands below to restart the computer:

root@igwb1#sync

root@igwb1#sync

root@igwb1#init 6

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-13

5.3.3 Configuring the Quorum Device

Note:

Configure the quorum device on igwb1 only.

1) Check the disk ID (DID).

root@igwb1#scdidadm -L

Specify a hard disk on the disk array for the Quorum device. Here, select d4.

For example:

igwb1>scdidadm -L

1 igwb1:/dev/rdsk/c0t0d0 /dev/did/rdsk/d1














Note:

Only the shared disk can serve as the Quorum device.

From above, you can see the disks d4, d5, d6 and d7 are shared by the primary and

secondary nodes.d4 and d6 are on LUN0, and d5 and d7 are on LUN1. Here, d4 is

used as the Quorum device.

2) Create a lock disk

root@igwb1#scconf -a -q globaldev=d4

root@igwb1#scconf -c -q reset

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-14

root@igwb1#scconf -a -T node=.

5.3.4 Checking the Status of the Cluster Nodes

Run the command below to check node status:


If the node configurations are correct, the following information is displayed:

-- Cluster Nodes --

Node name Status

--------- ------



------------------------------------------------------------------

-- Cluster Transport Paths --

Endpoint Endpoint Status

-------- -------- ------

Transport path: igwb1:ce1 igwb2:ce1 Path online

Transport path: igwb1:ce0 igwb2:ce0 Path online

----------------------------------------------------------

-- Quorum Summary --

Quorum votes possible: 3

Quorum votes needed: 2

Quorum votes present: 3

-- Quorum Votes by Node --

Node Name Present Possible Status

--------- ------- -------- ------

Node votes: igwb1 1 1 Online


-- Quorum Votes by Device --

Device Name Present Possible Status

----------- ------- -------- ------

Device votes: /dev/did/rdsk/d3s2 1 1 Online

------------------------------------------------------------------

-- Device Group Servers --

Device Group Primary Secondary

------------ ------- ---------

-- Device Group Status --

Device Group Status

------------ ------

------------------------------------------------------------------

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-15

5.4 Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5

Volume Manager 3.5 must be installed on igwb1 and igwb2. To install and configure

Volume Manager 3.5, follow the steps below:

Installing Volume Manager

Installing Volume Manager Patches

Modifying Disk Management Parameters


5.4.1 Installing Volume Manager

To install Volume Manager, follow the steps below:

1) Insert the Volume Manager installation CD into the CD-ROM.

2) Log in as root.

#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun-internal/progs/veritas-vm

#cd 3.5

The current directory contains the foundationproduct3.4sunw.tar.gz installation

package.

3) Copy the installation package to the specified directory.

#cp foundationproduct3.4sunw.tar.gz /install

#cd /install

4) Unpack the software package.

#gzcat foundationproduct3.4sunw.tar.gz|tar xvf -

5) Install the software.

#scvxinstall

Do you want Volume Manager to encapsulate root [no]? y

Where is the Volume Manager cdrom? /install/foundationproduct3.4sunw

6) Enter the License key.

Please enter a Volume Manager license key [none]:xxx (for example,

rrpu-ypr6-wp69-204k-6ppp-6ppr-pp)

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-16

Note:

Enter the temporary License key before you get the permanent one. Make sure you

apply for a permanent License and install it. If not, after the temporary License

expires, the volume manager cannot be reset if a system failure occurs.

To apply for a permanent License, fill in your hostid in the application form provided

with the product by fax or email to Sun Microsystems Inc. Before it is granted, ask

for a temporary License with Sun Microsystems Inc.

The system will restart twice during the setup process.

5.4.2 Installing Volume Manager Patches

To install the Volume Manager patches, follow the steps below:

1) Put the Sun Patches 4.0.2 CD into the CD-ROM.

2) Log in as root.

#cd /cdrom/cdrom/sun/patch/veritas-vm

#cd 3.5

#ls

You can find the files below in the current directory:

112392-07.zip 113203-03.zip 113595-05.zip 113596-04.zip


#unpack-patches


Cleaning out /tmp/3.5...

Unpacking.....

Patch 112392-06

Patch 113203-03

Patch 113595-05

Patch 113596-03

You should run:cd /tmp/3.5; ./install_patches

4) Install the patches with the command below:

#cd /tmp/3.5; ./install_patches



Determining if sufficient save space exists...

Sufficient save space exists, continuing...

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-17

Installing patches located in /tmp/3.5

Installing 112392-06...

……

Ignore the error messages if prompted.

Caution:

Make sure you have the latest patches on hand. If not, contact Sun Microsystems for

technical support.

5.4.3 Modifying Disk Management Parameters

It the DMP function is enabled by Solaris, disable it in the Volume Manager.

1) Log in as root, and then execute the command below to disable the DMP function:

#vxdiskadm


Select an operation to perform:17 (Select 17 Prevent multipathing/Suppress

devices from VxVM's view )

Do you want to continue ? [y,n,q,?] (default: y)

Select an operation to perform:5 (Select 5 Prevent multipathing of all disks

on a controller by VxVM )

Enter a controller name [<ctlr-name>,all,list,list-exclude,q,?] all

Continue operation? [y,n,q,?] (default: n) y

Enter q till the main menu is displayed.

2) Restart the computer to enable the parameters.

#sync

#sync

#init 6

5.4.4 Checking the Installation

1) Run df –k and more /etc/vfstab to check if the mounted device cxtxdxsx is

replaced by volume.

2) Check if vxconfigd is started normally.

#ps -ef| grep vx

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-18

It is properly started if the information below is displayed.

root 20 1 0 19:42:32 ? 0:01 vxconfigd -m boot

3) Execute the vxdctl mode command to check if the initialization is successful.

If "enable" is displayed, the initialization is successful.

5.5 Entering Volume Manager Licenses

Note:

Enter the respective licenses on igwb1 and igwb2.

5.5.1 Checking Hostid

Check the hostid with the command below:

root@igwb1#hostid

You may get:

8301aad5

Check if it is the same as that in the License.

Caution:

The hostids are different for the two minicomputers.

5.5.2 Checking If the License Is Permanent

Check if it is a permanent License with the command below:

root@igwb1# vxlicrep

If it is not a permanent License, the following information is displayed:

VERITAS License Manager vxlicrep utility version 3.00.007d

Copyright (C) VERITAS Software Corp 2002. All Rights reserved.

Creating a report on all VERITAS products installed on this system

-----------------***********************-----------------

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-19

License Key = R8CE-FR26-NSNN-R4O4-OZNP-PPP6-PPPP-OL

Product Name = VERITAS Volume Manager

License Type = DEMO

OEM ID = 4095

Demo End Date = Fri Jul 23 00:00:00 2004

(60.3 days from now).

Features :=

VxVM = Enabled

CPU Count = Not Restricted

The information indicates that no permanent License is entered for the product. Note

that the letters in bold indicate the expiry date of the temporary license. After the date,

enter a permanent license.

5.5.3 Entering the Permanent License

Run the command below:

root@igwb1# /sbin/vxlicinst


VERITAS License Manager vxlicinst utility version 3.00.007d


Enter your license key : rrp9-un3k-rtv8-y6pp-p6pp-ncpc-pp

License key successfully installed for VERITAS Volume Manager

5.5.4 Checking If the License Is Correctly Entered

To check if the License is correctly entered, run the command below:

root@igwb1# /sbin/vxlicrep

5.6 Configuring HA System Parameters

To Set the HA system parameters on igwb1 and igwb2, follow the steps below:

Mirroring Root Disk

Creating the igwbdg Resource Group

Configuring NAFO

Registering the igwbrg Resource Group

Installing igwb Monitor Script

Checking the Configuration

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-20

5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk

Note:

Unless otherwise specified, all the operations in this section shall be performed on

igwb1 and igwb2.

I. Check the disk information

#vxdisk list

c1t0d0s2 sliced rootdisk_1 rootdg online c1t0d0s2

c1t1d0s2 sliced - - error c1t1d0s2





Select the second local disk as the mirrored disk of the root disk. The disk c1t1d0s2 is

selected in this example. Select the root disk based on the actual configurations.

II. Initialize the selected mirrored disk

Clean out all the information in the disk.

#vxdiskunsetup –C c1t1d0

Initialize the selected mirrored disk

#vxdisksetup –i c1t1d0

III. Add the mirrored disk to rootdg

On the primary node, run the command below:

#vxdg -g rootdg adddisk mirrordisk_1=c1t1d0

On the secondary node, run the command below:


IV. Mirror the root disk


#vxmirror rootdisk_1 mirrordisk_1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-21

Caution:

Rootdisk 1 is the local disk obtained with #vxdisk command.



5.6.2 Creating the igwbdg Resource Group

Note:

Unless otherwise specified, perform the operations in this section only on igwb1.

I. View the disk information

#vxdisk list

DEVICE TYPE DISK GROUP STATUS

c1t0d0s2 sliced rootdisk_1 rootdg online c1t0d0s2

c1t1d0s2 sliced mirrordisk_1 rootdg error c1t1d0s2





Select c3t1d1 and c4t1d1 as the disks of the igwbdg disk group. c3t1d0 and c4t1d0

are selected as LUN0 in 200 MB. This LUN is set for system maintenance purpose.

Note:

The drive letter varies with the devices. Select based on the actual configurations.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-22

II. Create the igwbdg disk group

Caution:

Create the igwbdg disk group on one host only.

The commands below can be saved as creat_volume.sh. Run chmod 755

create_volume.sh to make it executable, and then run sh ./create_volume.sh.

This process may take a few hours, which depends on the disk capacity.

c3t0d1 in the script below should be the actual disk array number. View the numbers

with the format command. For example, the letters in blue (four disks) is the

required disk array numbers. Note that the number in red is the local disk of igwb 1

only.

root@igwb1#format

AVAILABLE DISK SELECTIONS:

0. c1t0d0 <SUN72G cyl 14087 alt 2 hd 24 sec 424>

/pci@1c,600000/scsi@2/sd@0,0


/pci@1c,600000/scsi@2/sd@1,02. c3t1d0 <SUN-StorEdge3310-0325 cyl 198 alt 2 hd 64 sec 32>

/pci@1e,600000/pci@2/scsi@4/sd@1,0

3. c3t1d1 <SUN-StorEdge3310-0325 cyl 51198 alt 2 hd 64 sec 64>

/pci@1e,600000/pci@2/scsi@4/sd@1,1


/pci@1e,600000/pci@2/scsi@5/sd@1,0


/pci@1e,600000/pci@2/scsi@5/sd@1,1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-23

Caution:

igwbdg01 and igwbdg02 in the script below is set for LUN1 on the StorEdge 3310.

The space of the front disk and the back disk shall be changed based on the actual

capacity of LUN1.

Partition the disk into four partitions, front, back, log-alarm, and igwbdg-stat.

igwbdg-stat is used by the system. Calculate each partition as indicated below: The

total space is the space of LUN1, 101,376 MB. Allocate 512 MB to igwbdg-stat,

4,096 MB to log-alarm, and the rest 103,228 MB are fifty-fifty for the front disk and

the back disk. It is recommended that the allocated space for the front disk and the

back disk be set to integral times of 512 to avoid insufficient available space.

1) Compile the creat_volume.sh script.

/usr/lib/vxvm/bin/vxdisksetup -i c3t1d1


vxdg init igwbdg igwbdg01=c3t1d1

vxdg -g igwbdg adddisk igwbdg02=c4t1d1

vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make igwbdg-stat 512m layout=nolog igwbdg01

vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make log-alarm 4096m layout=nolog igwbdg01

vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make front 101376m layout=nolog igwbdg01

vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make back 101376m layout=nolog igwbdg01

vxassist -g igwbdg mirror igwbdg-stat layout=nolog igwbdg02

vxassist -g igwbdg mirror log-alarm layout=nolog igwbdg02

vxassist -g igwbdg mirror front layout=nolog igwbdg02

vxassist -g igwbdg mirror back layout=nolog igwbdg02

2) Run the script

Execute sh ./create_volumes.sh in the script directory.

III. Register the igwbdg resource

Unless otherwise specified, perform the command below on the primary node only.

root@igwb1#scconf -a -D type=vxvm, name=igwbdg, nodelist=igwb1:igwb2,

preferenced=true

IV. Create the new file system on the igwbdg volume

#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/igwbdg-stat

#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/log-alarm

#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/front

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-24

#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/back

The similar information below is displayed when the above commands are executed.

newfs: construct a new file system /dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/ igwbdg-stat : (y/n)?

y

Enter y.

V. Modify /etc/vfstab and create the mount points

1) Run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to create the mount points.

#cd /var

#mkdir frontsave

#mkdir backsave

#mkdir other

Then, three mount points /var/frontsave, /var/backsave, and /var/other are created on

igwb1 and igwb2.

2) Modify the /etc/vfstab file on igwb1 and igwb2, and then add the contents below:

/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/front /dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/front /var/frontsave ufs 2

no logging

/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/back /dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/back /var/backsave ufs 2 no

logging

/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/log-alarm /dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/log-alarm /var/other

ufs 2 no logging

5.6.3 Configuring NAFO

Note:

Perform this operation on igwb1 and igwb2. Below is an example on igwb1.

root@igwb1#pnmset

The following information is displayed. The letters in bold should be entered.

In the following, you will be prompted to do configuration for network adapter

failover

Do you want to continue ... [y/n]: y

How many NAFO groups to configure [1]: 1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-26

root@igwb1 # scswitch -e -M -j storg- other

Restart the HA system with the command below:

root@igwb1 # scshutdown -y -g0

5.6.5 Installing igwb Monitor Script

Transfer the sc30_script.ta file to the /opt directory on igwb1 and igwb2 in binary

mode.


#cd /opt

#tar xvf sc30_script.tar

Run the command below to restart the HA system.


5.6.6 Checking the Configuration

After configuration, run the commands below to check whether the nodes can be added

and switched over.

I. On igwb1, run the commands below:

root@igwb1 # scstat |more (Check if the node status is normal.)

root@igwb1 # df -k (check if all volumes of the disk arrays are included.)

root@igwb1 # scswitch -S -h igwb1 (Check if the HA system can be switched over

from igwb1 to igwb2.)

II. On igwb2, run the commands below:


root@igwb1 # df -k (Check if all volumes of the disk arrays are included)

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part II System Installation (Netra 240)HUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 6 Installing Billing Interface


6-1

Chapter 6 Installing Billing Interface


The CG9812 supports the FTP and FTAM billing interfaces. Select one of them as

required.

To use the FTAM interface, you need to install and configure the FTAM software.

The FTP software is installed during the UNIX setup process. To use the FTP

interface, you need to configure the FTP server.

It is recommended to transfer the bill files between the CG9812 and the billing center by

FTP.

6.2 Installing FTP

The installation of the FTP interface is simple. The FTP server software is installed

during the UNIX setup process. It is not required to install it separately.

6.3 Installing FTAM

To use the FTAM interface, you need to install and configure the FTAM software. This

section introduces how to install the FTAM billing interface.

6.3.1 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0

The Solstice FTAM 9.0 is a FTAM software package developed by SUN Microsystems

Inc. It is the update version to Solstice FTAM 8.1.1. Compared with Solstice FTAM 8.1.1,

this version supports the 64-bit system and corrects some errors. Typically, the SUN

FTAM package contains two components: the application layer package and protocol

stack package, which can be purchased separately.

1) Solstice OSI 9.0, the OSI protocol stack of FTAM, contains the following packages:

SUNWcorpc Solstice OSI RPC installation package

SUNWcosiA Solstice OSI core stack kernel files 1

SUNWcosia Solstice OSI core stack kernel files

SUNWcosib Solstice OSI core stack configuration files

SUNWcosic Solstice OSI core stack management utilities

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-2

SUNWcosid Solstice OSI core stack development kit

SUNWosiax Solstice OSI core stack kernel files (64-bit)

SUNWosicx Solstice OSI core stack management utilities (64-bit)

SUNWosidx Solstice OSI core stack development kit (64-bit)

SUNWlicsw License daemon that maintains the product license database

SUNWlit License installation tools, lit and lit_tty

SUNWcosip Solstice OSI core stack documentation in PDF

2) Solstice FTAM 9.0, the application layer software of FTAM (containing RFC 1006

protocol stack package), contains the following packages.

SUNWftama Solstice FTAM configuration files

SUNWftamb Solstice FTAM executable files and development libraries (32-bit)

SUNWftabx Solstice FTAM executable files and development libraries (64-bit)

SUNWrk6 Solstice RFC1006/TLI Module (32-bit)

SUNWrk6x Solstice RFC1006/TLI Module (64-bit)

SUNWftamp Solstice FTAM documentation in PDF format.



Caution:

SUNWrk6 and SUNWrk6x are the packages of the RFC1006 protocol

stack,SUNWrk6 supports the 32-bit OS while SUNWrk6x supports the 64-bit OS.

The RFC1006 protocol stack cannot exist in the same system with the OSI protocol

stack. In other words, if the RFC1006 protocol stack is installed, the OSI protocolstack cannot be installed on the same computer.

SUNWlicsw is the License monitor process package, and SUNWlit is the License

management toolkit. They are only required to be installed during the FTAM or OSI

setup process. In other words, if the two packages are installed during the OSI setup

process, you do not need to install them during the FTAM setup process.

Currently, Solstice FTAM 9.0 only supports Solaris 8.

If an earlier version of Solstice FTAM is previously installed, uninstall it before

Solstice FTAM 9.0 is installed.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-3

6.3.2 Installation Preparations

I. Prepare the installation software and Licenses

Solstice FTAM 9.0 and Solstice OSI 9.0 are two CDs with a separate License each. The

License is bound to the hostid. The hostid is an 8-byte hexadecimal digit. In Solaris,

check the hostid with the command below:

#hostid

Then, you may get:.

80e63680

II. Decide the underlying communication protocol with the FTAM peer

Before installation, decide the underlying communication protocol with the FTAM peer

end, such as the billing center, you may select the RFC1006 protocol or the OSI

protocol. If the protocol cannot be decided, you probably cannot continue with the

FTAM setup process in a later section.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-4

6.3.3 Installation Steps

Note:

Unless otherwise specified, in the later sections, the letters in bold represent the

information you need to enter, and the letters in italic represent the installer prompts.

I. Install the OSI protocol stack

If you decide to use the OSI protocol stack to communicate with the FTAM peer, the

OSI protocol stack must be installed. If not, directly go to II. “Install the FTAM”.

1) Mount the CD-ROM

Insert the OSI protocol stack CD into the CD-ROM. If the Volume Manager is installed,

the CD-ROM is automatically mounted to the /cdrom/osi_9_0 file system. To check

whether Volume Manager is installed, run the ps -ef | grep vold command. Usually,

Solaris is installed with the Volume Manager, if not, mount it manually with the

commands below:

#mkdir /cdrom/osi_9_0

#mount -rF hsfs /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s0/cdrom/osi_9_0

2) Open the /cdrom/osi_9_0 directory and install the OSI package.

#cd /cdrom/osi_9_0

#pkgadd -d

The installer prompts the message below:

The following software packages are available:

1 SUNWcorpc OSI RPC installation package

(sparc) 9.0

2 SUNWcosiA OSI Core Stack Kernel Files 1

(sparc) 9.0

3 SUNWcosia OSI Core Stack Kernel Files

(sparc) 9.0

4 SUNWcosib OSI Core Stack Configuration Files

(sparc) 9.0

5 SUNWcosic OSI Core Stack Management Utilities

(sparc) 9.0

6 SUNWcosid OSI Core Stack Development Kit

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-6


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0

7 SUNWcosip OSI Core Stack Documentation in PDF

(sparc) 9.0

8 SUNWlicsw FLEX License Manager Software and Utilites

(sparc) 6.1

9 SUNWlit STE License Installation Tool

(sparc) 4.1

10 SUNWosiax OSI Core Stack Kernel Files (64-bit)

(sparc) 9.0

... 2 more menu choices to follow;

<RETURN> for more choices, <CTRL-D> to stop display: <Enter>

The installer prompts the message below.

11 SUNWosicx OSI Core Stack Management Utilities (64-bit)

(sparc) 9.0

12 SUNWosidx OSI Core Stack Development Kit (64-bit)

(sparc) 9.0

Select the package you want to execute (or select “all” to execute all

packages).

(default: all) [?,??,q]:q <Enter>

Enter q to exit.

3) Install the License manager

#cd /etc/opt/licenses

#./lit_tty

The license installation interface prompts the message below:

Select Product

[x] Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC

[ ] Solstice CMIP 9.0 for SPARC

[ ] Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC

[ ] Exit - Save Licenses [ ] Exit - Don't Save Licenses

** x=select product and go to license screen **

** Return=next product **

** n=Next Page p=Previous Page

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-7

Select Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC, and then the information below is

displayed:

Solstice OSI (Stack)

9.0 for SPARC

Servers: [x] 1 [ ] 3 [ ] 5 **x=select. Tab=next count. Return=server name**

SERVER NAME HOSTID

1: igwb2 80c7dff7

Phone Number List [ ] USA: (+1) 800-872-4786

Expiration Date:18-dec-2001

Rights to Use:1 Data Checksum: d5

Password: 07BCAA07173858526A52B Password Checksum: 77

Done Setting Up This License [x] Cancel This License [ ]

** x=select/deselect Return=next field **

Enter the Expiration Date, Rights to Use and Password of the License. The installer

prompts the settings are successful, and then displays the information below:

Select Product

[*] Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC



[x] Exit - Save Licenses [ ] Exit - Don't Save Licenses




Save the Licenses and exit.

4) Install the OSI patches

#pachadd 111344-01

Check installed patches...

111344-01 is the patch of Solstice OSI 9.0.

5) Restart the computer

#sync;sync;sync;reboot

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-8

6) Check whether the OSI protocol stack is successfully installed.

#ps -ef | grep osi

If the /usr/sbin/osinetd process is displayed, the OSI protocol stack is successfully

installed.

II. Install the FTAM

1) Mount the CD-ROM

Insert the FTAM protocol stack CD into the CD-ROM. If the Volume Manager is installed,



Solaris is installed with the Volume Manager, if not,mount it manually with the

commands below:

#mkdir /cdrom/ftam_9_0

#mount -rF hsfs /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s0/cdrom/ftam_9_0

2) Open the /cdrom/ftam_9_0 directory and install the FTAM package.

#cd /cdrom/ftam_9_0

#pkgadd -d

The installer shows the prompts below.


1 SUNWftabx Solstice FTAM Executable, Libraries and Man Pages (64-bit)

(sparcv9) 9.0

2 SUNWftama Solstice FTAM Configuration Files

(sparc) 9.0

3 SUNWftamb Solstice FTAM Executable, Libraries and Man Pages

(sparc) 9.0

4 SUNWftamp Solstice FTAM Documentation in PDF

(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 6.1


(sparc) 4.1

7 SUNWrk6 Solstice RFC1006/TLI Module

(sparc) 1.1

8 SUNWrk6x 64 bits Solstice RFC1006/TLI Module

(sparc) 1.1


packages).

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-9

(default: all) [?,??,q]: <Enter>

In this step, if the OSI protocol stack is installed, select packages 1–6 only and do not

install the RFC1006 packages, including SUNWrk6 and SUNWrk6x. Otherwise, pressEnter to install all the packages. Then, enter y if prompted. For example,

Do you want to continue to install SUNWftabx? y<Enter>

After the packages are installed, the prompt is displayed again:

:


(sparcv9) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 6.1


(sparc) 4.1


(sparc) 1.1


(sparc) 1.1


packages).

(default: all) [?,??,q]:q<Enter>

Enter q to exit.

3) Install the License manager.


#./lit_tty

The installer shows the following information.

Select Product

[ ] Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC


[x] Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-10





Select Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC” and the message is displayed as below:

Solstice FTAM

9.0 for SPARC


SERVER NAME HOSTID

1: igwb2 80c7dff7









Select Product



[*] Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC






4) Restart the computer.


5) Check whether the FTAM is successfully installed.

Use the command below to check whether FTAM is successfully installed.

#ps -ef | grep osi

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-11

If the OSI protocol stack is installed, the four processes osinetd, osiftamd, osiftrd -164,

and osiftrd -264 are displayed.

If the RFC1006 protocol stack is installed, the three processes osiftamd, osiftrd -164,

and osiftrd -264 are displayed. Also, check whether the rk6d process is running by

using the ps -ef | grep rk6d command.

6.3.4 Configuring Parameters

I. Related parameters

1) NSAP

The NSAP represents the network service access point. The FTAM client (Initiator)

finds the FTAM server (Responder) through the NSAP and set up connection with theserver.

The NSAP consists of five parts. See Figure 6-1.

AFI IDI SI PA NSEL

Figure 6-1 NSAP formats

AFI: Authority and Format Identifier (2 bytes)

IDI: Initial Domain Identifier (to be defined)

SI: Subnetwork Identifier

PA: Point of Attachment

NSEL: Network Selector (1 byte)

The NSAP has multiple configuration formats, and the nbs format is frequently used. In

the format, AFI is set to 49, IDI is null, SI+PA is a hexadecimal digit with 1–5 bytes (like

hostid), and NSEL is 01.

For example, the NSAP is 491234567801.

2) T-SELECTOR, P-SELECTOR, and S-SELECTOR represent the selectors of the

transmission layer, presentation layer and session layer respectively.

T-SELECTOR can be ASCII or hex with up to 32 bytes.

P-SELECTOR can be ASCII or hex, with up to 4 bytes.

S-SELECTOR can be ASCII or hex with up to 16 bytes.

3) Partner

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-12

The FTAM runs in Initiator/Responder mode. To initiate the connection with the

Responder, the Initiators must know the parameters like NSAP of Responder. Typically,

a Partner is used to represent the FTAM Responder.

II. Set the OSI parameters

For most network systems, you can use the default values for the parameters of

Solstice OSI protocol stack. To check or modify the parameters, start the GUI tool

/opt/SUNWconn/osinet/bin/ositool.

Start ositool with the command below:

# /opt/SUNWconn/osinet/bin/ositool

Figure 6-2 shows the graphical interface after the tool is started.

Figure 6-2 Configure OSI parameters

With this tool, you can set the parameters for Stack Manager, Network Layer Address,

Router Manager, and ES-IS Configuration (End System). Do not modify these

parameters.

The OSI uses the ES-IS protocol so that the subnets that interconnect can invoke and

update network addresses through the broadcast messages.

III. Configure Solstice FTAM parameters

1) Set up a Partner for the FTAM peer.

#cd /opt/SUNWconn/ftam/bin

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-13

#./osiftam

osiftam>rdb add entry1 -n H4980ed0f2d01 -p Cftr -s CPtr -t CFTAM -z 1

-n is followed by the NSAP of the FTAM peer entry1, H indicates the NSAP format

is hexadecimal, and 80ed0f2d is the hostid of FTAM peer. -p is followed by P-SELECTOR, and C indicates the P-SELECTOR is in text

format, namely ftr in this example.

-s is followed by S-SELECTOR, and C indicates the S-SELECTOR is in text

format, namely Ptr in this example.

-p is followed by T-SELECTOR, and C indicates the T-SELECTOR is in text format,

namely FTAM in this example.

-z is followed by the underlying protocol type. 0 indicates the Connection Oriented

Network Service (CONS), for example, x.25; 1 indicates the Connectionless

Network Protocol (CLNP) network, for example, Ethernet and FDDI; 2 indicate the

RFC 1006, namely TCP/IP. If the OSI protocol stack is installed, select 1 or 2; if the

RFC 1006 protocol stack is installed, select 2.Figure 6-3 shows the process of

network addressing.

SNPA：Subnetwork Point of Attachment

Figure 6-3 Selector and network addressing

2) Check whether the peer end is accessible.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-14

#cd /opt/SUNWconn/osinet/bin

#./osi_ping -n 4980ed0f2d01

If the peer end is accessible, 4980ed0f2d01 is alive is displayed. 4980ed0f2d01 is theNSAP of the FTAM peer. Make sure the computer where 4980ed0f2d01 is located is

started and FTAM is running normally when you run the command.

3) Test whether a Partner is available.


#./osiftam

osiftam>open entry1 -n username -p password

If login is successful, osiftam prompts the information below.

connection established

recovery available

Entry1 is the FTAM Partner name.

-n is followed by the user name.

-p is followed by the login password.

After login is successful, you can use the commands like dir , get, and put to test

whether you can interact with the FTAM Partner. For usage of the commands, refer to

6.3.5 “Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0”.

Note:

Solstice FTAM 9.0 provides you with a graphical tool, ftamtool, to configure the FTAM

parameters. The functions provided by this tool are the same as those of the rdb

command in osiftam. The user usually logs in to a UNIX workstation by Telnet to set the

parameters, and the ftamtool is not always usable, so the ftamtool usage is not

introduced in this section.

6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands

1) Set up a FTAM connection.

#/opt/SUNWconn/ftam/bin/osiftam

osiftam>open entry -n username -p password

In this command, entry is the FTAM Partner name created with the rdb add command.

2) List the remote directories

osiftam>dir remotedir

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-15

Note:

Use the open command to connect with the peer end before this command is

executed.

3) Get a file from the remote end

osiftam>get remotefile localfile

Note:


executed.

4) Display the existing FTAM Partners

osiftam>rdb list

Note:

Do not connect with any Partner if this command is executed.

5) Modify the parameters of a Partner

osiftam>rdb change entry -p CFTR

then, the entry of P-SELECTOR is changed into FTR.

6) Display the all the parameters of a Partner

osiftam>rdb show entry

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part II System Installation (Netra 240)HUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 7 Installing CG9812 Server


7-1

Chapter 7 Installing CG9812 Server


This chapter introduces how to install the CG9812 server, including:


Installing Server Software

Upgrading Server

Rolling Back to Last Version

Note:

For parameter configuration, refer to Part III “Parameter Configuration and System

Commissioning”.


Typically, the CG9812 delivered to the site has finished the installation steps before and

including “Installing HA System Software”.

Check the following contents before installation.

7.2.1 Checking Hardware Connections

To check if all the hardware cables are properly connected, refer to 2.4 “Hardware

Connections”.

7.2.2 Checking System Software Installation

Note:

This section applies to the first installation of the server software. For upgrade

operations, skip this step.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-2

I. Check if Solaris 8 can be properly started

If you can log in by SC or Telnet, it indicates that Solaris 8 is properly started.

1) After Solaris is started, you can log in to the two hosts from the COM ports of otherterminals or SCs. For Netra 240, you can log in to its COM port by the PC hyper

terminal.

2) After Solaris is started, you can log in as root by FTP or Telnet.You can log in to

the hosts by the telnet igwb1 or igwb2. The default IP addresses are set in the

/etc/hosts file. For details, see Figure 7-1.

igwb1 default IP address

igwb2 default IP

CG9812 default floating IP

129.1.1.2 igwb2

129.2.1.2 igwb21

129.2.1.3 igwb23

129.1.1.1 igwb1

129.1.1.2 igwb11

129.1.1.3 igwb13

129.1.1.3 ha-igwb

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1

129.3.1.3 ha-igwb3

Figure 7-1 The /etc/hosts file in igwb1

For details about the /etc/hosts file, refer to Table 7-1. In Figure 7-1, the three different

lines indicate the interrelations between the local IPs and the floating IPs. For example,

the local IPs 129.1.1.1 and 129.1.1.2 correspond to the floating IP 129.1.1.3.

Table 7-1 Description for the /etc/hosts file

IPaddress

Logicalhost

Description Remarks

127.0.0.1 localhost

129.1.1.1 igwb1Local IP of bge0 for maintenancepurpose.

IP factory default forigwb1.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-3

IPaddress

Logicalhost

Description Remarks

129.2.1.1 igwb11Local IP of bge1. bge1and bge2 aremutually backed up, sharing thesame floating IP.

129.3.1.1 igwb13 Local IP of bge3.

129.1.1.2 igwb2Local IP of bge0 for maintenancepurpose.

129.2.1.2 igwb21Local IP of bge1. bge1and bge2 aremutually backed up, sharing thesame floating IP.

129.3.1.2 igwb23 Local IP of bge3.


129.1.1.3 ha-igwb

The floating IP of bge0. It is used to

connect the NMS and themaintenance console.

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1

Local IP of bge1. bge1and bge2 aremutually backed up, sharing thesame floating IP to connect withSGSN or GGSN.

129.3.1.3 ha-igwb3The floating IP of bge3. It is used toconnect with the billing center.

The three IP

addresses areexternal floating IPfactory defaults.

Note: The threefloating IPs are thesame for igwb1 andigwb2. They areenabled when theSCs are started.

129.1.1.11

igwb1-scThe IP address of the SC on igwb1.You log in to igwb1 through this IP.


129.1.1.12

igwb2-scThe IP address of the SC on igwb2.You log in to igwb2 through this IP.


129.1.1.13

3310-0 The IP used to manage 3310-0IP factory default for3310-0

129.1.1.14

3310-1 The IP used to manage 3310-1IP factory default for3310-1

II. Check if the two nodes can be switched over each other

For SUN Cluster3.0, to check whether the primary node and the secondary node can

be switched over each other, follow the steps below.

1) Log in to igwb1 or igwb2, run scstat | more to view the SC information, and you

may get the information below:

-- Cluster Nodes --

Node name Status

--------- ------

Cluster node: igwb1 Online (”online” indictes that igwb1

is a cluster member)

Cluster node: igwb2 Online (”online” indictes that igwb2

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-4

is a cluster member)

2) Make sure that both igwb1and igwb2 are cluster members.

3) You can only access the disk arrays on igwb1 or igwb2. Make sure the attached

directories for the disk arrays are correct.Log in to igwb1 or igwb2 through the SC or by Telnet, and run df -k command to view

the output information. Only on one of the two hosts, you can check the volume of the

disk array, including /var/frontsave, /var/backsave, /var/other, and /ha-igwb.

4) Run the command below on the host where you can view the volume of the disk

array:

#scswitch -S -h xxx (xxx for local node, such as igwb1)

Then, check the volume again. Now, you can only view the information on the other

node.

7.2.3 Installation Prerequisites

I. Make sure you have the right software version on hand.

II. Modify the IP addresses of igwb1 and igwb2

You can reset the IP addresses in the /etc/hosts files. Restart the computer after you

finish.

Caution:

After you modify the hosts’ files, make sure you also modify the IP addresses set in

the igwb.ini files. Otherwise, the CG9812 server cannot be started. The default

installation path for igwb.ini is /opt/igwb/config/ini.

For details on parameter configurations, refer to Part III “Parameter Configuration

and System Commissioning”.

1) For the floating IP addresses, modify them based on your actual configurations. If

the floating IP addresses are not in the same network segment, change the subnet

masks for igwb1 and igwb2 in the /etc/netmasks files. Restart the hosts to enable

the settings.

2) The maintenance IP addresses of igwb1 (129.1.1.1 by default) and igwb2

(129.1.1.2 by default) shall be set in the same network segment with the first

external floating IP (129.1.1.3 by default).

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-5

3) For other IP factory defaults of igwb1 and igwb2, if they are not in conflict with the

IP addresses configured in the current LAN, keep the factory defaults. Record if an

IP address needs to be modified.

4) bge1 and bge2 are mutually backed up, sharing the same floating IP. If bge1 isdisabled, bge2 is enabled; if bge2 is disabled, bge1 is enabled.

III. IP address configuration instance

The configuration instance is given below. Table 7-2 shows the onsite service floating

IP addresses.

Table 7-2 Onsite service floating IP planning

Network

adapter

Defaultfloating

IP

Onsite

floating IP

Function Remarks

bge0 129.1.1.3 10.11.5.30

Connect with theNMS and themaintenanceconsole

bge1 129.2.1.3 202.11.6.20Connect withSGSN or GGSN

Use the relatednetwork ports formultiple access points.

bge3 129.3.1.3 5.16.17.18Connect with thebilling center

1) IP addresses configured in /etc/hosts on igwb1:

129.1.1.1 igwb1 (This IP is for maintenance purpose. It can be changed into 10.11.5.1, which is in the sanme network

segment with 10.11.5.30.)

129.1.1.2 igwb11 (If it is not in conflict with the IPs set in the LAN, do not change it.)






129.1.1.3 ha-igwb (Change it into 10.11.5.30.)

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1 (Change it into 202.11.6.20.)


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-6

Caution:

The last three IP addresses are the external service floating IP addresses set by default.

They are configured with same values on igwb1 and igwb2. The floating IP addresses

will not be enabled untill the SC is started.

Restart the computer after you finish.

2) IP addresses configured in /etc/hosts on igwb2













7.2.4 Key Terminologies You Need to Know

Before installation, you need to know the following key terminologies:

I. Consolidation

Two or more partial bills are created when the GSN process a PDP call. Consolidation

is to consolidate these partial bills into one or more bills.

II. Sort

Sort the bills on the back disk. Two or more bill formats may be included in a bill

package. Currently, bills can be sorted based on the conditions below:

For R98 770, this bill format is compatible with R98 760 and can be only sorted by

RecordType.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-7

For R99 3a0, this format is compatible with R99 390 and R99 360, and can be

sorted by RecordType and ChargingCharacteristics.

For R4 440, this format can be sorted by RecordType and

ChargingCharacteristics. For RecordType, bills can be sorted by S-CDR, G-CDR, M-CDR, SMO-CDR, or

SMT-CDR.

For ChargingCharacteristics, bills can be sorted by Hot billing, Flat rate, Prepaid

service, or Normal billing.

III. Bill protocol versions

The bill protocol versions include R98, R99, and R4.

7.3 Installing Server Software1) Copy the server software installation files igwb_install.tar.gz, igwb_install.sh,

S99CGCfgMonitor , and sc30_script.tar to a specific directory on the workstation

or the client, and then transfer these files to the specific directory on igwb1 and

igwb2 by FTP. For FTP transfer modes and transfer destination paths, see

Table 7-3.

Table 7-3 Transfer installation files

Installation file FTP transfer mode FTP destination path

igwb_install.tar.gz Binary

sc30_script.tar Binary

igwb_install.sh ASCII

igwb_rollback.sh ASCII

The /opt directory on igwb1 andigwb2

S99CGCfgMonito ASCIIThe /etc/rc3.d directory on igwb1and gwb2

2) Log on to igwb1 as root. The root password is set to be root by default.

3) Go to the /etc/rc3.d directory and execute the commands below:

# cd /etc/rc3.d

# chmod 755 *

4) Go to the /opt directory and run the command below to begin the setup process.

# cd /opt

# sh ./igwb_install.sh

Select the language to be installed

The following information is displayed. Enter c for Chinese, and e for English.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-8

Select the language to be installed ( Chinese or English ), [c/e]:

Continue the setup process.

Select the bill protocol version:

1) --- R98 V7.7.0

2) --- R99 V3.a.0

3) --- R4 V4.4.0

Please select the installed product :

Select the proper version.

Decide if bill consolidation is supported

The installation wizard prompt if bill consolidation is supported by this version. If

consolidation is supported, enter y; if not, enter n.

Select the installed version. Consolidation or not , [y/n]:

Select sort type.

1) --- Without sort

2) --- Sort by record-type

3) --- Sort by ChargingCharacteristics


When the installation is complete, the following information is displayed:

Install Complete,Please make certain that igwb.ini is correct.

5) Go to the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory. Open and configure the igwb.ini file withthe vi tool.

#cd /opt/igwb/config/ini

#vi igwb.ini

Note:

For parameter configurations in igwb.ini, refer to Part III “Parameter Configuration and

System Commissioning”. Save the igwb.ini file after you finish. Close the vi program.

6) Repeat the step 1)–5) on igwb2.

7) Run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to start the igwbapp service and

run the related program.

#scswitch -e -j igwbapp

8) Then, run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to backup the version of the

server application:

# cd /opt

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-9

# sh ./igwb_rollback.sh

Then the following information will appear:

0) Exit exit the script

1) Backup version backup

2) Rollback version rollback

Please enter the number of the operation from the menu :

Select 1 to backup software release. When release backup is finished the following

information will appear:

Backup now ! Please wait ..

Backup complete !

7.4 Upgrading Server

The upgrade can be a general upgrade or a special upgrade.

General upgrade. Bill formats and product version are not essentially changed.

Special upgrade. Bill formats and product version are essentially changed

7.4.1 General Upgrade

To perform a general upgrade, follow the steps below. During the process, services will

not be interrupted, except the switchover interval.

1) Log in to igwb1 and igwb2 by Telnet.

2) Run the commands below to back up product version on igwb1 and igwb2.

# cd /opt







Select 1 to back up the version. Backup is complete if the following information is

displayed.

Backup now ! Please wait ...

Backup complete !

3) Run the commands below to back up igwb.ini on igwb1 and igwb2.

# cp /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini /opt/igwb.bak

4) Copy the new version igwb_install.tar.gz and igwb_install.sh to a specific

directory on the maintenance terminal, and then transfer igwb _ install.tar.gz (in

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-10

binary mode) and igwb_install.sh (in ASCII mode) to the destination /opt

directory on igwb1 and igwb2.

5) Run the command below to check the resources are controlled by igwb1 or igwb2.

# ps -ef |grep proc

6) Check if the processes are started, including cls_proc, om_proc, knl_proc, and

ap_proc.

7) If the above processes are started, then the related node controls the resources

and is activated to provide the application services.

8) Suppose igwb1 controls the resources. On igwb2, perform the operations below:

Go to the /opt directory and install the server software.

# cd /opt


Select the language

The following information is displayed. Enter c for Chinese, and enter e for English.

Select the language to be installed ( Chinese or English ), [c/e]:


Select the bill protocol version.

1) --- R98 V7.7.0

2) --- R99 V3.a.0

3) --- R4 V4.4.0



Decide if bill consolidation is supported

The installation wizard prompt if bill consolidation is supported by this

version. If consolidation is supported, enter y; if not, enter n.

Select the installed version , Consolidation or not , [y/n]:

Select sort type.

1) --- Without sort

2) --- Sort by record-type

3) --- Sort by ChargingCharacteristics




9) Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb2 or the client to switch the server from

the primary node to the secondary node.

# scswitch -S -h xxx (xxx for source node, such as igwb1)

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-11

10) After a few minutes, check if the processes runs properly on the upgraded node

(igwb2).

11) Run the ps -ef | grep _proc command on igwb2. You may see the similar

information displayed below:root 2188 2182 0 09:27:33 ? 0:01 ./cls_proc

root 2195 2188 0 09:27:34 ? 0:02 knl_proc

root 2196 2195 0 09:27:35 ? 0:01 ./om_proc

root 2197 2195 1 09:27:35 ? 11:30 ./ap_proc 1

If you see the above processes, the upgrade is successful.

Note:

If the installation is successful, go on with the steps below. If not, stop the upgrade

process, and then ask for technical support. If the problem cannot be solved, make

sure to roll back to the last version. For details, refer to 7.5 “Rolling Back to Last

“ Version.

Repeat steps 8) to upgrade igwb1

12) Run the commands below to back up the product version on igwb1 and igwb2.

# cd /opt






Please enter the number of the operation from the menu:


displayed.


Backup complete !

7.4.2 Special Upgrade

Follow the steps below to perform a special upgrade. Note that the services can be

interrupted during the upgrade process.

1) Run the auxiliary upgrade command on the client.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-12

Note:

For auxiliary upgrade on the client, refer to Part IV. You can continue the upgrade

process only if the auxiliary upgrade is executed successfully.

2) Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb2 to stop the igwbapp service and

related application.

# scswitch -n -j igwbapp

Caution:

The following steps 3)–6) must be performed on igwb1 and igwb2, and only if these

steps are finished, you can continue the upgrade process.

3) Go to the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory to back up the igwb.ini file.

# cd /opt/igwb/config/ini

# cp igwb.ini /opt/igwb.bak

Caution:

You may need to reset igwb.ini.


directory on the maintenance terminal, and then transfer igwb_ install.tar.gz (in

binary mode) and igwb_install.sh (in ASCII mode) to the destination /optdirectory on igwb1 and igwb2.

5) Run the commands below to install the software on igwb1 and igwb2.

# cd /opt


6) Select the options as required if prompted. If different options are selected in

pre-installation, make sure you reset the igwb.ini file and ignore step 6.

7) Go to the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory to restore the igwb.ini file you back up.


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-13

# cp /opt/igwb.bak igwb.ini

8) Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb2 to start the igwbapp service.

# scswitch -e -j igwbapp

9) After a few minutes, check if the processes run properly on the upgraded node.

Run the ps -ef | grep _proc command on igwb1 and igwb2. You may see the

similar information below is only displayed on one node.

root 2188 2182 0 09:27:33 ? 0:01 ./cls_proc

root 2195 2188 0 09:27:34 ? 0:02 knl_proc

root 2196 2195 0 09:27:35 ? 0:01 ./om_proc

root 2197 2195 1 09:27:35 ? 11:30 ./ap_proc 1


7.5 Rolling Back to Last Version

Rollback is needed if update fails. Follows the steps below to perform the rollback

operation. Note that you can roll back only to the version before this upgrade.

1) Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb1 to stop the igwbapp and the related

application.

#scswitch -n -j igwbapp

2) Run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to roll back the last version:

# cd /opt







Select 2 to roll back the version. The information below is displayed:

Are you sure to roll back the version (yes or no ), [y/n]:

Enter y. Rollback is complete if the following information is displayed.

Roll back now. Please wait ...

Roll back complete. Please make certain that igwb.ini is correct.

3) Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb1 to start the igwbapp service and the



7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part II System Installation (Netra 240)HUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 8 Installing CG9812 Client


8-1

Chapter 8 Installing CG9812 Client


This chapter introduces how to install the CG9812 client, including:

Installing Client Software

Upgrading Client

Checking Client Software

8.2 Installing Client Software

1) Copy the Client setup directory in the installation CD to a directory on the client.

Double-click \Client\SETUP.EXE. The Choose Setup Language dialog box is


Figure 8-1 Choose Setup Language interface

2) Select your desired language, and then click OK. Then, the Welcome dialog box

is displayed. See Figure 8-2.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-3

4) Click Yes to accept all the terms in the agreement. The User Information dialog

box is displayed. See Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 User Information interface

5) Enter the user name and company, and then click Next. The Select Program

Folder dialog box is displayed. See Figure 8-5.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-4

Figure 8-5 Select Program Folder interface

6) Click Next. The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed. See

Figure 8-6.

Figure 8-6 Choose Destination Location interface

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-5

7) To change the destination installation directory, click Browse to select your

desired directory. It is recommended to use the default directory. Click Next to

continue. The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed. In the box, your

settings are displayed. See Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7 Start Copying Files interface

8) Click Next to copy files. Then, the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed. See

Figure 8-8.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-6

Figure 8-8 Setup Complete interface

9) Click Finish. The CG9812 client is installed.

8.3 Upgrading Client

1) Before upgrade, check the OS in use.

For Windows XP, back up the C:\windows\uiconfig.ini file.

For Windows 2000, back up the C:\winnt\uiconfig.ini file.

2) Select Start/Programs/iGateway Bill V200 Client/Uninstall System. The

Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed.

3) Click Yes. The Remove Programs From Your Computer dialog box is displayed.

See Figure 8-9.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-7

Figure 8-9 Remove Programs From Your Computer

4) The following dialog box is displayed. See Figure 8-10.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-8

Figure 8-10 Uninstall complete

5) Click OK.

6) Reinstall the client as described in 8.2 “Installing Client Software”.

7) Overwrite the uiconfig.ini file in the system directory with the backup one.

For Windows XP, overwrite the C:\windows\uiconfig.ini file.

For Windows 2000, overwrite the C:\winnt\uiconfig.ini file.

The client is successfully upgraded.

8.4 Checking Client Software

To check if all the components are installed, follow the steps below:

In Windows 2000 or Windows XP, select Start/Programs/iGateway Bill V200 Client

to show the client components.

The client software includes the following components:

Help

iGWB Client

Uninstall System

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



HUAWEI


Part II System Installation (Netra

20)

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Installation Overview................................................................................................... 1-1


1.2 Installation Flow................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart............................................................................................. 1-1

1.2.2 Installation Time Planning....................................................................................... 1-2


1.3.1 Hardware Preparations ........................................................................................... 1-3

1.3.2 Software Preparations............................................................................................. 1-5

1.4 Resource Planning ............................................................................................................ 1-6

1.4.1 HA System Planning ............................................................................................... 1-6

1.4.2 IP Address Planning................................................................................................ 1-7

1.4.3 Disk Space Planning............................................................................................... 1-8

Chapter 2 Installing Hardware...................................................................................................... 2-1


2.2 Cabinet Configuration........................................................................................................ 2-1

2.3 Hardware Description ........................................................................................................ 2-2

2.3.1 Introduction to Sun Netra 20 ................................................................................... 2-2

2.3.2 Introduction to Sun StorEdge 3310 Disk Array ....................................................... 2-5

2.3.3 Introduction to TC.................................................................................................... 2-6

2.3.4 Introduction to Quidway S3526 LAN Switch ........................................................... 2-7

2.4 Hardware Connections ...................................................................................................... 2-7

2.4.1 Host Hardware Planning ......................................................................................... 2-7

2.4.2 Disk Array Hardware Planning................................................................................ 2-8

2.4.3 Hardware Connections............................................................................................ 2-8

2.4.4 Description for Cable Connections........................................................................ 2-11

2.4.5 Hardware Power-on .............................................................................................. 2-14

Chapter 3 Configuring TC, Disk Array, and Netra 20................................................................. 3-1


3.2 Configuring TC................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2.1 Introduction to TC.................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2.2 Configuring TC ........................................................................................................ 3-1

3.3 Configuring Disk Array....................................................................................................... 3-2

3.4 Configuring Netra 20........................................................................................................ 3-26

Chapter 4 Installing and Configuring Solaris ............................................................................. 4-1


4.2 Installing Solaris 8.............................................................................................................. 4-1

4.2.1 Connecting Consoles of Host.................................................................................. 4-1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




ii

4.2.2 Installing Solaris 8................................................................................................... 4-1

4.3 Installing Solaris Patches................................................................................................... 4-9

4.3.1 Installing Patch Tools .............................................................................................. 4-9

4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch....................................................................................... 4-12

4.3.3 Installing SAN Patches.......................................................................................... 4-12

4.3.4 Installing SCSI Card Driver ...................................................................................4-13

4.3.5 Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch......................................................................... 4-14

4.4 Configuring Solaris .......................................................................................................... 4-15

4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files............................................................................. 4-15

4.4.2 Creating Network Adapter Configuration Files...................................................... 4-16

4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root...........................................................................4-17

4.4.4 Configuring FTP Login for root.............................................................................. 4-17

4.4.5 Executing the .profile File...................................................................................... 4-17

4.4.6 Modifying the /kernel/drv/sd.conf File ................................................................... 4-17

4.4.7 Modifying the /etc/system File............................................................................... 4-18

4.4.8 Restarting the Hosts.............................................................................................. 4-18

4.5 Installing Utilities .............................................................................................................. 4-18

4.5.1 Installing the TOP Software .................................................................................. 4-18

4.5.2 Installing the VTS Software................................................................................... 4-19

Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software................................................................................... 5-1



5.2.1 Checking the /etc/hosts File.................................................................................... 5-1

5.2.2 Checking Configurations of the hostname Network Adapters ................................ 5-2

5.2.3 Checking the /etc/default/login File ......................................................................... 5-3

5.2.4 Cleaning Out Device Data....................................................................................... 5-3

5.3 Installing Sun Cluster 3.0................................................................................................... 5-3

5.3.1 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb1........................................................ 5-3

5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb2........................................................ 5-7

5.3.3 Configuring the Quorum Device.............................................................................. 5-9

5.3.4 Checking the Status of the Cluster Nodes............................................................ 5-10

5.4 Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5.............................................................. 5-11

5.4.1 Installing Volume Manager.................................................................................... 5-12

5.4.2 Installing Volume Manager Patches...................................................................... 5-12

5.4.3 Modifying Disk Management Parameters ............................................................. 5-13

5.4.4 Checking the Installation....................................................................................... 5-14

5.5 Entering Volume Manager Licenses................................................................................ 5-14

5.5.1 Checking Hostid ....................................................................................................5-14

5.5.2 Checking If the License Is Permanent .................................................................. 5-15

5.5.3 Entering the Permanent License........................................................................... 5-15

5.5.4 Checking If the License Is Correctly Entered........................................................ 5-16

5.6 Configuring HA System Parameters................................................................................ 5-16

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




iii

5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk ...............................................................................................5-16

5.6.2 Creating the igwbdg Resource Group................................................................... 5-17

5.6.3 Configuring NAFO................................................................................................. 5-22

5.6.4 Registering the igwbrg Resource Group............................................................... 5-22

5.6.5 Installing igwb Monitor Script ................................................................................5-23

5.6.6 Checking the Configuration................................................................................... 5-23

Chapter 6 Installing Billing Interface........................................................................................... 6-1


6.2 Installing FTP..................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.3 Installing FTAM.................................................................................................................. 6-1

6.3.1 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0........................................................................... 6-1

6.3.2 Installation Preparations.......................................................................................... 6-2

6.3.3 Installation Steps..................................................................................................... 6-3

6.3.4 Configuring Parameters ........................................................................................ 6-10

6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands ..................................................... 6-13

Chapter 7 Installing CG9812 Server ............................................................................................ 7-1



7.2.1 Checking Hardware Connections............................................................................ 7-1

7.2.2 Checking System Software Installation................................................................... 7-1

7.2.3 Installation Prerequisites......................................................................................... 7-4

7.2.4 Key Terminologies You Need to Know ................................................................... 7-6

7.3 Installing Server Software.................................................................................................. 7-7

7.4 Upgrading Server............................................................................................................... 7-9

7.4.1 General Upgrade..................................................................................................... 7-9

7.4.2 Special Upgrade.................................................................................................... 7-11

7.5 Rolling Back to Last Version............................................................................................7-13

Chapter 8 Installing CG9812 Client.............................................................................................. 8-1


8.2 Installing Client Software ................................................................................................... 8-1

8.3 Upgrading Client ................................................................................................................ 8-6

8.4 Checking Client Software .................................................................................................. 8-8

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-1

Chapter 1 Installation Overview


The CG9812 system uses Solaris as the operating system (OS), Veritas Volume

Manager as the disk management software, and high-availability (HA) SUN Cluster of

as the system management software.

This chapter introduces the contents below:

Installation Flow


Resource Planning

1.2 Installation Flow

This section introduces the installation steps and time planning.

1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart

Figure 1-1 shows the overall installation flow of the CG9812 server.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-2

Plan hardware, software, and

system resources

Install Hardware

Install Solaris, Cluster, VM, and

related patches

Partition disk space

Map system disk


server software


client software

Check installation

Install billing interface (optional)

Finish installation

Begin Installation

Configure SCs and disk arrays

Figure 1-1 Installation flow chart

1.2.2 Installation Time Planning

It is estimated to take eight hours to install the CG9812 system. For details, see

Table 1-1.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-3

Table 1-1 Time planning

Task No. Task description Estimated time(hour)

1 Installing hardware 0.5

2 Configuring hardware parameters 0.5

3 Installing Solaris (with two sets of CDs) 1

4Installing Solaris patches (with two sets of

CDs)1.5

5 Installing SUN Cluster 0.5

6 Configuring SUN Cluster 0.5

7 Installing VxVM 1

8 Configuring VxVM 2

9 Installing CG9812 software 0.4

10 Checking installation 0.2


This section introduces hardware and software preparations before the CG9812 is

installed.

1.3.1 Hardware Preparations

The CG9812 uses the SUN Netra 20 minicomputers and the SUN StorEdge 3310 disk

arrays as its main hardware. The required hardware is given below:

Two Netra 20 minicomputers with the same configurations

Two StorEdge 3310 disk arrays with the same configurations

A terminal concentrator (TC)

Two S3526 LAN Switches with the same configurations

At least one PC console or SUN workstation as the operation terminal for

software installation and routine maintenance

For detailed hardware configuration, see Table 1-2.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-4

Table 1-2 Hardware configuration

Item Configuration

CPU 2*1.20 GHz

Memory 2 GB

Hard disk 2*73 GB

Network Adapter

1) One 4-port external network adapter.

The four ports are qfe0, qfe 1, qfe 2 and

qfe 3. This adapter is used to connect

the public network for application

purposes. qfe1 and qfe2 serve as NAFO

links.

2) One 1-port built-in network adapter eri0

as heartbeat link.

3) One 1-port external network adapter

hme0 as heartbeat link.

DVD-ROM 1

Tape drive None

Netra 20

minicomputer

Power supply Dual DC power input

Capacity 5*36 GB

SCSI port 2.3310 disk array

Power supply Dual DC power input

Ethernet port 1

Serial port 4*Serial port(RJ-45)

Console port 1

TC

Power supply Single DC power input

Ethernet port 24Quidway S3526

LAN Switch Power supply Single DC power input

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-5

1.3.2 Software Preparations

I. Description of the host system

The CG9812 uses the Netra 20 minicomputers with the SUN Cluster software. TheSun Cluster is cluster software with high availability (HA). In SUN Cluster, two or more

hosts are organized over various networks into a cluster, and each host is called a

node.

II. Software configuration

Table 1-3 shows the software configuration of the CG9812.

Table 1-3 Software configuration

Type Item Configuration

Solaris 8 (02/04 SPARC Platform)Operating system

Solaris Patch

Cluster software SUN Cluster 3.0

System

software

Disk management

softwareVeritas Volume Manager 3.5 with License.

Billing interface

software (optional)

Vertel UTS-FTAM installation software

(Solaris version)

Applications

CG9812 applications

Server: CG9812 V200R002 Server (in

Solaris with SC agent script)

Client: CG9812 V200R002 Client (in

Windows

III. Schematic of software installation

The OS, the cluster software, the disk management software, the billing interface

software (optional), and the CG9812 server software are installed on the local disk.

The original bills, final bills, logs, and alarms are stored on the shared disk. See

Figure 1-2.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-6

igwbdg (original blls, final bills, logs, and alarms)

SUN OS

Volume Manager

SUN Cluster

SUN OS

Volume Manager

SUN Cluster

MirroringMirroring

igwb1 igwb2

FTP/FTAM(optional)

CG9812 Server

FTP/FTAM(optional)

CG 9812 Server

igwbdg (original bills, final bills, logs, and alarms)

3310-0

3310-1

Figure 1-2 Software installation schematic

1.4 Resource Planning

Resource planning must be done before the software installation, including:

HA System Planning

IP Address Planning

Disk Space Planning

1.4.1 HA System Planning

Table 1-4 shows the planning for the HA system components.

Table 1-4 HA system planning


Cluster Name sc-igwb sc-igwb

Cluster Node igwb1 igwb2

Transport path 1 hme0 hme0

Transport path 2 eri0 eri0

NAFO Group 0 qfe0 qfe0

NAFO Group 1 qfe1/qfe2 qfe1/qfe2

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-7


NAFO Group 2 qfe3 qfe3

Quorum Device d4 d4

1.4.2 IP Address Planning

The CG9812 uses SUN Cluster 3.0 as the cluster management software. It is

configured with two types of IP addresses, including the fixed IP and the floating IP.

Currently, the CG9812 is configured with ten fixed IPs and three floating IPs. Each

node of the CG9812 uses three fixed IPs. Each disk array is configured with one IP.

One fixed IP is for the TC. One fixed IP address is for the maintenance terminal. And

three floating IPs are used for the CG9812 to connect with the external communication

devices. For details, see below:

In SUN Cluster, the heartbeat IP is automatically set by the system.

In configuration, the Netra 20 is provided with a 4-port built-in network adapter,

which is used to connect the public network for application purposes. The four

ports are qre0, qre1, qfe2, and qre3. qre1 and qre2 serve as the NAFO links. Also,

a 1-port built-in network adapter eri0 and a 1-port external network adapter hme0

serve as the heartbeat links.

The float IPs and the fixed IPs are set in the same network segment.

Below is an example of the IP configuration. See Table 1-5 and Table 1-6.

Table 1-5 IP address planning

Device

Fixed IPs of the

primary node

(logical host name)

Fixed IPs of the

secondary node

(logical host name)

Float IP (logical

host name)Description

qfe0 129.1.1.1(igwb1)129.1.1.2

(igwb2)

129.1.1.3

(ha-igwb)

Connect with the

NMS and the

maintenanceconsole.

qfe1/qfe2 129.2.1.1(igwb11)129.2.1.2

(igwb21)

129.2.1.3

(ha-igwb1)

Connect with the

SGSN or the

GGSN.

qfe3 129.3.1.1(igwb12)129.3.1.2

(igwb22)

129.3.1.3

(ha-igwb2)

Connect with the

billing center.

eri0 Not required Not required - Heartbeat link 1.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-8

Device

Fixed IPs of the

primary node

(logical host name)

Fixed IPs of the

secondary node

(logical host name)

Float IP (logical

host name)Description

hme0 Not required Not required - Heartbeat link 2.

Table 1-6 Table 1-6 Planning for other IP addresses

Device IP address (logical host name) function

PC

Maintenance

terminal

129.1.1.4(admin)

Connect with the TC COM

port through the serial port

of the PC hyper terminal.

TC 129.1.1.5 IP of TC.

3310-0 129.1.1.6 Manageable IP of 3310-0.

3310-1 129.1.1.7 Manageable IP of 3310-1.

1.4.3 Disk Space Planning

I. Local disk space planning

The section describes the general principles for hard disk space planning. Hard disk

planning varies with hardware configurations.

Each Netra 20 is provided with two built-in hard disks, and each disk is 73 GB in size.

These two hard disks are configured in RAID1 mirror mode. Therefore, the available

space of each hard disk is equal to the space of a single disk. The main partitions of

the built-in hard disk of Netra 20 are described below:

1) Root Directory

Allocate sufficient disk space to the root directory since its size cannot be changed

with the UNIX commands. The type of the root file system is User File System (UFS).

2) SWAP

The required disk space for SWAP depends on the size of the host memory and the

expected maximum memory size. In short, the space of SWAP and the host memory

decides the maximum available memory. The size of SWAP shall be at least 1.5 times

larger than the physical memory. According to the disk capacity and its expansion

requirements, the SWAP is set to 10 GB.

3) /globaldevices

This is the global device partition with 500 MB. It is used by the VxVM.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-9

The recommended system planning is shown in Table 1-7.

Table 1-7 Local disk planning

Slice Number* Mount point Size Description

c1t0d0s0 / 57 GB Root.

c1t0d0s1 swap 10 GB SWAP.

c1t0d0s2 Overlap 68.35GB

The size of the whole hard disk,

which may be different from the

actual number displayed.

Note: Do not change this partition.

c1t0d0s3 - -

This is reserved to encapsulate the

Volume Manager.

Note: This partition must be

reserved.

c1t0d0s4 - -

This is reserved to encapsulate the

Volume Manager.

Note: This partition must be

reserved.

c1t0d0s5 - - -

c1t0d0s6/globaldevice

s512MB This is used to install SUN Cluster.

c1t0d0s7 - - -

II. Disk array planning

Each StorEdge 3310 is configured with five 73 GB hard disks set in RAID5+HotSpare

mode. Two Sun StorEdge 3310 are set to RAID1, which is partitioned into LUN0 andLUN1. 100 MB is allocated to LUN0 for the Quorum device, while 103,328 MB is

allocated to LUN1 to store data of the CG9812, including original bills, final bills, logs,

and alarms. Table 1-8 shows the planning for a disk group. For logical volume

partitioning on LUN1, see Table 1-9.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-10

1) Disk group partitioning

Table 1-8 Disk group partitioning

Groupname

Allocated harddisk

Hotspare harddisk

Host Description

rootdg Hard disk of igwb1 None igwb1 Rootdg of igwb1

rootdg Hard disk of igwb2 None igwb2 Rootdg of igwb2

igwbdg LUN1 in 3310 None igwb1/igwb2Shared disk

group

2) Logical volume partitioning

Table 1-9 Logical volume partitioning

Disk

group

Disk

(disk

used for

mirror)

Logical

volume

name

Logical

volume

size

Mount point Function

igwbdg-stat 100MB - Fixed size.

log-alarm 4GB /var/other

Fixed size. This

volume is used to

store the log and

alarm data.igwbdg

c2t0d1

c3t0d1

front 48GB /var/frontsave

The actual size.

This volume stores

final bills.

Hard disks in 3310 disk arrays are shown in Figure 1-3.

789

101112

3310-0c2t11d0

c2t12d0

c2t8d0

c2t9d0

c2t10d0

789

101112

3310-1c3t11d0

c3t12d0

c3t8d0

c3t9d0

c3t10d0

Figure 1-3 Hard disks in 3310 disk arrays

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part II System Installation (Netra 20)HUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 2 Installing Hardware


2-1

Chapter 2 Installing Hardware


This chapter introduces how to install the main hardware of the CG9812 HA system

and how the cables are connected. Before you perform these operations, make sure

the cabinet and its internal devices are installed.

This chapter includes the contents below:

Cabinet Configuration

Hardware Description

Hardware Connections

2.2 Cabinet Configuration

The CG9812 server uses the N68-22 cabinet. To configure the cabinet, see

Figure 2-1.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-2

CG9812 Cabinet


Quidway S3526-1 (1U)Cabling frame (1U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)






SUN Netra 20-1 (4U)


SUN Netra 20-0 (4U)

Quidway S3526-0 (1U)Cabling frame (1U)

42U

TC (1U)Non-standard dummy panel (1U)

Figure 2-1 Cabinet configuration

The internal devices include two Netra 20 minicomputers, two StorEdge 3310 disk

arrays, and two Quidway 3528G LAN Switches.

2.3 Hardware Description

For hardware configuration, refer to 1.3.1 “Hardware Preparations”. The CG9812

uses two HA severs as the two nodes of the Cluster. This section introduces the Netra

20, the StorEdge 3310 disk array, and the TC.

2.3.1 Introduction to Sun Netra 20

I. Configuration and ambient indices

Table 2-1 shows the configuration, ambient indices, and physical spec for the Netra 20

minicomputer.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-3

Table 2-1 Sun Netra 20

Configuration index Value

CPU 2*1.20 GHz (8M Cache)

Memory 2 GB

Hard disk 2*73 GB

Ambient index

parametervalue

AC90–264 VAC, 47 Hz – 63 Hz. The maximum input

power is 550 W (AC).Power

supply DC –48 – –60 VDC. The maximum input power is 570 W(DC).

Running0°C – 40°C (32°F–104°F) (AC)

–5°C – +45°C(23°F – 113°F) (DC)temperature

Storage –40°C – +70°C (–40°F – 158°F)

Running10%–90%, non-condensation (AC)

5%–93%, non-condensation (DC)Humidity

Storage 5%–93%, non-condensation

Physical spec index Value

Height 87.4 mm (3.44in, 2U)

Width 425.0 mm (16.73in)

Depth 508.0 mm (21in)

Weight 18.6 kg (41 pounds)

II. Front view of Netra 20

The front view of Sun Netra 20 is shown in Figure 2-2.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-4

Figure 2-2 Front view of Sun Netra 20

III. Back view of Netra 20

The back view of Sun Netra 20 is shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Back view of Sun Netra 20

Netra 20 is provided with the following interfaces:

One 4-port external network adapter. The four ports are qfe0, qfe 1, qfe 2 and qfe

3. This adapter is used to connect with the public network for application

purposes. qfe1 and qfe2 serve as Network Adapter Failover (NAFO) links.

One 1-port built-in network adapter eri0 as heartbeat link.

One 1-port external network adapter hme0 as heartbeat link.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-5

Two PCI Ultra SCSI HostAdapter cards, which are used to connect with the 3310

disk arrays.

2.3.2 Introduction to Sun StorEdge 3310 Disk Array

The universal StorEdge 3310 disk array is a thin, high-density, modular storage

system, which is specially designed for high availability purpose. The 12-drive disk

array can efficiently use the disk space, store the information with hundreds of gigabits,

and support one or two RAID controllers, 128 LUNs, and multiple host connections.

The StorEdge 3310 disk array has the following features:

Each support is provided with the capacity up to 3.6 TB.

RAID based hardware or software.

Redundant components.

2U 12-drive outline dimension.

I. Front view of 3310

The front view of 3310 is shown in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Front view of StorEdge 3310 disk array

Note:

Typically, five hard disks are inserted into the slots 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 for each disk

array. To add more disks, insert one into slot 12 first, and then slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6

sequentially.

II. Back view of StorEdge 3310

The back view of StorEdge 3310 is shown in Figure 2-5.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-6

Figure 2-5 Back view of StorEdge 3310 disk array

2.3.3 Introduction to TC

I. The front view of TC

The front view of TC is shown in Figure 2-6.

Figure 2-6 The front view of TC

II. The back view of TC

The front view of TC is shown in Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7 The back view of TC

Note:

This is the front view and back view of AlterPath ACS4. For the actual TC, refer to the

packing list came with the product.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-7

2.3.4 Introduction to Quidway S3526 LAN Switch

The Quidway S3526 LAN Switch provides twenty-four 10Base-T/100Base-TX

Ethernet ports.

Figure 2-8 shows the front panel of the Quidway S3526.

Quidway S 3 526

Power supply indicator Console Interface

Figure 2-8 Front view of Quidway S3526

The twenty-four ports of the S3526 are arranged as shown in Table 2-2 (front view).In

the arrangement, there are the power supply indicator and twenty-four fixed

10/100Base-TX Ethernet ports with the Console interface. Each 10/100Base-TX port

can be used for subtending. The Ethernet ports are standard RJ-45 connectors.

Table 2-2 24 Ethernet ports for S3526

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23

Note:

For more information about LAN Switch, refer to Quidway S3528 Series LAN Switch

Installation Manual .

2.4 Hardware Connections

This section introduces how to connect the internal hardware in the cabinet of the

CG9812.

2.4.1 Host Hardware Planning

Table 2-3 shows the model and components of the host.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-8

Table 2-3 Model and components of the host (Netra 20)

Server model Netra 20(DC) igwb1 and igwb2

I/O slot Purchase No. PN No.

1 X1034A 501-5406

2 X6758A 375-3057

3 X6758A 375-3057

4 X1033A 501-5019

2.4.2 Disk Array Hardware Planning

Table 2-4 shows the description of disk arrays.

Table 2-4 Description of disk array models (StorEdge 3310)

Disk array

model3310(J-DC)

Disk array

name3310-0 3310-1

Jumper switch

description

Connect with the CH0

and the Single Bus- -

Hard disk slots: Purchase No. PN No. Description

7-11 XTA-3310-36GB-10K 540-5522 36G 3310 hard disk

2.4.3 Hardware Connections

Make sure all the connections are accurate for the HA system, especially for the SCSI

cables. Wrong connections can cause fatal damage. Before the devices are

connected, make labels and attach them to both end of each cable. For details on

labels, see Table 2-5.

Table 2-5 Description for labeled cables

No.Connectio

n type

Source

device

Source

device

port

Destination

device

Destinati

on device

port

Remark

01100M

Ethernet host 1

qfe0 in

slot0 of

PCI1

NMS and

LMT-

Public

network

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-9

No.Connectio

n type

Source

device

Source

device

port

Destination

device

Destinati

on device

port

Remark

02100M

Ethernet Host 1

qfe1 in

slot1 of

PCI1

GSNLAN

Switch-0

Public

network

03100M

Ethernet host 1

qfe2 in

slot2 of

PCI1

GSNLAN

Switch-1

Public

network

04100M

Ethernet host 1

qfe3 in

slot3 of

PCI1

Billing

center (BC)-

Public

network

05100M

Ethernet host 2

qfe0 in

slot0 of

PCI1

NMS and

LMT-

Public

network

06100M

Ethernet host 2

qfe1 in

slot1 of

PCI1

GSNLAN

Switch-0

Public

network

07 100MEthernet

host 2

qfe2 in

slot1 of

PCI1

GSN LANSwitch-1

Publicnetwork

08100M

Ethernet host 2

qfe3 in

slot3 of

PCI1

BC -Public

network

09

100M

Ethernet

(crossover)

host 1 eri0 Host2

100M

built-in

port

Private

network

10

100M

Ethernet

(crossover)

host 1 hme0 Host2

Port in

slot0 of

PCI4

Private

network

11 SCSI host 1SCSI1 in

PCI33310-0 CH1 port -



7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-10

No.Connectio

n type

Source

device

Source

device

port

Destination

device

Destinati

on device

port

Remark





15 SCSI 3310-0 CH0 port 3310-0Single

Bus port-

16 SCSI 3310-1 CH0 port 3310-1Single

Bus port-

17COM port

cablehost 1

COM port

ATC 2# port

Manage

ment

18COM port

cablehost 2

COM port

ATC 3# port

Manage

ment

19/20100M

Ethernet 3310-0

Two

controller

ports

- -Manage

ment

21/22100M

Ethernet 3310-1

Two

controller

ports

- -Manage

ment

Note:

The connection of SCSI is shown in Figure 2-11.

Figure 2-9 shows the hardware connections on the CG9812 server.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-11

qfe0

qfe1

qfe2

qfe3

qfe0

qfe1

qfe2

qfe3

eri0 hme0 Alarms port

To LMT

and NMS

To GSN

To GSN

To BC

To LMT

and NMS

To GSN

To GSN

To BC

igwb2

igwb1

3310-0

3310-1

To TC

To TC

Private

network

Private

network

Figure 2-9 Connections between Sun Netra 20 and Sun StorEdge 3310

2.4.4 Description for Cable Connections

I. Connections between Netra 20 and LAN Switch

Two LAN Switches are configured in the cabinet of the CG9812. One is LAN Switch-0

(primary), and the other is LAN Switch-1 (secondary). The two qfe1 ports are

connected with LAN Switch-0, and the qfe2 ports are connected with LAN Switch-1

to communicate with the GSN. The LAN Switches to the NMS and the BC are not

configured in the cabinet. All cables are straight-thru cables.In early stage of the deployment, because the LAN Switches to the NMS and the BC

are not installed, the qfe0 and qfe3 ports of the dual system are connected to the LAN

Switches in the cabinet of the CG9812. Figure 2-10 shows the cable connections with

the LAN Switches.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-12

igwb1

qfe0

igwb2qfe0 igwb1\igwb2qfe2 igwb2qfe3

igwb1

qfe3

LAN Switch-1

Quidway S3526

LAN Switch-0

(2)

(3) (4) (5)

(1)

igwb1\igwb2

qfe1

Quidway S3526

(3) (4) (5)

Figure 2-10 LAN Switch cable connection

In Figure 2-10, each cable represents a virtual LAN (VLAN):

Cable (1) and cable (2) are used to couple two LAN Switches for subtending. Cable (3) is used by OM.

Cable (4) is used by Ga.

Cable (5) is used by BC.

Caution:

Dangling cables must be prohibited.

II. Connections between Netra 20 and TC

Connect the COM port A of the primary server with the 2# port of the TC, and connect

the COM port A of the secondary server with the 3# port of the TC to log in to the

primary server and secondary server remotely.

III. Connections between the primary server and the secondary server

Connect the external eri0 port of the primary server with eri0 of the secondary server.

Connect hme0 of the primary server with hme0 of the secondary server. These twoconnections serve as heartbeat links between the primary server and the secondary

server. All cables in use are straight-thru cables (crossover cables).

IV. Connections between Netra 20 and StorEdge 3310

Figure 2-11 shows the internal connections in the disk arrays.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-13

Figure 2-11 Connections for StorEdge 3310 disk arrays

Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI2 of the primary server with the CH1 port of the 3310-0

disk array. Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI1 of the primary server with the CH1 port of

the 3310-1 disk array.

Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI2 of the secondary server with the CH3 port of the

3310-0 disk array. Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI1 of the secondary server with the

CH3 port of the 3310-1 disk array.

Connect the CH0 port of 3310-0 with the Single Bus port of 3310-0. Connect the CH0

port of 3310-1 with the Single Bus port of 3310-1.

V. Connections between LAN switches

The LAN Switches on the primary server and the secondary server are subtended

through the ports. See Figure 2-10. All cables in use are crossover cables.

VI. Connections related to power cables and ground cables

For connections related to power cables and ground cables, follow the precautions

below:

Connect the PGND bar of the DC distribution cabinet securely with the nearest

PGND bar provided by the equipment buyer through the PGND bus. The PGND

cables are yellow-green plastic insulated copper wires with the same core

diameter as that of the power cables.

Label each power cable and ground cable before connection.

For Netra 20, connect the power cables and ground cables for the internal devices in

the CG9812 cabinet as indicated in Figure 2-12.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-14

LAN Switch-1

LAN Switch-0

3310-0

Netra 20-1

Netra 20-0

3310-1

TC

Figure 2-12 Connections of power/ground cables for devices in the CG9812 cabinet

(Netra 20)

2.4.5 Hardware Power-on

To power on the two Netra 20 minicomputers and the disk arrays, follow the sequence

below:

Disk arrays –> the upper minicomputer –> the lower minicomputer

The power-off sequence is opposite to the power-on sequence.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-15

Caution:

For the minicomputers and disk arrays, sudden power-off is prohibited on the

CG9812 server. Because after UNIX is suddenly powered off, it must be manually

maintained before it can run.

On the CG9812 server, do not restart the two minicomputers frequently.

It is recommended to power on the minicomputers after the disk arrays are

powered on for three minutes.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part II System Installation (Netra 20)HUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 3 Configuring TC, Disk Array, and Netra 20


3-1

Chapter 3 Configuring TC, Disk Array, and Netra

20


This chapter describes how to set the TC, disk arrays, and Netra 20, including:

Configuring TC

Configuring Disk Array

Configuring Netra 20

3.2 Configuring TC

3.2.1 Introduction to TC

The HA system does not include a video adapter or a display. It is configured with a TC

to transfer the control signals from the two hosts and display them on the monitor

console.

3.2.2 Configuring TC

I. Connect the TC with the console

Your console and your TC must be on the same physical LAN. You can connect one

RJ-45 cable from the Ethernet port of the TC to a spare port from the LAN Switch-0,

and another cable from another spare port of LAN Switch-0 to the console used to

manage the TC.

II. Add route pointing

From the console issue a command to add a route pointing to the IP address of the TC

(192.168.160.10) accessed through the console’s Ethernet interface.

route add 192.168.160.10 mask 255.255.255.0 <IP address of the console>

Example: if the console has IP address 192.168.160.1 the command would be:

route add 192.168.160.10 mask 255.255.255.0 192.168.160.1

III. Log in to TC

From the console issue the telnet command to log in to the TC. Enter root as the user

name and tslinux as password.

IV. Setting the Parameters

Type wiz and press Enter

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-2

A Configuration Wizard screen is displayed. You can set the parameters of the TC.

*********************************************

**C O N F I G U R A T I O N W I Z A R D**

*********************************************

INSTRUCTIONS for using the Wizard:

You can:

1) Enter the appropriate information for your system and press ENTER or

2) Press ENTER if you are satisfied with the value within the brackets

[] and want to go on to the next parameter or

3) Press ESC if you want to exit.

NOTE:For some paramters, if there is nothing within the brackets, it will

continue to ask for a value. In that case,you must enter a valid valur or #

if you do not wish to configure the calue.

Press ENTER to continue…

After you configure the parameters of TC, a confirmation screen is displayed.

Current configuration:

Hostname: TC

DHCP: disable

System IP:129.1.1.5

Domain name: #

Primary DNS Server: #

Gateway: #

Network Mask: 255.255.255.0

V. Save the setting

3.3 Configuring Disk Array

Note:

Name the two StorEdge 3310 disk arrays 3310-0 and 3310-1. Both of them need to be

configured.

I. Connect the administrative console and StorEdge 3310

Use a DB9–DB9 cable to connect COM port B of the maintenance terminal with the

COM port of the StorEdge 3310 disk array. See Figure 3-1.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-3

Figure 3-1 Connect the administrative console and StorEdge 3310

II. Set the parameters of COM port B of the console

Add the following statements to the /etc/remote file.

s3310:\

:dv=/dev/term/b:br#38400:el=^C^S^Q U^D:ie=%$:oe=^D:

III. Set IP address for StorEdge 3310

1) Power on StorEdge 3310, and tip to the disk array from the console.

#tip s3310

2) Press Ctrl + L to refresh the screen. The following information is displayed. see

Figure 3-2.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-4



main menu. See Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 Main menu in StorEdge 3310 configuration interface

4) Select View and edit Configuration parameters/Communication

Parameters/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)/LAN0/Set IP Address from the main

menu. The following interface appears. See Figure 3-4.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-5

Figure 3-4 Set IP address and subnet mask

5) Enter the IP address: 129.1.1.6 (3310-0), 129.1.1.7 (3310-1), and subnet mask:

255.255.0.0, and then press ESC. Note that the given values are for example

purposes only. See Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 StorEdge 3310 IP configuration interface

6) Click Yes to set the IP address. The following information is displayed. See

Figure 3-6.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-6

Figure 3-6 Reset StorEdge 3310 controller

7) Click Yes to reset the controller.

Note:

To set the IP addresses of StorEdge 3310, refer to Table 1-6, that is, set 3310-0 to

129.1.1.6, and 3310-1 to 129.1.1.7.

8) Log in to StorEdge 3310 after it is reset.

#telnet 129.1.1.6 (or 129.1.1.7)

Trying IP address of disk array...

Connected to IP address of disk array.

Escape character is ‘^>’.

The IP addresses are set if login is successful. Press Ctrl + L.

IV. Set SCSI channels for StorEdge 3310

1) The following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-7.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-7



main menu.

3) Select view and edit SCSI channels from the main menu. Configure the SCSI

channels as indicated in Figure 3-8. Press Esc to return to the main menu. Then,

click Yes to reset the controller.

Figure 3-8 Set SCSI channels

4) Log in to StorEdge 3310 disk array again after it is reset.

#telnet 129.1.1.6 (or 129.1.1.7)

Trying IP address of disk array...

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-8

Connected to IP address of disk array.

Escape character is ‘^>’.

Press <Ctrl + L>.

V. Set logical drives for StorEdge 3310

1) The following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-9.



main menu. See Figure 3-10.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-9

Figure 3-10 StorEdge 3310 Main menu

3) Select view and edit Logical drives from the main menu, and then press Enter

to configure the logical drive. See Figure 3-11.

Caution:

For a new disk, no logical disk is created. See Figure 3-11. Delete the existing logical

disks, if any. If LUN is mapped, you may fail to delete the logical disks. Unmap the

host LUN before you delete the logical disks.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-10


4) Select LG0, and then press Enter to continue. See Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Create logical drive

5) Click Yes, and then press Enter to continue. The following interface is displayed.

See Figure 3-13.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-11


6) Select RAID5, and press Enter to continue. Select the first four drives as RAID5

mirror disks. In the Slot column, an asterisk (*) is marked if a disk is selected. See

Figure 3-14


7) Press Esc for confirmation. The following interface is displayed. See

Figure 3-15.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-12


8) Select Assign Spare Drives, and then press Enter to select the HotSpare disks.

The following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-16.


9) Select all the rest disks as HotSpare drives. In the Slot column, an asterisk (*) is

marked if a disk is selected. Press Esc to confirm your selection. The following

interface is displayed. See Figure 3-17.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-13

Figure 3-17 Create logical drive

10) Click Yes, and then press Enter to create the logical drive. The process will take

about 70 minutes. Do not perform any other operation during the process. See

Figure 3-18.

Figure 3-18 create logical drive

11) If the process indicator disappears, see Figure 3-19, the RAID5 disk is created,

and you can go on with the next step. Press Ctrl + L to refresh the interface.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-14

Figure 3-19 Initialize RAID5 mirror disk

12) After RAID5 is finished initialization, press Esc twice. The following interface is





7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-15

Figure 3-21 Select partition

VI. Partition logical drive

1) Select Partition logical drive, and then press Enter to partition the logical disk.

2) The system then prompts Continue Partition Logical Drive? See Figure 3-22.

Click Yes, and then press Enter .


3) Press Enter . The following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-23.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-16


4) Enter 200 for partition0 in Partition Size (MB), and then press Enter . See

Figure 3-24.

Figure 3-24 Size of partition0


Enter .

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-17


6) Move to the second row, and then press Enter to allocate space for partition1.

7) Enter 103,228 in Partition Size (MB), and then press Enter . See Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26 Size of partition1


Enter to complete the partition.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-19

Figure 3-29 Select channel1

Caution:

Make sure CHL 1 is set to Primary Controller . If CHL1 ID 0 (Secondary Controller) is

displayed, delete this channel, and then add CHL 1 ID 0 (Primary Controller).

3) Select Logical Drive, and then press Enter . See Figure 3-30.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-20


4) Select row 0, and then press Enter to map the first LUN. See Figure 3-31.

Figure 3-31 Select the first LUN

5) Enter the logical drive selection interface. See Figure 3-32.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-24

Figure 3-38 Select logical partition

12) Select LUN 1, and then press Enter . The following interface is displayed. See

Figure 3-39.

Figure 3-39 Map LUN

13) Select Map Host LUN, and then press Enter . The following interface is displayed.

See Figure 3-40.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-25


14) Click Yes, and then press Enter .

15) Press Esc twice to return to the channel selection interface. See Figure 3-41.

Figure 3-41 Select channel 3

Note:

Map host LUN for CH3 in the same way.

16) Then, press Esc till the following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-42.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-27

I. Use a RJ45-DB25 serial port cable to connect the monitor console with Netra

20.

Figure 3-43 Connection schematic

Plug the RJ45 connector of the serial port cable into the monitor port of Netra 20, and

plug the DB25 connector into the port B of the monitor console. See Figure 3-43.

II. Edit the /etc/remote file.

Add the statements below to the end of /etc/remote on the monitor console.

netra20:\

:dv=/dev/term/b:br#9600:el=^C^S^Q U^D:ie=%$:oe=^D:

III. Connect with Netra 20.

Execute the command below on the monitor console.

#tip Netra 20

ok

Note:

<LOM> is displayed if Netra 20 is powered off. In this case, power on Netra 20, and

then the Ok prompt appears in about three minutes.

IV. Configure Netra 20

1) Set the standard output

ok setenv output-device ttya

2) Set the standard input.

ok setenv input-device ttya

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-28

3) Set the MAC address of the network adapter.

ok setenv local-mac-address? true

V. Restart Netra 20

ok reset-all

VI. Quit tip

~.

~

<EOT>

Note:

For hardware installation in a later section, Netra 20 must use ttya (not ttyb) to

connect with the TC. Otherwise, no output information is displayed when you log in to

Netra 20 from the TC.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-2

hosts (igwb1 and igwb2) concurrently. Make sure that the same parameters are

configured for the two hosts.

II. Operation steps

Step Description

1Insert the Solaris 8 System Software 1 of 2 CD into the CD-ROM of the

console.

2

Enter the OK state.

Method 1: If the workstation is not installed with UNIX, press Ctrl+] on the

console, type Send brk, and press Enter to show the ok prompt.

Method 2: If Solaris is installed, type halt as the user root to show the ok

prompt.

3Boot the host from the CD-ROM. Type boot cdrom after the OK prompt:

ok boot cdrom

4

Select English as installation language. See below:

Select a Language

0. English

1. French

…

9. Traditional Chinese


5

Select the locale. Select English. See below:

Select a Locale

0. English (C - 7-bit ASCII)

1. Albania (ISO8859-2)

…

18. Finland (ISO8859-15 - Euro)


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-4

Step Description

12

Enter the IP addresses. The IP address of igwb1 is 129.1.1.1, and that of

igwb2 is 129.1.1.2. See below:

IP address: 129.1.1.1 (129.1.1.2 for the Secondary node)

13

Select the subnet mask. Type Yes. The operation is as follows:

System part of a subnet

[X] Yes

[ ] No

14Set Net Mask. Enter 255.255.0.0. see below:

Netmask: 255.255.0.0

15

Determine whether to enable IPv6. Select No. see below:

Enable IPv6

[ ] Yes

[X] No

16

Press <ESC + 2> to continue. The settings are displayed below:

Networked: Yes

Use DHCP: No

Primary network interface: qfe0

Host name: igwb1 (igwb2 for igwb2)

IP address: 129.1.1.1 (129.1.1.2 for igwb2)

System part of a subnet: Yes

Netmask: 255.255.0.0

Enable IPv6: No

17

Determine whether to configure Kerberos Security. Select No. See below:

Configure Kerberos Security

[ ] Yes

[X] No

18

Determine whether to provide Name Service. Select None. See below:

Name service

[ ] NIS+

[ ] NIS

[ ] DNS

[ ] LDAP

[X] None

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-7

Step Description

33

Press ESC + 2 to confirm the partition.

File system/Mount point Disk/Slice Size

=============================================================

/ c1t0d0s0 57GB

swap c1t0d0s1 10GB

overlap c1t0d0s2 68.35GB

/globaldevices c1t0d0s6 512MB

34

Determine whether to mount software from a remote file server. Pres

ESC+2 to select Continue.

Do you want to mount software from a remote file server? This may

be necessary if you had to remove software because of disk spaceproblems.

F2_Continue F3_Go Back F4_Remote Mounts F5_Exit F6_Help

35

Confirm your configurations. Press ESC + 2> to select Continue.

The information shown below is your profile for installing Solaris

software. It reflects the choices you've made on previous screens.

=================================================================

=

Installation Option: Initial

Boot Device: c1t0d0Client Services: None

Locales: Simplified Chinese EUC

Simplified Chinese GBK

Simplified Chinese UTF-8

U.S.A. (en_US.ISO8859-1)

Software: Solaris 8, Entire Distribution plus OEM sup

File System and Disk Layout:

/ c1t0d0s0 57 GB

swap c1t0d0s1 10 GB

/globaldevices c1t0d0s6 512 MB

=================================================================

F2_Continue F4_Change F5_Exit F6_Help

36

Press ESC + 2 to ignore the following warning.

WARNING: Unused disk space (c1t0d0)

Esc-2_OK F5_Cancel Esc-2_OK F5_CancelqReboot After

Installation?

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-8

Step Description

37

Determine whether to reboot the computer automatically after installation.

Select Auto Reboot.

[X] Auto Reboot

[ ] Manual

38

Start the setup process, and the setup progress is displayed. The setup

process takes about 40 minutes. After installation, the system will reboot

automatically.

39

After Solaris is restarted, the system prompts to enter and confirm the

password of root. Remember the password. See below

Root password:******

Press Return to continue.

Re-enter your root password: ******

40

When the following message appears, select 1, and then press Enter . See

below:

Media:

1. CD/DVD


3. Skip

Media [1]:<Enter>

41

Insert the Solaris 8 Software 2 of 2 CD, and then press Enter . See below,

Please insert the CD/DVD for Solaris 8 Software 2 of 2 (2/02 SPARC

Platform Edition).

After you insert the disc, please press Enter:<Enter>

42

Determine whether to display the installation details. Select 2 to continue.

See below:

Installation details:

Product Result More Info

1. Solaris 8 packages (part 2) Installed Available

2. Done

Enter the number corresponding to the desired selection for more

information, or enter 2 to continue [2]:<Enter>

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-9

Step Description

43

When the following message appears, select 1, and then press Enter . See

below:

Media:

1. CD/DVD


3. Skip

Media [1]:<Enter>

44

Insert the CD for Solaris 8 Languages and press Enter . See below:

Please insert the CD/DVD for Solaris 8 Languages (2/02 SPARC Platform

Edition).

After you insert the disc, please press Enter: <Enter>.

45 Solaris restarts automatically. The installation is complete.

4.3 Installing Solaris Patches

This section introduces how to install the Solaris patches, including:

Installing Patch Tools

Installing Solaris 8 Patch

Installing SAN Patches

Installing SCSI Card Driver

Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch

4.3.1 Installing Patch Tools


Install the patch on igwb1 and igwb2.

II. Operation Steps

Table 4-1shows you the installation steps.

Table 4-1 Installation steps for Solaris standard patch

Step Description

1Insert the patch CD into the CD-ROM of the corresponding host or

workstation console.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-10

Step Description

2*

Install the patch as root.

#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/install/

# sh ./setup-standard.sh

3Disable the power saving daemon. Type y.

Is the power saving daemon to be disabled? [y/n]: y

4Disable the keyboard power button. Type y.

Sun keyboard Power button to be disabled? [y/n]: y

5Disable the buttons & dials. Type y.

Are the buttons & dials to be disabled? [y/n]: y

6Determine whether the remote login of root is allowed. Type y.

Are remote root logins to be allowed? [y/n]: y

7

Determine whether to install the Automated Crash Analysis Tool (ACT)

software package. Type y.

Do you want to install the ACT package? [y/n]: y

8Begin to install the explorer package.

Agree to these terms? <y,n>

9Set the installation directory. Press Enter to select the /opt/SUNWexplo directory by default.

Where should this package be installed? [/opt/SUNWexplo]:

10Enter Company Name. For example,

Company name []:Huawei

11Enter Contract number. Press Enter.

Contract ID []:

12Enter System Serial Number. Press Enter.

System serial number []:

13Enter Contact Name. Press Enter.

Contact name []:

14Enter your email address. Press Enter .

Contact email address []:

15Enter your phone number. Press Enter .

Phone number []:

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-11

Step Description





18Enter your city. Press Enter .

City []:

19Enter your state. Press Enter .

State []:

20Enter your zip code. Press Enter .

Zip []:

24Enter your country. Press Enter .

Country []:

22

Select the geographic region where the local SUN branch is located. For

example. Select APAC: Asia, Pacific. Press Enter .

Geographic Region

23



[y,n] n

24 Send the output to other email address: Enter“-” for none

25Enter the return address for analysis result. Enter “-” for none.

Return address for explorer email output <>:

26

The settings are displayed. Select y to confirm or select n to reset the

information.

Are these values okay? [y,n] y

27The following information is displayed. Select n, and then press Enter .

Do you wish to run explorer once a week? [y,n] n

28The following information is displayed. Select n, and then press Enter .

Would you like to do this now? [y,n] n

29The /opt/SUNWexplo does not exist. Select y to create it.

Do you want this directory created now <y,n,?,q>

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-12

Step Description

30

The following information is displayed. Select yes, and then press Enter .

Do you want to continue with the installation of <SUNWexplo> [y,n,?]

y

4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch


Install the patches on igwb1 and igwb2.

II. Operation steps

Step Description

1Insert the patch CD into the CD-ROM of the corresponding host or


2


# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/8

# unpack-patches

3

Run the command below to begin the setup process. This process may

take a long time. Please wait.

# cd /tmp/8; /install_all_patches

4

Restart the computer after the installation is complete.

# sync;sync;sync

# reboot

4.3.3 Installing SAN Patches



II. Operation steps

Step Description

1Insert the SAN software installation CD into the CD-ROM of the

corresponding host or workstation console.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-13

Step Description

2


# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SAN# unpack-patches

Are you ready to unpack patches into /tmp/SAN? [y/n]: y

3

Run the commands below to install the patches:

#cd /tmp/SAN

#./install_patches


4

Go to /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SAN/8, and then run the commands

below:

#cd cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SAN/8

#unpack-patches



May I delete /tmp/8? [y/n] y

5

Install the patch package with the commands below:.

#cd /tmp/8

#./install_patches


4.3.4 Installing SCSI Card Driver


For StorEdge 3310, make sure the SCSI card driver is installed on igwb1 and igwb2.

II. Operation steps

Step Description

1Insert the driver CD into the CD-ROM of the corresponding host or


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-14

Step Description

2

Run the commands below to install the SCSI card driver:

#mkdir -p /export/home/software/scsi#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/progs/SUNWqus/8

#cp SUNWqus_8_all.tar.gz /export/home/software/scsi/

#cd /export/home/software/scsi

#gunzip SUNWqus_8_all.tar.gz

#tar xvf SUNWqus_8_all.tar

#pkgadd –d .

3Select package(s) you wish to process (or ‘all’ to process all

packages). (default: all) <?,??,q>: (press Enter)

4Do you want to continue with the installation of <SUNWqus> <y,n,?>

y

5Do you want to continue with the installation of <SUNWqusux> <y,n,?>

y

4.3.5 Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch



II. Operation Procedure

Step Description

1

Log in as root, and then go to /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SUNWqus/8.


#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SUNWqus/8

#unpack-patchesAre you ready to unpack patches into /tmp/8? [y/n]: y


May I delete /tmp/8? [y/n]: y

#cd /tmp/8

#./install_patches

Are you ready to continue with install? <y/n> y

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-15

Step Description

2

Restart the computer after installation.

# sync;sync;sync# reboot -- -r

Use the format command to view all the hard disks on the disk array.

Caution:

Make sure the above software packages are installed in the above sequence. Restart

the computer after a package is installed. The computer can automatically detect the

disk array status during the restart process.

4.4 Configuring Solaris

After Solaris and related patches are installed, modify the configuration file on igwb1

and igwb2 respectively.

4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files

In the /etc/hosts file, add the name and IP address of one host of the dual system to

facilitate the access between the hosts of the dual system.

I. Modify the /etc/hosts file of igwb1

#


#

127.0.0.1 localhost

129.1.1.1 igwb1 loghost igwb1.net

129.2.1.1 igwb11

129.3.1.1 igwb12

129.1.1.2 igwb2

129.2.1.2 igwb21

129.3.1.2 igwb22

129.1.1.3 ha-igwb

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1

129.3.1.3 ha-igwb2

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-16

II. Modify the /etc/hosts file of igwb2.

#


#

127.0.0.1 localhost


129.2.1.2 igwb21

129.3.1.2 igwb22

129.1.1.1 igwb1

129.2.1.1 igwb11

129.3.1.1 igwb12

129.1.1.3 ha-igwb

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1

129.3.1.3 ha-igwb2

Note:

The /etc/hosts records the IP addresses of the local nodes and all the nodes in the

dual system. 129.1.1.1 is the IP address of the primary node, and 129.1.1.2 is the IP

address of the secondary node. For a specific IP address, enter as indicated in the IP

planning table.

4.4.2 Creating Network Adapter Configuration Files

Create the network adapter configuration file for igwb1 and igwb2.

I. Create hostname.qfe1 and hostname.qfe3 in the /etc directory of igwb1

Create hostname.qfe1

# vi /etc/hostname.qfe1

Add the line below:

igwb11



Add the line below:

igwb12

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-17

II. Create hostname.qfe1 and hostname.qfe3 in the /etc directory of igwb2



Add the line below:

igwb21



Add the line below:

igwb22

4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root

Modify the /etc/default/login file. Comment off the line where CONSOLE is set. For

example, modify

CONSOLE=/dev/console

into:

#CONSOLE=/dev/console

Add a comment on this line. Then the user root can log in to the host by Telnet.

4.4.4 Configuring FTP Login for root

Modify the file /etc/ftpusers. Add # before root to comment off the line. Then, the user

root can log in by FTP.

4.4.5 Executing the .profile File

Open the /.profile files on the two nodes, and then modify the contents related to

TERM. Add the content below to the end of the .profile files.

TERM=vt100; export TERM

Execute the .profile files.

#. /.profile (# is to enable the . profile file.)

4.4.6 Modifying the /kernel/drv/sd.conf File

Add the contents below to the end of the /kernel/drv/sd.conf file:


target=0 lun=1;


target=1 lun=1;


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-18

target=2 lun=1;


target=3 lun=1;


target=4 lun=1;


target=5 lun=1;

4.4.7 Modifying the /etc/system File

Add the line below to the end of the /etc/system file:

Exclude: lofs

Note:

This line is added because Sun Cluster 3.0 does not support the Loopback file system.

For details, refer to Sun Cluster 3.0 Release Notes.

4.4.8 Restarting the Hosts

#sync;sync;sync

#shutdown –y –g0 –i6

4.5 Installing Utilities

This section introduces how to install the utilities, including the TOP utility and the TVS

utility.

4.5.1 Installing the TOP Software

The TOP utility is used to test the hardware states, such as CPU and memory. Install

this software on igwb1 and igwb2.

Step Description

1 Insert the TOP software CD into the CD-ROM.

2

Log in to igwb1 or igwb2 as root, and then go to the setup directory.

# cd /cdrom/cdrom0

# cd sun/tools/top

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-19

Step Description

3Copy the installation package to the temp directory.

# cp top.3.5b8.SPARC.64bit.Solaris.8.pkg.tgz /tmp

4

Unpack the software package

# cd /tmp

# gzcat -d top.3.5b8.SPARC.64bit.Solaris.8.pkg.tgz|tar xvf-

5

Install the package.

# pkgadd -d .top

Do you want to install these as setuid/setgid files [y,n,?,q] y

If the installation is successful, the information below is prompted:

Installation of <top> was successful.

4.5.2 Installing the VTS Software

Install the VTS utility on igwb1 and igwb2.

Step Description

1 Insert the VTS software CD into the CD-ROM.

2

Log in to igwb1 or igwb2 as root, and then go to the following directories.

#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/SunVTS-5.1


SUNWvts SUNWvtsmn SUNWvtsx

#cd 8


SUNWlxml SUNWlxmlx install-s8xmlpkgs.sh

3

Install the software.

#./install-s8xmlpkgs.sh

The installation is successful if the information below is prompted on the

screen:

## Installing part 1 of 1.

/usr/lib/sparcv9/libxml2.so <symbolic link>

/usr/lib/sparcv9/libxml2.so.2

[ verifying class <none> ]

Installation of <SUNWlxmlx> was successful.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-20

Step Description

4


#cd ..#pkgadd -d .

5

This is interactive installation process. It is required to select the following

parameters:

Select package(s) you wish to process (or 'all' to process

all packages). (default: all) [?,??,q]:

Do you want to enable the Kerberos V5 based security? n

Do you want to continue with the installation of <SUNWvts> [y,n,?]

y

6Insert the patch CD into the CD-ROM, and then go to the setup directory.

#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SunVTS/5.1

7

Unpack the package.

# unpack-patches


# cd /tmp/5.1

8

Add the patch.

# patchadd 112336-02

If the installation is successful, the following information is displayed on the

screen:

Patch packages installed:

SUNWvts

SUNWvtsx

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-1

Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software


The HA system software includes: Sun Cluster (SC) 3.0 and Volume Manager. To

install the software, follow the steps below:


Installing Sun Cluster 3.0

Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5

Entering Volume Manager Licenses

Configuring HA System Parameters


Before installing the HA dual-system software, do the followings:

Checking the /etc/hosts File

Checking Configurations of the hostname Network Adapters

Checking the /etc/default/login File

Cleaning Out Device Data

5.2.1 Checking the /etc/hosts File

The /etc/hosts file contains the host names and related IP addresses of:

Public and private networks

Logical hosts

The HA system uses the names of the network adapters for communication purposes,

so the /etc/hosts file must provide all the related information.

Check whether the /etc/hosts file contains the same contents below. If not, modify it.

I. On igwb1

#


#

127.0.0.1 localhost


129.2.1.1 igwb11

129.3.1.1 igwb12

129.1.1.2 igwb2

129.2.1.2 igwb21

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-2

129.3.1.2 igwb22

129.1.1.3 ha-igwb

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1

129.3.1.3 ha-igwb2

II. On igwb2

#


#

127.0.0.1 localhost


129.2.1.2 igwb21

129.3.1.2 igwb22

129.1.1.1 igwb1

129.2.1.1 igwb11

129.3.1.1 igwb12

129.1.1.3 ha-igwb

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1

129.3.1.3 ha-igwb2

Note:

Only the value of loghost is different between the two hosts.

5.2.2 Checking Configurations of the hostname Network Adapters

On igwb1

For /etc/hostname.qfe1, it is set to igwb11.


On igwb2



7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-3

5.2.3 Checking the /etc/default/login File

Check if "#" is added before CONSOLE=/dev/console to comment off this line.

5.2.4 Cleaning Out Device Data

Execute the commands below on the two hosts:



5.3 Installing Sun Cluster 3.0

The SC software is HA software. In Sun cluster, two hosts form a cluster over the

network. Each host is a node. One or more user processes that run on the two nodes

constitute a data service.

SUN Cluster is used to monitor the running status of the data services and the two

nodes. If one node fails, the data services will be transferred to the other node to avoid

longtime service interruption.

To install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1 and igwb2, follow the steps below:

Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb1

Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb2

Configuring the Quorum Device

Checking the Status of the Cluster

5.3.1 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb1

To install the SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1, follow the steps below:

Copy installation files

Install SUN Cluster 3.0

Install SUN Cluster 3.0 Patches on igwb1

Edit the ntp.conf.cluster file

Restart igwb1

Check the installation

I. Copy installation files

Copy the installation software package from the Sun Cluster 3.0 CD to the /install

directory of igwb1.

To copy the package, follow the steps below:

1) Go to the Sun Cluster 3.0 setup directory with the commands below:

#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun-internal/progs/SunCluster/3.0/

#cd Sun_Cluster_3.0_Update3_GA

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-4

This directory contains the files below:

suncluster_3_0_u3_solaris8.tar.gz

scdataservices_3_0_u3.tar.gz

2) Copy the installation files to igwb1 with the commands below:

root@igwb1 #mkdir –p /install

root@igwb1#cp suncluster_3_0_u3_solaris8.tar.gz /install

root@igwb1#cp scdataservices_3_0_u3.tar.gz /install

II. Install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1


1) Log in to igwb1 and unpack the installation package.

#telnet igwb1




root@igwb1#cd tools

This directory includes the files below:


2) Run scinstall to install SUN Cluster 3.0

root@igwb1 # ./scinstall

3) Select installation parameters

*** Main Menu ***



* 3) Configure a cluster to be JumpStarted from this install server




* q) Quit

Note:


node.

On igwb2, select 2) Add this machine as a node in an established cluster.

Press Ctrl+D to return to the main menu during the setup process.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-5



What is the name of the cluster you want to establish? sc-igwb

Please list the names of the other nodes planned for the initial

cluster configuration. List one node name per line. When finished, type

Control-D:

Node name: igwb2

Node name (Ctrl-D to finish): ^D

Note:

On igwb2, the following information is displayed:

What is the name of the sponsoring node? igwb1.

4) Set the names of the nodes

If the names of the two nodes in the Cluster are correct, type y; if not, enter n to reset

them.

Do you need to use DES authentication (yes/no) [no]? <Enter>

Is it okay to accept the default network address (yes/no) [yes]?

Is it okay to accept the default netmask (yes/no) [yes]?

Note:

The default network address is 172.16.0.0, and the default netmask is 255.255.0.0.

Set these addresses based on your actual configurations.

Does this two-node cluster use transport junctions (yes/no) [yes]?

What is the name of the first junction in the cluster [switch1]?

What is the name of the second junction in the cluster [switch2]?

Select eri0 as the primary private network adapter, and hme0 as the secondary

private network adapter.

Select the first cluster transport adapter to use:

1) eri0

2) hme0

3) Other

Option: 1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-6

Note:

Select eri0 as the primary heartbeat network adapter.

Name of the junction to which "ce1" is connected [switch1]?

Use the default port name for the "ce1" connection (yes/no) [yes]?

Select the second cluster transport adapter to use:

1) hme0

2) Other

Option: 1

Note:Select hme0 as the secondary heartbeat network adapter.

Name of the junction to which "ce3" is connected [switch2]?

Use the default port name for the "ce3" connection (yes/no) [yes]?





Note:

Your settings are displayed. If the parameters are correct, select yes to continue with

the setup process; if not, select no to reset them.


Continue to configure the Cluster. Then, select q to close the Main Menu.

III. Install SUN Cluster 3.0 Patches on igwb1

1) Insert the patch CD into the CD-ROM, and run the commands below as root.

root@igwb1#cp -r /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SunCluster/3.0

/install/sc3.0_8

root@igwb1# cd /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster


Are you ready to unpack patches into /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster? [y/n]: y

2) Run the commands below to unpack the installation package.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-7

root@igwb1#cd /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster/*Cluster

root@igwb1#./sc_install_cluster


Use '/usr/bin/showrev -p' to verify installed patch-ids.

Refer to individual patch README files for more patch detail.

Rebooting the system is usually necessary after installation.

IV. Edit the ntp.conf.cluster file

To edit the ntp.conf.cluster file, follow the steps below:

#vi /etc/inet/ntp.conf.cluster








Save and exit.

V. Restart igwb1

root@hwhlr-ph1 # sync

root@hwhlr-ph1 # sync

root@hwhlr-ph1 # init 6

VI. Check the installation

root@igwb1# scstat |more

If the configuration is correct, the following information is displayed:

Node name Status


5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb2

To install SUN Cluster 3.0 software on igwb2, follow the steps below:

Install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2

Install SUN Cluster 3.0 patches on igwb2

Edit the ntp.conf.cluster file

Restart igwb2

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-8

I. Install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2

To install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2, follow the steps below :

1) Copy SUN Cluster 3.0 and unpack it.

#telnet igwb2

root@igwb2# cd /install



root@igwb2#cd /tools




root@igwb2 # ./scinstall


*** Main Menu ***

Option:2

Add this machine as a node in an established cluster.

Do you want to continue (yes/no) [yes]?

Is it okay to continue (yes/no) [yes]?

What is the name of the sponsoring node?igwb1

What is the name of the cluster you want to join? sc-igwb

Do you want to use autodiscovery (yes/no) [yes]?

The following connections were discovered:

igwb1:eri0 switch1 igwb2:eri0

igwb1:hme0 switch2 igwb2:hme0

Is it okay to add these connections to the configuration (yes/no) [yes]?






3) Continue to configure SUN Cluster 3.0. Then, enter q to close the Main Menu

II. Install SUN Cluster 3.0 patches on igwb2

Insert the patch CD into the CD-ROM, and then run the commands below as root.

root@igwb2#cp -r /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SunCluster/3.0/install/sc3.0_8

root@igwb2# cd /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-9

Are you ready to unpack patches into /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster? [y/n]: y

Go to the directory as prompted and run the patch installation script.

root@igwb2#cd /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster/*Cluster

root@igwb2#./sc_install_cluster


Use '/usr/bin/showrev -p' to verify installed patch-ids.

Refer to individual patch README files for more patch detail.

Rebooting the system is usually necessary after installation.

III. Edit the ntp.conf.cluster file

Run the command below to edit the ntp.conf.cluster file.

#vi /etc/inet/ntp.conf.cluster








Save and exit.

IV. Restart igwb2

root@igwb2# sync

root@ igwb2# sync

root@ igwb2 # init 6

5.3.3 Configuring the Quorum Device

Note:

Configure the quorum device on igwb1 only.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-10

1) Check the disk ID (DID)

root@igwb1#scdidadm -L

Specify a hard disk on the disk array for the Quorum device. Here, select d4.

For example:

igwb1>scdidadm -L















Note:

Only the shared disk can serve as the Quorum device.

From above, you can see the disks d4, d5, d6 and d7 are shared by the primary

and secondary nodes. d4 and d6 are on LUN0, and d5 and d7 are on LUN1. Here,

d4 is used as the Quorum device.

2) Create a lock disk

root@igwb1#scconf -a -q globaldev=d4

root@igwb1#scconf -c -q reset

root@igwb1#scconf -a -T node=.

5.3.4 Checking the Status of the Cluster Nodes

Run the command below to check node status:


If the node configurations are correct, the following information is displayed:

-- Cluster Nodes --

Node name Status

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-11

--------- ------



------------------------------------------------------------------

-- Cluster Transport Paths --

Endpoint Endpoint Status

-------- -------- ------

Transport path: igwb1:eri0 igwb2:eri0 Path online

Transport path: igwb1:hme0 igwb2:hme0 Path online

----------------------------------------------------------

-- Quorum Summary --

Quorum votes possible: 3

Quorum votes needed: 2

Quorum votes present: 3

-- Quorum Votes by Node --

Node Name Present Possible Status

--------- ------- -------- ------



-- Quorum Votes by Device --

Device Name Present Possible Status

----------- ------- -------- ------

Device votes: /dev/did/rdsk/d3s2 1 1 Online

------------------------------------------------------------------

-- Device Group Servers --

Device Group Primary Secondary

------------ ------- ---------

-- Device Group Status --

Device Group Status

------------ ------

------------------------------------------------------------------

5.4 Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5

Volume Manager 3.5 must be installed on igwb1 and igwb2. To install and configure

Volume Manager 3.5, follow the steps below:

Installing Volume Manager

5.4.2 Installing Volume Manager Patches

Modifying Disk Management Parameters


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-13

#cd /cdrom/cdrom/sun/patch/veritas-vm

#cd 3.5

#ls

You can find the files below in the current directory:

112392-07.zip 113203-03.zip 113595-05.zip 113596-04.zip


#unpack-patches


Cleaning out /tmp/3.5...

Unpacking.....

Patch 112392-06

Patch 113203-03

Patch 113595-05

Patch 113596-03

You should run:cd /tmp/3.5; ./install_patches

4) Install the patches with the command below:

#cd /tmp/3.5; ./install_patches



Determining if sufficient save space exists...

Sufficient save space exists, continuing...

Installing patches located in /tmp/3.5

Installing 112392-06...

……

Ignore the error messages if prompted.

Caution:

Make sure you have the latest patches on hand. If not, contact Sun Microsystems for

technical support.

5.4.3 Modifying Disk Management Parameters

It the DMP function is enabled by Solaris, disable it in the Volume Manager.

1) Log in as root, and then execute the command below to disable the DMP

function:

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-14

#vxdiskadm


Select an operation to perform:17 (Select 17 Prevent multipathing/Suppress

devices from VxVM's view)

Do you want to continue ? [y,n,q,?] (default: y)

Select an operation to perform:5 (Select 5 Prevent multipathing of all disks

on a controller by VxVM)

Enter a controller name [<ctlr-name>,all,list,list-exclude,q,?] all

Continue operation? [y,n,q,?] (default: n) y

Enter q till the main menu is displayed.

2) Restart the computer to enable the parameters.

#sync

#sync

#init 6

5.4.4 Checking the Installation

1) Run df –k and more /etc/vfstab to check if the mounted device cxtxdxsx is

replaced by volume.

2) Check if vxconfigd is started normally.

#ps -ef| grep vx

It is properly started if the information below is displayed.

root 20 1 0 19:42:32 ? 0:01 vxconfigd -m boot

3) Execute the vxdctl mode command to check if the initialization is successful.

If "enable" is displayed, the initialization is successful.

5.5 Entering Volume Manager Licenses

Note:

Enter the respective licenses on igwb1 and igwb2.

5.5.1 Checking Hostid

Check the hostid with the command below:

root@igwb1#hostid

You may get:

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-15

8301aad5

Check if it is the same as that in the License.

Caution:

The hostids are different for the two minicomputers.

5.5.2 Checking If the License Is Permanent

Check if it is a permanent License with the command below:

root@igwb1# vxlicrep

If it is not a permanent License, the following information is displayed:

VERITAS License Manager vxlicrep utility version 3.00.007d


Creating a report on all VERITAS products installed on this system

-----------------***********************-----------------

License Key = R8CE-FR26-NSNN-R4O4-OZNP-PPP6-PPPP-OL

Product Name = VERITAS Volume Manager

License Type = DEMO

OEM ID = 4095

Demo End Date = Fri Jul 23 00:00:00 2004

(60.3 days from now).

Features :=

VxVM = Enabled

CPU Count = Not Restricted

The information indicates that no permanent License is entered for the product. Note

that the letters in bold indicate the expiry date of the temporary license. After the date,

enter a permanent license.

5.5.3 Entering the Permanent License


root@igwb1# /sbin/vxlicinst

VERITAS License Manager vxlicinst utility version 3.00.007d


Enter your license key : rrp9-un3k-rtv8-y6pp-p6pp-ncpc-pp

License key successfully installed for VERITAS Volume Manager

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-16

5.5.4 Checking If the License Is Correctly Entered

To check if the License is correctly entered, run the command below:

root@igwb1# /sbin/vxlicrep

5.6 Configuring HA System Parameters

To Set the HA system parameters on igwb1 and igwb2, follow the steps below:

Mirroring Root Disk

Creating the igwbdg Resource Group

Configuring NAFO

Registering the igwbrg Resource Group

Installing igwb Monitor Script

Checking the Configuration

5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk

Note:

Unless otherwise specified, all the operations in this section shall be performed on

igwb1 and igwb2.

I. Check the disk information

#vxdisk list


c1t0d0s2 sliced rootdisk_1 rootdg online

c1t1d0s2 sliced - - online

c3t0d0s2 sliced - - error




Choose the second disk as the mirroring disk of the local hard disk, for example, the

c1t1d0s2 in this example. You can select the disk according to actual conditions.

II. Initialize the selected mirrored disk

#vxdiskunsetup –C c1t1d0

#vxdisksetup –i c1t1d0

#vxdisk list


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-17







III. Add the mirrored disk into rootdg





IV. Mirror the root disk



Caution:

rootdisk_1 is the local disk obtained with #vxdisk command.



5.6.2 Creating the igwbdg Resource Group

Note:

Unless otherwise specified, perform the operations in this section only on igwb1.

I. View the disk information

#vxdisk list





7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-18




Select c3t1d1 and c4t1d1 as the disks of the igwbdg disk group. c3t1d0 and c4t1d0are selected as LUN0 in 200 MB. This LUN is set for system maintenance purpose.

Note:

The drive letter varies with the devices. Select based on the actual configurations.

II. Create the igwbdg disk group

Caution:

Create the igwbdg disk group on one host only.

The commands below can be saved as creat_volume.sh. Run chmod 755

create_volume.sh to make it executable, and then run sh ./create_volume.sh.

This process may take a few hours, which depends on the disk capacity.

c3t0d1 in the script below should be the actual disk array number. View the

numbers with the format command. For example, the letters in blue (four disks) isthe required disk array numbers. Note that the number in red is the local disk of

igwb 1 only.

root@igwb1#format

Searching for disks...done

AVAILABLE DISK SELECTIONS:


/pci@8,600000/SUNW,qlc@4/fp@0,0/ssd@w21000004cfc33819,0


/pci@8,600000/SUNW,qlc@4/fp@0,0/ssd@w21000004cfac4524,0


/pci@8,700000/pci@2/scsi@4/sd@0,0


/pci@8,700000/pci@2/scsi@4/sd@0,1


/pci@8,700000/pci@2/scsi@5/sd@0,0


/pci@8,700000/pci@2/scsi@5/sd@0,1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-19

Specify disk (enter its number):<CTRL+D>

Caution:

gwbdg01 and igwbdg02 in the script below is set for LUN1 on the StorEdge 3310.

The space of the front disk and the back disk shall be changed based on the actual

capacity of LUN1.

Partition the disk into four partitions, front, back, log-alarm, and igwbdg-stat.

igwbdg-stat is used by the system. Calculate each partition as indicated below: The

total space is the space of LUN1,101,376 MB. Allocate 512 MB to igwbdg-stat,

4,096 MB to log-alarm, and the rest 103,228 MB are fifty-fifty for the front disk and

the back disk. It is recommended that the allocated space for the front disk and the

back disk be set to integral times of 512 to avoid insufficient available space.

1) Compile the creat_volume.sh script.



vxdg init igwbdg igwbdg01=c3t0d1

vxdg -g igwbdg adddisk igwbdg02= c4t0d1

vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make igwbdg-stat 512m layout=nolog igwbdg01

vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make log-alarm 4096m layout=nolog igwbdg01

vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make front 48000m layout=nolog igwbdg01

vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make back 48000m layout=nolog igwbdg01

vxassist -g igwbdg mirror igwbdg-stat layout=nolog igwbdg02

vxassist -g igwbdg mirror log-alarm layout=nolog igwbdg02

vxassist -g igwbdg mirror front layout=nolog igwbdg02

vxassist -g igwbdg mirror back layout=nolog igwbdg02

2) Run the script

Execute sh ./create_volumes.sh in the script directory.

3) Register the igwbdg resource

root@igwb1 # scsetup

*** Main Menu ***

Please select from one of the following options:

1) Quorum

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-20

2) Resource groups

3) Cluster interconnect

4) Device groups and volumes

5) Private hostnames

6) New nodes

7) Other cluster properties

?) Help with menu options

q) Quit

Option: 4

*** Device Groups Menu ***


1) Register a VxVM disk group as a device group

2) Synchronize volume information for a VxVM device group

3) Unregister a VxVM device group

4) Add a node to a VxVM device group

5) Remove a node from a VxVM device group

6) Change key properties of a device group

?) Help

q) Return to the Main Menu

Option: 1

>>> Register a VxVM Disk Group as a Device Group <<<

VERITAS Volume Manager disk groups are always managed by the cluster

as cluster device groups. This option is used to register a VxVM disk

group with the cluster as a cluster device group.

Is it okay to continue (yes/no) <yes>? <Enter>

Name of the VxVM disk group you want to register? igwbdg

Primary ownership of a device group is determined by either

specifying or not specifying a preferred ordering of the nodes that

can own the device group. If an order is specified, this will be the

order in which nodes will attempt to establish ownership. If an order

is not specified, the first node that attempts to access a disk in

the device group becomes the owner.

Do you want to configure a preferred ordering (yes/no) <yes>? <Enter>

Are both nodes attached to all disks in this group (yes/no) <yes>? <Enter>

Which node is the preferred primary for this device group? igwb1

Enable "failback" for this disk device group (yes/no) <no>? no

Is it okay to proceed with the update (yes/no) <yes>? <Enter>

scconf -a -D type=vxvm,name=igwbdg,nodelist=igwb1:igwb2,preferenced=true

Command completed successfully.

Hit ENTER to continue: <Enter>

*** Device Groups Menu ***


1) Register a VxVM disk group as a device group

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-21

2) Synchronize volume information for a VxVM device group

3) Unregister a VxVM device group

4) Add a node to a VxVM device group

5) Remove a node from a VxVM device group

6) Change key properties of a device group

?) Help

q) Return to the Main Menu

Option: q

*** Main Menu ***


1) Quorum

2) Resource groups

3) Cluster interconnect

4) Device groups and volumes

5) Private hostnames

6) New nodes

7) Other cluster properties

?) Help with menu options

q) Quit

Option: q

Please wait while the device suppression/unsuppression operations take effect.

Goodbye.

III. Create the new file system on the igwbdg volume

#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/igwbdg-stat

#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/log-alarm

#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/front

#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/back

The similar information below is displayed when the above commands are executed.

newfs: construct a new file system /dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/ igwbdg-stat : (y/n)?

y

Enter y.

IV. Modify the /etc/vfstab and create the mount points

1) Run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to create the mount points

#cd /var

#mkdir frontsave

#mkdir backsave

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-22

#mkdir other

Then, three mount points /var/frontsave, /var/backsave, and /var/other are created on

igwb1 and igwb2.

2) Modify the /etc/vfstab file on igwb1 and igwb2, and then add the contents below:

/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/front /dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/front /var/frontsave ufs 2

no logging

/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/back /dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/back /var/backsave ufs 2

no logging

/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/log-alarm /dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/log-alarm /var/other ufs

2 no logging

5.6.3 Configuring NAFO

Note:

Perform this operation on igwb1 and igwb2. Below is an example on igwb1.

root@igwb1#pnmset

The following information is displayed. The letters in bold should be entered.

In the following, you will be prompted to do configuration for network adapter

failover

Do you want to continue ... [y/n]: y

How many NAFO groups to configure [1]: 1

Enter NAFO group number [0]: 0

Enter space-separated list of adapters in nafo0: qfe1 qfe2

Checking configuration of nafo0:

Testing active adapter qfe1...

Testing adapter qfe2...

NAFO configuration completed

5.6.4 Registering the igwbrg Resource Group

Note:

Unless otherwise specified, perform this operation on igwb1 only.

root@igwb1 # scsetup

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-23

Restart the HA system with the command below:

root@igwb1#sync

root@igwb1#sync

root@igwb1#init 6

5.6.5 Installing igwb Monitor Script

Transfer the sc30_script.ta file to the /opt directory on igwb1 and igwb2 in binary

mode.


#cd /opt


Run the command below to restart the HA system.


5.6.6 Checking the Configuration

After configuration, run the commands below to check whether the nodes can be

added and switched over.

I. On igwb1, run the commands below:


root@igwb1 # df -k (check if all volumes of the disk arrays are included.)

root@igwb1 # scswitch -S -h igwb1 (Check if the HA system can be switched over

from igwb1 to igwb2.)

II. On igwb2, run the commands below:


root@igwb1 # df -k (Check if all volumes of the disk arrays are included)

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-1

Chapter 6 Installing Billing Interface


The CG9812 supports the FTP and FTAM billing interfaces. Select one of them as

required.

To use the FTAM interface, you need to install and configure the FTAM software.

The FTP software is installed during the UNIX setup process. To use the FTP

interface, you need to configure the FTP server.

It is recommended to transfer the bill files between the CG9812 and the billing center

by FTP.

6.2 Installing FTP

The installation of the FTP interface is simple. The FTP server software is installed

during the UNIX setup process. It is not required to install it separately.

6.3 Installing FTAM

To use the FTAM interface, you need to install and configure the FTAM software. This

section introduces how to install the FTAM billing interface.

6.3.1 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0

The Solstice FTAM 9.0 is a FTAM software package developed by SUN Microsystems

Inc. It is the update version to Solstice FTAM 8.1.1. Compared with Solstice FTAM

8.1.1, this version supports the 64-bit system and corrects some errors. Typically, the

SUN FTAM package contains two components: the application layer package and

protocol stack package, which can be purchased separately.

1) Solstice OSI 9.0, the OSI protocol stack of FTAM, contains the following

packages.

SUNWcorpc Solstice OSI RPC installation package

SUNWcosiA Solstice OSI core stack kernel files 1

SUNWcosia Solstice OSI core stack kernel files

SUNWcosib Solstice OSI core stack configuration files

SUNWcosic Solstice OSI core stack management utilities

SUNWcosid Solstice OSI core stack development kit

SUNWosiax Solstice OSI core stack kernel files (64-bit)

SUNWosicx Solstice OSI core stack management utilities (64-bit)

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-2

SUNWosidx Solstice OSI core stack development kit (64-bit)



SUNWcosip Solstice OSI core stack documentation in PDF

2) Solstice FTAM 9.0, the application layer software of FTAM (containing RFC 1006

protocol stack package), contains the following packages.

SUNWftama Solstice FTAM configuration files

SUNWftamb Solstice FTAM executable files and development libraries (32-bit)

SUNWftabx Solstice FTAM executable files and development libraries (64-bit)

SUNWrk6 Solstice RFC1006/TLI Module (32-bit)

SUNWrk6x Solstice RFC1006/TLI Module (64-bit)

SUNWftamp Solstice FTAM documentation in PDF format.



Caution:

SUNWrk6 and SUNWrk6x are the packages of the RFC1006 protocol stack,

SUNWrk6 supports the 32-bit OS while SUNWrk6x supports the 64-bit OS. TheRFC1006 protocol stack cannot exist in the same system with the OSI protocol

stack. In other words, if the RFC1006 protocol stack is installed, the OSI protocol

stack cannot be installed on the same computer.

SUNWlicsw is the License monitor process package, and SUNWlit is the License

management toolkit. They are only required to be installed during the FTAM or OSI

setup process. In other words, if the two packages are installed during the OSI

setup process, you do not need to install them during the FTAM setup process.

Currently, Solstice FTAM 9.0 only supports Solaris 8.

If an earlier version of Solstice FTAM is previously installed, uninstall it before

Solstice FTAM 9.0 is installed.

6.3.2 Installation Preparations

I. Prepare the installation software and Licenses

Solstice FTAM 9.0 and Solstice OSI 9.0 are two CDs with a separate License each.

The License is bound to the hostid. The hostid is an 8-byte hexadecimal digit. In

Solaris, check the hostid with the command below:

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-3

#hostid

Then, you may get:.

80e63680

II. Decide the underlying communication protocol with the FTAM peer

Before installation, decide the underlying communication protocol with the FTAM peer

end, such as the billing center, you may select the RFC1006 protocol or the OSI

protocol. If the protocol cannot be decided, you probably cannot continue with the

FTAM setup process in a later section.

6.3.3 Installation Steps

Note:

Unless otherwise specified, in the later sections, the letters in bold represent the

information you need to enter, and the letters in italic represent the installer

prompts.

<Enter > indicates to press Enter .

I. Install the OSI protocol stack

If you decide to use the OSI protocol stack to communicate with the FTAM peer, the

OSI protocol stack must be installed. If not, directly go to II. Install the FTAM.

1) Mount the CD-ROM

Insert the OSI protocol stack CD into the CD-ROM. If the Volume Manager is installed,



Solaris is installed with the Volume Manager, if not, mount it manually with the

commands below:

#mkdir /cdrom/osi_9_0

#mount -rF hsfs /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s0/cdrom/osi_9_0

2) Open the /cdrom/osi_9_0 directory and install the OSI package.

#cd /cdrom/osi_9_0

#pkgadd -d




(sparc) 9.0

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-4


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 6.1


(sparc) 4.1


(sparc) 9.0





(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0

Select the package you want to install (or select “all” to install all packages).


Select the packages, or install all the packages by default. Press Enter . Enter y if

prompted during the setup process. For example,

Do you want to continue to install SUNWcorpc?y (Press Enter)

Caution:

Install the OSI Core Stack Configuration Files package of SUNWcosib before other

packages are installed.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-5

After all the packages are installed, the installer gives prompts again.


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 6.1


(sparc) 4.1


(sparc) 9.0



The installer prompts the message below.


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0

Select the package you want to execute (or select “all” to execute all packages).


Enter q to exit.

3) Install the License manager


#./lit_tty

The license installation interface prompts the message below:

Select Product

[x] Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-6







Select Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC, and then the information below is

displayed:

Solstice OSI (Stack)

9.0 for SPARC


SERVER NAME HOSTID

1: igwb2 80c7dff7









Select Product









4) Install the OSI patches

#pachadd 111344-01

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-7

Check installed patches...

111344-01 is the patch of Solstice OSI 9.0.

5) Restart the computer


6) Check whether the OSI protocol stack is successfully installed.

#ps -ef | grep osi

If the /usr/sbin/osinetd process is displayed, the OSI protocol stack is successfully

installed.

II. Install the FTAM

1) Mount the CD-ROM

Insert the FTAM protocol stack CD into the CD-ROM. If the Volume Manager isinstalled, the CD-ROM is automatically mounted to the /cdrom/osi_9_0 file system. To

check whether Volume Manager is installed, run the ps -ef | grep vold command.

Usually, Solaris is installed with the Volume Manager, if not, mount it manually with the

commands below:

#mkdir /cdrom/ftam_9_0

#mount -rF hsfs /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s0/cdrom/ftam_9_0

2) Open the /cdrom/ftam_9_0 directory and install the FTAM package.

#cd /cdrom/ftam_9_0

#pkgadd -d .

The installer shows the prompt below.



(sparcv9) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 6.1


(sparc) 4.1


(sparc) 1.1


(sparc) 1.1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-8



In this step, if the OSI protocol stack is installed, select packages 1–6 only and do not

install the RFC1006 packages, including SUNWrk6 and SUNWrk6x. Otherwise, press

Enter to install all the packages. Then, enter y if prompted. For example,

Do you want to continue to install SUNWftabx? Y <Enter>

After the packages are installed, the prompt is displayed again:


(sparcv9) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 9.0


(sparc) 6.1


(sparc) 4.1


(sparc) 1.1


(sparc) 1.1



Enter q to exit.

3) Install the License manager.


#./lit_tty

The installer shows the following information.

Select Product

[ ] Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC


[x] Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-9





Select Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC and the message below is displayed:

Solstice FTAM

9.0 for SPARC


SERVER NAME HOSTID

1: igwb2 80c7dff7









Select Product



[*] Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC






4) Restart the computer.


5) Check whether the FTAM is successfully installed.

Use the command below to check whether FTAM is successfully installed.

#ps -ef | grep osi

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-10

If the OSI protocol stack is installed, the four processes osinetd, osiftamd, osiftrd -164,

and osiftrd -264 are displayed.

If the RFC1006 protocol stack is installed, the three processes osiftamd, osiftrd -164,

and osiftrd -264 are displayed. Also, check whether the rk6d process is running byusing the ps -ef | grep rk6d command.

6.3.4 Configuring Parameters

I. Related parameters

1) NSAP

The NSAP represents the network service access point. The FTAM client (Initiator)

finds the FTAM server (Responder) through the NSAP and set up connection with the

server.The NSAP consists of five parts. See Figure 6-1

IDI SI PA AFI NSEL

Figure 6-1 NSAP formats

AFI: Authority and Format Identifier (2 bytes)

IDI: Initial Domain Identifier (to be defined)

SI: Subnetwork Identifier

PA: Point of Attachment

NSEL: Network Selector (1 byte)

The NSAP has multiple configuration formats, and the nbs format is frequently used.

In the format, AFI is set to 49, IDI is null, SI+PA is a hexadecimal digit with 1–5 bytes

(like hostid), and NSEL is 01.

For example, the NSAP is 491234567801.

2) T-SELECTOR, P-SELECTOR, and S-SELECTOR represent the selectors of the

transmission layer, presentation layer and session layer respectively.

T-SELECTOR can be ASCII or hex with up to 32 bytes.

P-SELECTOR can be ASCII or hex, with up to 4 bytes.

S-SELECTOR can be ASCII or hex with up to 16 bytes.

3) Partner

The FTAM runs in Initiator/Responder mode. To initiate the connection with the

Responder, the Initiators must know the parameters like NSAP of Responder. Typically,

a Partner is used to represent the FTAM Responder.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-11

II. Set the OSI parameters.

For most network systems, you can use the default values for the parameters of

Solstice OSI protocol stack. To check or modify the parameters, start the GUI tool

/opt/SUNWconn/osinet/bin/ositool.

Start ositool with the command below:

# /opt/SUNWconn/osinet/bin/ositool

Figure 6-2 shows the graphical interface after the tool is started.

Figure 6-2 Configure OSI parameters

With this tool, you can set the parameters for Stack Manager, Network Layer Address,

Router Manager, and ES-IS Configuration (End System). Do not modify these

parameters.

The OSI uses the ES-IS protocol so that the subnets that interconnect can invoke and

update network addresses through the broadcast messages.

III. Configure Solstice FTAM parameters

1) Set up a Partner for the FTAM peer.


#./osiftam

osiftam>rdb add entry1 -n H4980ed0f2d01 -p Cftr -s CPtr -t CFTAM -z 1

-n is followed by the NSAP of the FTAM peer entry1, H indicates the NSAP format

is hexadecimal, and 80ed0f2d is the hostid of FTAM peer.

-p is followed by P-SELECTOR, and C indicates the P-SELECTOR is in text

format, namely ftr in this example.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-12

-s is followed by S-SELECTOR, and C indicates the S-SELECTOR is in text

format, namely Ptr in this example.

-p is followed by T-SELECTOR, and C indicates the T-SELECTOR is in text

format, namely FTAM in this example. -z is followed by the underlying protocol type. 0 indicates the Connection Oriented

Network Service (CONS), for example, x.25; 1 indicates the Connectionless

Network Protocol (CLNP) network, for example, Ethernet and FDDI; 2 indicates

the RFC 1006, namely TCP/IP. If the OSI protocol stack is installed, select 1 or 2;

if the RFC 1006 protocol stack is installed, select 2. Figure 6-3 shows the process

of network addressing.

SNPA：Subnetwork Point of Attachment

Figure 6-3 Selector and network addressing

2) Check whether the peer end is accessible.

#cd /opt/SUNWconn/osinet/bin

#./osi_ping -n 4980ed0f2d01

If the peer end is accessible, 4980ed0f2d01 is alive is displayed. 4980ed0f2d01 is the

NSAP of the FTAM peer. Make sure the computer where 4980ed0f2d01 is located is

started and FTAM is running normally when you run the command.

3) Test whether a Partner is available.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-13


#./osiftam

osiftam>open entry1 -n username -p password

If login is successful, osiftam prompts the information below.

connection established

recovery available

Here,

entry1 is the FTAM Partner name.

-n is followed by the user name.

-p is followed by the login password.

After login is successful, you can use the commands like dir , get, and put to test

whether you can interact with the FTAM Partner. For usage of the commands, refer to6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands.

Note:

Solstice FTAM 9.0 provides you with a graphical tool, ftamtool, to configure the FTAM

parameters. The functions provided by this tool are the same as those of the rdb

command in osiftam. The user usually logs in to a UNIX workstation by Telnet to set

the parameters, and the ftamtool is not always usable, so the ftamtool usage is not

introduced in this section.

6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands

1) Set up a FTAM connection.

#/opt/SUNWconn/ftam/bin/osiftam

osiftam>open entry -n username -p password

In this command, entry is the FTAM Partner name created with the rdb add

command.

2) List the remote directories

osiftam>dir remotedir

Note:


executed.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




6-14

3) Get a file from the remote end

osiftam>get remotefile localfile

Note:


executed.

4) Display the existing FTAM Partners

osiftam>rdb list

Note:

Do not connect with any Partner if this command is executed.

5) Modify the parameters of a Partner

osiftam>rdb change entry -p CFTR

then, the entry of P-SELECTOR is changed into FTR.

6) Display the detailed parameters of a Partnerosiftam>rdb show entry

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-1

Chapter 7 Installing CG9812 Server


This chapter introduces how to install the CG9812 server, including:


Installing Server Software

Upgrading Server

Rolling Back to Last Version

Note:

For parameter configuration, refer to “Part III Parameter Configuration and System

Commissioning”.


Typically, the CG9812 delivered to the site has finished the installation steps before

and including Chapter 5 “Installing HA System Software”.

Check the following contents before installation.

7.2.1 Checking Hardware Connections

To check if all the hardware cables are properly connected, refer to 2.4 Hardware

Connections.

7.2.2 Checking System Software Installation

Note:

This section applies to the first installation of the server software. For upgrade

operations, skip this step.

I. Check if Solaris 8 can be properly started

If you can log in by TC or Telnet, it indicates that Solaris 8 is properly started.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-2

1) After Solaris is started, you can log in to the two hosts from the COM ports of

other terminals or the TC. For the DC TC, you can telnet (TCP/IP) and then select

7002 port to log in to igwb1 and select 7003 port to log in to igwb2. Note that the

default IP of the TC is set to 192.168.160.10.2) After Solaris is started, you can log in as root by FTP or Telnet. You can log in to

the hosts by Telnet. The default IP addresses are set in the /etc/hosts file. For

details, see Figure 7-1.

igwb1 default IP address

igwb2 default IP

CG9812 default floating IP

129.1.1.2 igwb2

129.2.1.2 igwb21

129.2.1.3 igwb22

129.1.1.1 igwb1

129.1.1.2 igwb11

129.1.1.3 igwb12

129.1.1.3 ha-igwb

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1 129.3.1.3 ha-igwb2

Figure 7-1 The /etc/hosts file on igwb1

For details about the /etc/hosts file, refer to 4.4.1 “Configuring the /etc/hosts Files”.

In Figure 7-1, the three different lines indicate the interrelations between the local IPs

and the floating IPs. For example, the local IPs 129.1.1.1 and 129.1.1.2 correspond to

the floating IP 129.1.1.3.

Table 7-1 Description for the /etc/hosts file

IP address Logical host Description Remarks

127.0.0.1 localhost - -

129.1.1.1 igwb1Local IP of qfe0 for

maintenance purpose.

IP factory default

for igwb1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-3

IP address Logical host Description Remarks

129.2.1.1 igwb11

Local IP of qfe1. qfe1 and qfe2

are mutually backed up,

sharing the same floating IP.

129.3.1.1 igwb12 Local IP of qfe3

129.1.1.2 igwb2Local IP of qfe0 for

maintenance purpose.

129.2.1.2 igwb21

Local IP of qfe1. qfe1 and qfe2


sharing the same floating IP.

129.3.1.2 igwb22 Local IP of qfe3.

IP factory default

for igwb2.

129.1.1.3 ha-igwb

The floating IP of qfe0. It is

used to connect the NMS and

the maintenance console.

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1

Local IP of qfe1. qfe1and qfe2


sharing the same floating IP to

connect with SGSN or GGSN.

129.3.1.3 ha-igwb2

The floating IP of qfge3. It is

used to connect with the billing

center

The three IP

addresses are

external floating IP

factory defaults.

Note: The three

floating IPs are the

same for igwb1

and igwb2. They

are enabled when

the SCs are

started.

II. Check if the two nodes can be switched over each other

For SUN Cluster3.0, to check whether the primary node and the secondary node can

be switched over each other, follow the steps below.

1) Log in to igwb1 or igwb2, run scstat | more to view the SC information. You mayget the information below:

--Cluster Nodes --

Node name Status

--------- ------

Cluster node: igwb1 Online (”online” indictes that igwb1 is a

cluster member)

Cluster node: igwb2 Online (”online” indictes that igwb2 is a

cluster member)

2) Make sure that both igwb1and igwb2 are cluster members.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-4

3) You can only access the disk arrays on igwb1 or igwb2. Make sure the attached

directories for the disk arrays are correct.

Log in to igwb1 or igwb2 through the TC or by Telnet, and run df -k command to view

the output information. Only on one of the two hosts, you can check the volume of thedisk array, including /var/frontsave, /var/backsave, /var/other, and /ha-igwb.

4) Run the command below on the host where you can view the volume of the disk

array:

#scswitch -S -h xxx (xxx for local node, such as igwb1)

Then, check the volume again. Now, you can only view the information on the other

node.

7.2.3 Installation Prerequisites

I. Make sure you have the right software version on hand.

II. Modify the IP addresses of igwb1 and igwb2

You can reset the IP addresses in the /etc/hosts files. Restart the computer after you

finish.

Caution:

After you modify the hosts files, make sure you also modify the iP addresses set in

the igwb.ini files. Otherwise, the CG9812 server cannot be started. The default

installation path for igwb.ini is /opt/igwb/config/ini.

For details on parameter configurations, refer to Part III. “Parameter

Configurations”.

You can modify the /etc/hosts on igwb1 and igwb2 to reset the IP addresses.

1) For the floating IP addresses, modify them based on your actual configurations. If

the floating IP addresses are not in the same network segment, change the

subnet masks for igwb1 and igwb2 in the /etc/netmasks files. Restart the hosts

to enable the settings.

2) The maintenance IP addresses of igwb1 (129.1.1.1 by default) and igwb2

(129.1.1.2 by default) shall be set in the same network segment with the first

external floating IP (129.1.1.3 by default).

3) For other IP factory defaults of igwb1 and igwb2, if they are not in conflict with the

IP addresses configured in the current LAN, keep the factory defaults. Record if

an IP address needs to be modified.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-5

4) qfe1 and qfe2 are mutually backed up, sharing the same floating IP. If qfe1 is

disabled, qfe2 is enabled; if qfe2 is disabled, qfe1 is enabled.

III. IP address configuration instance

The configuration instance is given below. Table 7-2 shows the onsite service floating

IP addresses.

Table 7-2 Onsite service floating IP planning

Network

adapter

Default

floating IP

Onsite

floating IPFunction Remarks

qfe0 129.1.1.3 10.11.5.30

Connect with the

NMS and the

maintenanceconsole

-

qfe1 129.2.1.3 202.11.6.20Connect with

SGSN or GGSN

Use the related network

ports for multiple

access points.

qfe3 129.3.1.3 5.16.17.18Connect with the

billing center-

1) IP addresses configured in /etc/hosts on igwb1:

129.1.1.1 igwb1 (This IP is for maintenance purpose. It can be changed into 10.11.5.1, which is in the sanme

network segment with 10.11.5.30.)










7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-6

Caution:

The last three IP addresses are the external service floating IP addresses set by

default. They are configured with same values on igwb1 and igwb2. The floating IP

addresses will not be enabled untill the SC is started.


2) IP addresses configured in /etc/hosts on igwb2













7.2.4 Key Terminologies You Need to Know

Before installation, you need to know the following key terminologies:

I. Consolidation

Two or more partial bills are created when the GSN process a PDP call. Consolidation

is to consolidate these partial bills into one or more bills.

II. Sort

Sort the bills on the back disk. Two or more bill formats may be included in a bill

package. Currently, bills can be sorted based on the conditions below:

For R98 770, this bill format is compatible with R98 760 and can be only sorted by

RecordType.

For R99 3a0, it is compatible with R99 390 and R99 360, and can be sorted by

RecordType and ChargingCharacteristics.

For R4 440, it can be sorted by RecordType and ChargingCharacteristics.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-7

For RecordType, bills can be sorted by S-CDR, G-CDR, M-CDR, SMO-CDR, or

SMT-CDR.

For ChargingCharacteristics, bills can be sorted by Hot billing, Flat rate, Prepaid

service, or Normal billing

III. Bill protocol versions

The bill protocol versions include R98, R99, and R4.

7.3 Installing Server Software

1) Copy the server software installation files igwb_install.tar.gz, igwb_install.sh,

S99CGCfgMonitor , and sc30_script.tar to a specific directory on the

workstation or the client, and then transfer these files to the specific directory on

igwb1 and igwb2 by FTP. For FTP transfer modes and transfer destination paths,see Table 7-3.

Table 7-3 Transfer installation files

Installation file FTP transfer mode FTP destination path

igwb_install.tar.gz Binary

sc30_script.tar Binary

igwb_install.sh ASCII

igwb_rollback.sh ASCII

The /opt directory on igwb1 and

igwb2

S99CGCfgMonito ASCIIThe /etc/rc3.d directory on

igwb1 and gwb2

2) Log on to igwb1 as root. The root password is set to be root by default.

3) Go to the /etc/rc3.d directory and execute the commands below:

# cd/etc/rc3.d

# chmod 755 S99CGCfgMonitor

4) Go to the /opt directory and run the command below to begin the setup process.

# cd /opt


The following information is displayed. Select the bill protocol version:

1) --- R98 V7.7.0

2) --- R99 V3.a.0

3) --- R4 V4.4.0


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-8

The installation wizard prompt if bill consolidation is supported by this version. If

consolidation is supported, enter y; if not, enter n.

Select the installed version , Consolidation or not , <y/n>:

Select sort type:1) --- Without Distinguishment

2) --- Distinguishment by record-type

3) --- Distinguishment by ChargingCharacteristics

Please select from the Distinguishment menu:

Then, continue the setup process.

When the installation is finished, you will get the following message:


5) Go to the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory. Open and configure the igwb.ini filewith the vi tool.


#vi igwb.ini

Note:

For parameter configurations in igwb.ini, refer to Chapter 3. Save the igwb.ini file

after you finish. Close the vi program.

6) Repeat the above step 1) – 5) on igwb2.

7) Run the commands below on igwb1 or igwb2 to add the igwbapp service to the

SC.

#cd /opt


#cd /opt/hwigwb/util

#ksh ./register.ksh

8) Run the commands below on igwb1 or igwb2 to start the igwbapp service and

run the related program.


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-10

3) Run the commands below to back up igwb.ini on igwb1 and igwb2.

# cp /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini /opt/igwb.bak


directory on the maintenance terminal, and then transfer igwb _ install.tar.gz (in



5) Run the command below to check the resources are controlled by igwb1 or

igwb2.

# ps -ef |grep proc

6) Check if the processes are started, including cls_proc, om_proc, knl_proc, and

ap_proc.

7) If the above processes are started, then the related node controls the resources

and is activated to provide the application services.

8) Suppose igwb1 controls the resources. On igwb2, perform the operations below:

Go to the /opt directory and install the server software:

# cd /opt


Select the language:

The following information is displayed. Enter c for Chinese, and enter e for English.

Select the language to be installed (Chinese or English), <c/e>:


Select the bill protocol version:

1) --- R98 V7.7.0

2) --- R99 V3.a.0

3) --- R4 V4.4.0



Decide if bill consolidation is supported:

The installation wizard prompt if bill consolidation is supported by this version. Ifconsolidation is supported, enter y; if not, enter n.

Select the installed version , Consolidation or not , <y/n>:

Select sort type

1) --- Without Distinguishment

2) --- Distinguishment by record-type

3) --- Distinguishment by ChargingCharacteristics

Select the proper type.



7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-11

9) Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb2 or the client to switch the server from

the primary node to the secondary node

# scswitch -S -h xxx (xxx for source node, such as igwb1)

10) After a few minutes, check if the processes runs properly on the upgraded node

(igwb2).

11) Run the ps -ef | grep _proc command on igwb2. You may see the similar

information displayed below:

root 2188 2182 0 09:27:33 ? 0:01 ./cls_proc

root 2195 2188 0 09:27:34 ? 0:02 knl_proc

root 2196 2195 0 09:27:35 ? 0:01 ./om_proc

root 2197 2195 1 09:27:35 ? 11:30 ./ap_proc 1


Note:

If the installation is successful, go on with the steps below. If not, stop the upgrade

process, and then ask for technical support. If the problem cannot be solved, make

sure to roll back to the last version. For details, refer to7.4.1 “General Upgrade”.

Repeat steps8) to upgrade igwb1

12) Run the commands below to back up the product version on igwb1 and igwb2.

# cd /opt






Please enter the number of the operation from the menu:


displayed.


Backup complete !

7.4.2 Special Upgrade

Follow the steps below to perform a special upgrade. Note that the services can be

interrupted during the upgrade process.

1) Run the auxiliary upgrade command on the client.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-12

Caution:

For auxiliary upgrade on the client, refer to Part IV. You can continue the upgrade

process only if the auxiliary upgrade is executed successfully.

For upgrade installation, if the version type is changed, you need to rest the

igwb.ini file.

2) Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb2 to stop the igwbapp service and


# scswitch -n -j igwbapp

Caution:

The following steps 3)–7) must be performed on igwb1 and igwb2, and only if these

steps are finished, you can continue the upgrade process.

3) Go to the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory to back up the igwb.ini file.


# cp igwb.ini /opt/igwb.bak

Caution:

You may need to reset igwb.ini.


directory on the maintenance terminal, and then transfer igwb_ install.tar.gz (in



5) Run the commands below to install the software.

# cd /opt

# sh ./ igwb_install.sh

6) Select the options as required if prompted. If different options are selected in

pre-installation, make sure you reset the igwb.ini file and ignore step 6.

7) Go to the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory to restore the igwb.ini file you back up.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




7-13


# cp /opt/igwb.bak igwb.ini

8) Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb2 to start the igwbapp service.

# scswitch -e -j igwbapp

After a few minutes, check if the processes run properly on the upgraded node. Run

the ps -ef | grep _proc command on igwb1 and igwb2. You may see the similar

information below is only displayed on one node.

root 2188 2182 0 09:27:33 ? 0:01 ./cls_proc

root 2195 2188 0 09:27:34 ? 0:02 knl_proc

root 2196 2195 0 09:27:35 ? 0:01 ./om_proc

root 2197 2195 1 09:27:35 ? 11:30 ./ap_proc 1


7.5 Rolling Back to Last Version

Rollback is needed if update fails. Follows the steps below to perform the rollback

operation. Note that you can roll back only to the version before this upgrade.

1) Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb1 to stop the igwbapp and the related

application:

#scswitch -n -j igwbapp

2) Run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to roll back the last version:

# cd /opt







Select 2 to roll back the version. The information below is displayed:

Are you sure to roll back the version (yes or no), [y/n]:

Enter y. Rollback is complete if the following information is displayed.

Roll back now. Please wait ...

Roll back complete. Please make certain that igwb.ini is correct.

3) un the command below on igwb1 or igwb1 to start the igwbapp service and the



7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-1

Chapter 8 Installing CG9812 Client


This chapter introduces how to install the CG9812 client, including:

Installing Client Software

Upgrading Client

Checking Client Software

8.2 Installing Client Software

1) Copy the Client setup directory in the installation CD to a directory on the client.

Double-click \Client\SETUP.EXE. The Choose Setup Language dialog box is


Figure 8-1 Choose Setup Language interface

2) Select your desired language, and then click OK. Then, the Welcome dialog box

is displayed. See Figure 8-2.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-2

Figure 8-2 Welcome interface

3) Click Next. The Software License Agreement dialog box is displayed. See

Figure 8-3.

Figure 8-3 Software License Agreement interface

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-3

4) Click Yes to accept all the terms in the agreement. The User Information dialog

box is displayed. See Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 User Information interface

5) Enter the user name and company, and then click Next. The Select Program

Folder dialog box is displayed. See Figure 8-5.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-4

Figure 8-5 Select Program Folder interface

6) Click Next. The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed. See

Figure 8-6.

Figure 8-6 Choose Destination Location interface

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-5

7) To change the destination installation directory, click Browse to select your

desired directory. It is recommended to use the default directory. Click Next to

continue. The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed. In the box, your

settings are displayed. See Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7 Start Copying Files interface

8) Click Next to copy files. Then, the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed. See

Figure 8-8.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-6

Figure 8-8 Setup Complete interface

9) Click Finish. The CG9812 client is installed.

8.3 Upgrading Client1) Before upgrade, check the OS in use.

For Windows XP, back up the C:\windows\uiconfig.ini file.

For Windows 2000, back up the C:\winnt\uiconfig.ini file.

2) Select Start/Programs/iGateway Bill V200 Client/Uninstall System. The

Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed.

3) Click Yes. The Remove Programs From Your Computer dialog box is


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-7

Figure 8-9 Remove Programs From Your Computer

4) Then, the following dialog box is displayed. See Figure 8-10.

Figure 8-10 Uninstall complete

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




8-8

5) Click OK to finish the uninstall process.

6) Reinstall the client as described in 8.2 “Installing Client Software”.

7) Overwrite the uiconfig.ini file in the system directory with the backup one.

For Windows XP, overwrite the C:\windows\uiconfig.ini file. For Windows 2000, overwrite the C:\winnt\uiconfig.ini file.

The client is successfully upgraded.

8.4 Checking Client Software

To check if all the components are installed, follow the steps below:

In Windows 2000 or Windows XP, select Start/Programs/iGateway Bill V200 Client

to show the client components.

The client software includes the following components:

Help

iGWB Client

Uninstall System

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



HUAWEI


Part III Parameter Configuration

and System Commissioning

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part III Parameter Configuration and System CommissioningHUAWEI CG9812 Table of Contents


i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Parameter Configuration............................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Introduction to Parameter Configuration Console ............................................................. 1-1

1.2 Common Operations.......................................................................................................... 1-6

1.2.1 Logging in to Parameter Configuration Console..................................................... 1-6

1.2.2 Locking System....................................................................................................... 1-9

1.2.3 Adding Login ........................................................................................................... 1-9

1.2.4 Logging out Office................................................................................................. 1-10

1.2.5 Changing Password.............................................................................................. 1-11

1.2.6 Closing Parameter Configuration Console............................................................ 1-11

1.2.7 Viewing igwb.ini Parameter File............................................................................ 1-12

1.2.8 Adding Parameter Sections .................................................................................. 1-13

1.2.9 Deleting Parameter Sections ................................................................................ 1-15

1.2.10 Adding Parameters ............................................................................................. 1-16

1.2.11 Deleting Parameters ........................................................................................... 1-17

1.2.12 Modifying Parameter Value................................................................................. 1-18

1.2.13 Comparing Parameters of Different Offices ........................................................ 1-19

1.2.14 Saving the Configuration..................................................................................... 1-19

1.2.15 Loading the Parameter Configuration File .......................................................... 1-20

1.2.16 Obtaining the Configuration Information ............................................................. 1-20

1.2.17 Customized Setting............................................................................................. 1-21

1.3 Configuring the igwb.ini File............................................................................................. 1-22

1.3.1 Common Parameters............................................................................................ 1-23

1.3.2 Cluster Parameters ............................................................................................... 1-23

1.3.3 Access Point Parameters...................................................................................... 1-24

1.3.4 MML Server Parameters....................................................................................... 1-26

1.3.5 Log Parameters..................................................................................................... 1-28

1.3.6 Disk and File Control Parameters ......................................................................... 1-28

1.3.7 Network Backup Parameters ................................................................................ 1-29

1.4 CG9812 Dual-System Configuration Instance................................................................. 1-31

1.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................. 1-31

1.4.2 Configuration of IP Addresses of Network Adapters............................................. 1-32

1.4.3 Content of the igwb.ini Configuration Files ........................................................... 1-34

1.5 Port Usage....................................................................................................................... 1-37

1.6 Modifying Client Settings ................................................................................................. 1-38

1.7 Network Backup Configuration Instance ......................................................................... 1-39

1.7.1 Network Backup Instance ..................................................................................... 1-39

1.7.2 Simplest Backup Configuration............................................................................. 1-41

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part III Parameter Configuration and System CommissioningHUAWEI CG9812 Table of Contents


ii

1.7.3 Configuring Two Backup Tasks ............................................................................ 1-42

1.7.4 Configuring Two Backup Tasks with Different User Names and Passwords ....... 1-42

1.7.5 Configuring Defaulted Backup Mode .................................................................... 1-43

1.7.6 Configuring Backup Time List ............................................................................... 1-44

1.7.7 Configuring the Backup Start Time and End Time................................................ 1-45

1.7.8 Configuring One-off Backup List ........................................................................... 1-46

1.7.9 Configuring the Last File Backup .......................................................................... 1-46

1.7.10 Configuring the Deletion of Source File after Backup......................................... 1-47

1.7.11 Configuring the Deletion of the Second Bill Copy without Date Directory after

Backup ........................................................................................................................... 1-48

1.7.12 Configuring the Save Days for Files under the Destination Path........................ 1-49

1.7.13 Configuring Connection Retry Times When Backup Fails.................................. 1-49

1.7.14 Configuring the Source Backup Path for Status Files......................................... 1-50

1.7.15 Backup Precautions ............................................................................................ 1-51

Chapter 2 System Running .......................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 2-1

2.2 Program Startup on the CG9812 Server ........................................................................... 2-1

2.3 Program Close at the CG9812 Server............................................................................... 2-2

2.4 Running Status of the CG9812 Client ............................................................................... 2-2

Chapter 3 System Commissioning.............................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.2 Typical Networking in Packet Switched Domain ............................................................... 3-1

3.2.1 CG9812 and GSN................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2.2 CG9812 and Billing Center ..................................................................................... 3-2

3.2.3 CG9812 and NMS................................................................................................... 3-2

3.3 CG9812 and Other Devices............................................................................................... 3-3

3.3.1 CG9812 Receives CDRs ........................................................................................ 3-3

3.3.2 Billing Center Collects CDRs .................................................................................. 3-3

3.3.3 Connectivity Between NMS and CG9812 ............................................................... 3-3

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part III Parameter Configuration and System CommissioningHUAWEI CG9812

Chapter 1 Parameter Configuration


1-1


After installing the CG9812 server and client, you must configure CG9812 system

parameters.

This chapter introduces how to configure system parameters and provide configuration

examples through the following topics:

Introduction to Parameter Configuration Console

Common Operations

Configuring the igwb.ini

CG9812 Dual-System Configuration Instance Port Usage

Modifying Client Settings

Network Backup Configuration Instance

1.1 Introduction to Parameter Configuration Console

On the parameter configuration console, you can modify and maintain the igwb.ini file

(stored in the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory of the CG9812 server) of the

active/standby server remotely. In addition, you can compare the system parameters

between different office directions.

The parameter configuration console is a graphic user interface (GUI), as shown in

Figure 1-1.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-2

2

3

4

1

5

6

1.Main window 2.Menu bar 3.Toolbar

4.Navigation tree 5.Sub-window 6.Status bar

Figure 1-1 Interface of parameter configuration console

I. Main Window

The main window includes all elements, such as the topic, menu bar, navigation tree,

toolbar, and status bar.

II. Menu Bar

Menus are the entry to all functions and features of the parameter configuration

console. In terms of the functionality, the console sets the System, View, Tree Nodes,

Operation, and Help menus.

For details, see Table 1-1.

Table 1-1 Menu bar

Menu Sub-menu Function

Relogin To log out and log in as another user.

Addlogin

After logging in one office, log in to theparameter configuration console ofanother office. You can press F2 to dothis.

System

LogoutOffice:office 1'sname

Log out the parameter configurationconsole from the login office. "Office 1"is the office you first logged in.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-3


LogoutOffice:office 2'sname

Log out the parameter configurationconsole of the other office. When youlog in to the other office, the submenu"LogoutOffice: disconnection" changesinto "LogoutOffice: office 2". Here,"office 2" is the name of the other officeyou have logged in.

Lock SystemWhen you do not use the debuggingconsole, you can lock the system. Youcan also do this by pressing F12.

Change Password Change the config user password.

Exit Exit the system.

View parameter configinfo

View the parameter configurationinformation

ToolBar Show/Hide the tool bar

StatusBar Show/Hide the status bar.

View

Split Windows Split the current window.

ShrinkShrink the directory structure of thenavigation tree.

TreeNode

ExpandExpand the directory structure of thenavigation tree.

Save thecurrentconfig info

Save office1 configuration to the localdisk.

Save thecurrentconfig infoas

Save office1 configuration to the localor other disks.

Load configinfo fromlocal file

Get office1parameter configurationfrom the local disk.

Get the

current infoagain

Get office1 parameter configurationfrom the server again.

Get the lastconfig info

Get office1parameter configurationsubmitted last time from the server.

Office:office 1'sname

Get thedeliveryconfig info

Get the server delivery configurationfile from the server.

Operation

Office:office 2'sname

Save thecurrentconfig info

Save office2 configuration to the localdisk.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-4


Save thecurrent infoas

Save office2 configuration to the localor other disks.

Load currentconfig infofrom localfile

Get office2 parameter configurationfrom the local disk.

Get thecurrent infoagain

Get office2 parameter configurationfrom the server again.

Get the lastconfig info

Get office2 parameter configurationsubmitted last time from the server.

Get thedeliveryconfig info

Get the server delivery configurationfile from the server.

Save All Save all current parameter information.

Help TopicsOpen the help system, and help topicsregarding the parameter configurationconsole are displayed.Help

About ParaCfgDisplay the version information of theparameter configuration console.

III. Toolbar

The toolbar contains some shortcut icons for the frequently used menus shown in

Table 1-2.

Table 1-2 Shortcut buttons of the parameter configuration console

Shortcut Matched menu option Function

Relogin To log out and log in to as another user.

AddLogin

After logging in one office, log in to theparameter configuration console ofanother office. You can press F2 to dothis.

Save All Save all current parameter information.

Logout 1Log out the parameter configurationconsole from the login office. "Office 1" isthe office you first logged in.

Logout 2Log out the parameter configurationconsole from the login office. "Office 2" is

the office you second logged in.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-5

Shortcut Matched menu option Function

Lock SystemWhen you do not use the debuggingconsole, you can lock the system. Youcan also do this by pressing F12.

ExpandExpand all nodes under the igwb.ini node.

ShrinkCollapse all nodes under the igwb.ini node.

ExitExit the parameter configurationconsole.

Help Display the help information.

IV. Navigation Tree

The navigation tree shows the information of parameters in igwb.ini. The parameters

are arranged in different sections. The node in the first layer indicates the igwb.ini,

those in the second layer indicate parameter sections, and those in the third layer

indicate parameters, as shown in Figure 1-2.

File name

Parameter

name

Parameter

section

Figure 1-2 Structure of the navigation tree of the parameter configuration console

V. Sub-windows

Sub-windows include:

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-6

The sub-window on the upper right corner: the sub-window displayed after you

select the parameter section in the navigation tree and showing the parameter

values under the selected node

The sub-window on the lower right corner: the sub-window displayed after youselect the parameter domain in the navigation tree and showing the details of the

selected parameter

VI. Status Bar

The status bar shows the IP address, network connection status, login user name,

current parameter section of the CG9812 server connected with the parameter

configuration console.

1.2 Common Operations

On the GUI parameter configuration console, you can add, delete, or modify the

parameter configuration file igwb.ini on the system server. The default setup folder of

igwb.ini is /opt/igwb/config/ini.

1.2.1 Logging in to Parameter Configuration Console

I. Task Description

Log in to the parameter configuration console and configure the igwb.ini file.

II. Prerequisite

The parameter configuration process cfg_proc.exe of the CG9812 server is started.

The default setup folder of cfg_proc.exe is /opt/igwb.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-7

III. Operation Procedure

No. Operation Description

1

Double-click in the Bin directory of the CG9812 client, or choose Start > Programs > iGateway Bill V200 Client > Parameter Configuration to start the parameter configuration console. The User Login dialog isdisplayed.

2

Click Office Management to display the Office Management dialog.

In the Office Management dialog, enter the office parameters, includingoffice name, IP address, and type. Click Set to add it to the list box. ClickSave to finish this operation. The system returns to the User login dialog.

3

Enter the correct user name and password. Select the office to be managed.Click OK to log in to the parameter configuration console.

See Figure 1-1.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-8

IV. Parameters Related to the User login Dialog

Parameter Description Example

User name

Mandatory. This is the user name that the operatoruses to log in to the CG9812 parameterconfiguration console. The default value is thesystem administrator “admin”.

admin

Password

Mandatory. The password of the operator’saccount. The initial password is null. The passwordof the system administrator is at least eight digits,with letters and numbers mixed. The password of acommon operator is at least six digits, with lettersand numbers mixed.

-

OfficeMandatory. This refers to the office name of theCG9812 server that is maintained by the parameter

configuration console.

Shenzhen

IP address

Mandatory. For the parameter configurationconsole, the office IP address can be configured tothe actual IP address of any network adapter on theCG9812 server. When the CG9812 client andserver are installed on the same server, you canconfigure the IP address to 127.0.0.1.

129.2.1.3

GatewayOptional. The proxy function that the NMSprovides to the network elements.

-

Gateway IPOptional. Configure the IP address if you use thegateway.

129.2.1.15

V. Parameters Related to the Office Management Dialog


Office

Mandatory. Office refers to the CG9812server offices maintained by the CDRconsole. Set an office before logging in tothe Client.

Beijing

IP

Mandatory. For the parameterconfiguration console, the office IP addresscan be configured to the actual IP addressof any network adapter on the CG9812server. When the CG9812 client and theserver are installed on the same server, youcan configure the IP address to 127.0.0.1.

129.2.1.3

TypeMandatory. Select the office type to beadded.

iGWB

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-9

1.2.2 Locking System

I. Task Description

Lock the parameter configuration console to avoid unauthorized operations.

II. Prerequisite

None.



1

On the main interface, choose System > Lock System, or click in thetoolbar, or press F2.

Then, the Lock System dialog is displayed.

2If you want to return to the current system, enter the original password in theLock System dialog and click OK.

3If you want to log in to the system again, click Relogin in the Lock System dialog and click OK in the popup confirmation dialog.

1.2.3 Adding Login

I. Task Description

Log in to the parameter configuration consoles of two different offices at the same time

to compare their parameter information.

II. Prerequisite

You log in to the parameter configuration console of office 1. Before logging in to the

parameter configuration console of another office, you must configure another office.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-10



1

On the main interface, choose System > AddLogin, or click on thetoolbar.

The Add Login dialog is displayed.

2

Enter the correct user name and password, select the office to be managed,and click OK.

Then, you can log in to the parameter configuration console of the otheroffice.

1.2.4 Logging out Office

I. Task Description

Log out the office.

II. Prerequisite

None.



1

On the main interface, choose System > LogoutOffice: office name, or

click and . The system asks you whether to log out. Here,

indicates the office you first log in, and indicates to log out the officeyou log in later.

2 After confirmation, the system will close all windows of the current office.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-11

1.2.5 Changing Password

I. Task Description

Log in the parameter configuration console to change the password.

II. Prerequisite

Log in as admin or the config operator.



1

On the main interface, choose System > Change Password and the

Password dialog is displayed.

2 Enter a new password in New Password and Confirm Password. Click OK.

Note:

You can only change the config password of the current office.

1.2.6 Closing Parameter Configuration Console

I. Task Description

Close the parameter configuration console after you finish the operation tasks.

II. Prerequisite

None.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-12



1 On the main interface, choose System > Exit, or click . A dialog isdisplayed, asking you for confirmation.

2 Click Yes, and you can exit the console at once.

1.2.7 Viewing igwb.ini Parameter File

I. Task Description

View the igwb.ini parameter configuration on the CG9812 server in real time.

II. Prerequisite

None.



1On the main interface, choose View > Realtime Browse Parameter Configuration Information.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-13


2

Select different parameters on the left navigation tree.

Then, the current configuration is displayed on the right view window in real

time.

The upper right pane is open when you select a corresponding parametersection on the left navigation tree. This pane displays the value informationfor the parameter under the selected node on the tree.

The lower-right pane is open when you select a parameter domain on the leftnavigation tree. This lower pane displays the details of the selected currentparameter for your reference.

Note:

For the details of the igwb.ini parameter configurtion, see section 1.3 “Configuring the

igwb.ini File.” For more detailed parameter information, see Parameter Configuration

Console > Parameter Configuration Management > Browse igwb.ini Parameter of

the help system.

1.2.8 Adding Parameter Sections

I. Task Description

Add new parameter sections to igwb.ini.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-14

II. Prerequisite




1

On the main interface, right-click the igwb.ini node or a node in the secondlayer. Select Add Section.

2

The Add Section dialog is displayed.

Select the parameter section you want to add, and click OK. Afterconfirmation, the added parameter section appears in the navigation tree asa node.

For example, if the default configuration file igwb.ini has the parametersection [BackupTask1], you need to add the parameter section[BackupTask2] to configure two backup tasks

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-15


3Choose Operation > Office: office name > Save the Current Config Info.

The current parameter configuration is submitted to the server.

Note:

After modifying igwb.ini, you can restart the server by choosing Operation/Reset

iGWB on the CDR console or using the command # cd /opt/igwb and # ./killigwb.

You can validate the parameter setting by restarting the server process.

IV. Parameters Realted to the Add Section Dialog

Parameter Description

AccessPoint Access point parameter

AgentAlarm Alarm related parameter

Alarm Alarm related parameter

BackupTask Backup related parameter

CdrStat CDR statistic parameter

Channel- Disk related parameter

DiskFile Disk related parameter

Kernel Kernel parameter

License License related parameter

Link Heartbeat link parameter

Log Log related parameter

OM O&M parameter

Perf Performance related parameter

Resource Dual-system resource parameter

1.2.9 Deleting Parameter Sections

I. Task Description

Delete parameter sections in igwb.ini.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-16

II. Prerequisite




1On the main interface, right-click the igwb.ini node or a node in second layer.Select Delete Section. In the popup dialog, click Yes to confirm the deletion.


The current parameter configuration information is submitted to the server.

3 Restart the CG9812 server to validate the deletion.

1.2.10 Adding Parameters

I. Task Description

Add parameters to igwb.ini.

II. Prerequisite




1

On the main interface, right-click the node in second layer or in third layer.Select Add Parameter .

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-17


2

The Add Parameter dialog is displayed.

Select the parameter you want to add, and click OK. After confirmation, theadded parameter appears in the navigation tree as a node.

For example, add the parameter AlarmBoxUsingMode under the parametersection [Backup Task2].

3

Choose Operation > Office: office name > Save the Current Config Info.


4 Restart the CG9812 server to validate the addition.

1.2.11 Deleting Parameters

I. Task Description

Delete parameters in igwb.ini.

II. Prerequisite




1On the main interface, right-click the node in second layer or in third layer.Select Delete Parameter . In the popup dialog, click Yes to confirm the

deletion. The selected parameter node is deleted.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-18




3 Restart the CG9812 server to validate the deletion.

1.2.12 Modifying Parameter Value

I. Task Description

Change the value of a parameter in igwb.ini.

II. Prerequisite




1On the main interface, select the parameter node in the third layer you wantto modify. The upper right sub-window shows the parameter values underyour selected node.

2

Double-click the parameter value, and you can select or edit the parametervalues of your login office, such as the ServerNo under Common. The rightlower sub-window displays the detailed description of this parameter.



7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-19


4 Restart the CG9812 server to validate the change.

Note:

The parameters in igwb.ini are very important and cannot be changed at will.

1.2.13 Comparing Parameters of Different Offices

I. Task Description

Compare the parameter configuration of two offices.

On the parameter configuration console, you can log in to two offices at the same time.

This helps to compare their parameter configurations for maintenance.

II. Prerequisite




1Log in to the parameter configuration console of the first office. Then, log in tooffice 1.See section 1.2.1 “Logging in to Parameter Configuration Console.”

2

Log in to the parameter configuration console of the second office. Then, login to office 2.

See section 1.2.3 “Adding Login.”

3 After login, the configuration of both offices is displayed in the sub-window atthe same time. The admin can compare the parameter information ofdifferent offices.

1.2.14 Saving the Configuration

I. Task Description

Save the current configuration information.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-20

II. Prerequisite




1On the main interface, choose Operation > Office: office name > Save TheCurrent Config Info As.

2In the popup dialog, select the path and file name, and click Save.

The current configuration information is saved to the local disk.

1.2.15 Loading the Parameter Configuration File

I. Task Description

To update the current configuration, you can load the configuration information from the

local disk or other storage media.

II. Prerequisite

None.



1On the main interface, choose Operation > Office: office name > LoadConfig Info From Local File.

2Select a local file that you want to load.

The configuration information is obtained from the file.

1.2.16 Obtaining the Configuration Information

I. Task Description

Obtain the parameter configuration.

This task involves three topics:

Re-obtaining the current configuration file

Obtaining the configuration file of last operation

Obtaining the delivery configuration file

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-21

II. Prerequisite

None.


1) Re-obtaining the current configuration file


1On the main interface, choose Operation > Office: office name > Get TheCurrent Config Info Again.

2 Obtain the configuration information from the server.

2) Obtaining the configuration file of last operation


1On the main interface, choose Operation > Office: office name > Get TheLast Config Info.

2 Obtain the configuration information submitted last time from the server.

3) Obtaining the delivery configuration file


1

On the main interface, choose Operation > Office: office name > Get The

Base Config Info.

2 After confirmation, obtain the delivery configuration file igwb.ini from theserver.

1.2.17 Customized Setting

I. Task Description

Customize the interface display style of the parameter configuration console asdesired.

II. Prerequisite

None.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-22



1

On the parameter configuration console, select View, and then

Select View Parameter Config Info to view parameter information.

Select ToolBar . If there is a check mark "√" before the ToolBar option,the toolbar is shown. Otherwise, it is hidden.

Select StatusBar . If there is a check mark "√" before the StatusBar option, the status bar is shown. Otherwise, it is hidden.

Select Split Window to split the display proportion of the navigation treeon the left and the parameter display window on the right.

2

On the parameter configuration console, select Tree Nodes, and then

Select Shrink to collapse all nodes under the igwb.ini node.

Select Expand to expand all nodes under the igwb.ini node.

Note:

You can save common settings for next time use. In this case, you need not reset after

re-login.

1.3 Configuring the igwb.ini File

You need to configure the parameters after the primary/secondary CG9812 server

software is installed. The configuration file on the server is igwb.ini, and its default path

is /opt/igwb/config/ini. Go to the path and configure the igwb.ini file by using the

parameter configuration console or vi editor. Use the following commands:


#vi igwb.ini

When you install the server version, the application already configures mostparameters in this file by default, so you do not need to modify configurations usually.

The parameters that may need to be modified are as follows.

For the “optional” configuration item, you can use the default value without

modifications in general cases.

The “mandatory” configuration items must exist in the configuration file or must be

modified based on actual conditions.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-23

1.3.1 Common Parameters

The [Common] section defines the common parameters for the various processes on

the CG9812 server.


Table 1-3 Configuration of common parameters

Configurationitem

Configuration description

Recommended value

APCount

Mandatory. The number of access points..Each access point matches an access pointprocess on the CG9812 server, indicating theaccess point process to which the host system

connecting to the CG9812 server is accessed.Designed as a multi-access system, theCG9812 allows simultaneous access bymultiple switching systems of the same productor different products. Thus, in the real carriernetwork, the GSN of WCDMA and the MSC ofGSM may access to the CG9812 at the sametime. For the fixed accesses of 3G and GPRS,the APCount is 2.

1

ServerNO

Mandatory. Used to set the active (0) orstandby (1) state for the CG9812 server. According to the installation requirement, the

server installed in the lower position of the rackis the active one, while the one in the upperposition is the standby one.

0

ClusterMode

Mandatory. Indicating whether it is in the dualsystem mode (1: Dual system, 0: singlesystem). To guarantee reliability, the dualsystem mode is recommended.

1

Caution:

For the GSN, If multiple SGSNs or GGSNs access in the same process, APCount is 1

rather than the actual number of GSNs.This parameter usually uses the default value 1.

1.3.2 Cluster Parameters

The [Cluster] field is used to configure the information of the Sun Cluster and applicable

only on the Solaris platform.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-24


Table 1-4 Configuration of cluster parameters

Configurationitem


Recommendedvalue

CLUSTVERMandatory. Version number of SunCluster.

3.0

Note:

The CG9812 HA system server consists two minicomputers of SUN Netra and the SCs.

The related parameters are already configured before delivery and should not be

modified.

1.3.3 Access Point Parameters

The [AccessPoint1] field defines the access point features.


Table 1-5 Configuration of access point parameters

Configurationitem


Recommendedvalue

APType

Mandatory. The type of the access point. Youmust enter the parameter correctly. Theparameter value can be 0-128,1-MSC,2-STP,3-PS, 5-SoftSwitch.

Use the defaultvalue.

APName

Optional. The name of the access point. Anystring is allowed, but it is recommended toname the access point based on the product

name. In multi-access, the APName cannotbe identical.

Use the defaultinstallationvalue.

Configure basedon actualconditions.

Release

Optional. The release number of 3GPP.When APType is 3 (PacketSwitch), theparameter is mandatory; otherwise, it isoptional. The supported releases are R98,R99 and R4.

Use the defaultinstallation valueusually.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-25

Configurationitem


Recommendedvalue

FmtDll

Optional. The ASN.1 dynamic database used

by 3GPP. When APType is 3 (PacketSwitch),this item is mandatory. You can selectr98_760, r98_770, r99_360, r99_3a0 andr4_440.

Use the defaultinstallation valueusually.


SaveSecondOptional. Indicates whether the CG9812should save a copy for the final CDR files. (0:Not needed; 1: Needed).

1

LocalIpToEx

Mandatory. The local IP for communicationbetween the access point and the switch.When APType is 3 (PS), it indicates the IP

address where the access point is connectedwith GSN. This IP address must be setcorrectly, otherwise, starting the access pointprocess may fail. Do not modify this parameterunless in some special cases.

The defaultvalue is129.2.1.3.


LocalPortToEx

Optional. The local port number forcommunication with the switch. When the APType is 3 (PS), it refers to the UDP portnumber used to connect to GSN, 3386 bydefault. Do not modify this parameter unless insome special cases.

3386

BackSavePatchName

Optional. It can be configured to

“ASN1_NoLenIndicator” to remove the prefixinformation of the second copy stored in theback disk.

-

FinalFileMaxSize

Optional. The normal size of the originalCDR, which ranges from 3 MB to 20 MB, inKBs. If the value is smaller than the minimumvalue, use the minimum value. If the value isgreater than the maximum value, use themaximum value instead. Do not modify thisparameter unless in some special cases.

1024

OrigFileMaxSize

Optional. The maximum generation time of a

final CDR, which ranges from 5 to 3600, inseconds. If the value is smaller than theminimum value, use the minimum value, and ifthe value is greater than the maximum value,use the maximum value instead. Do notmodify this parameter unless in some specialcases.

3072

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-26

Configurationitem


Recommendedvalue

FinalFileMaxTime

Optional. The local IP for communicationbetween the access point and the switch.When APType is 4 (WCDMA), it indicates theIP address where the access point isconnected with GSN. This IP address must beset correctly. Otherwise, starting the accesspoint process may fail. Do not modify thisparameter unless in some special cases.

1800

MustMerge

Optional. It indicates whether to merge theCDRs, which is only valid in PS domainproducts (0: Not need; 1: Need). This item isdetermined based on the “merge or not”option. If yes, MustMerge is 1. If no,MustMerge is 0.

-

RedirAddress

Optional. It indicates the Redirection address.The CG9812 with this IP address will be usedwhen the current CG9812 sends a"Redirection Request" to the GSN. If thisparameter is configured as its default"0.0.0.0", the CG9812 will not send theredirection request to the GSN.

0.0.0.0

Note:

The IP address of LocalIpToEx should be the same as the IP address of ha-igwb1 in the

/etc/hosts file of igwb1 and igwb2. This IP address is the float IP address used to

connect with GSN.

For the configuration of the /etc/hosts file, see Part II “System Installation”.

1.3.4 MML Server Parameters

The [MML] field defines the network parameters for the communication between theCG9812 server and client. Because the CG9812 server and the CG9812 client

communicate in MML mode, and the MML server of the CG9812 server works as the

TCP/IP server of the client, you need to configure the TCP/IP address and port number

of the MML server.


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-27

Table 1-6 Configuration of MML server parameters

Configuration item Configuration description Recommended value

LocalIpToMMLClient

Mandatory. The IP address of

the MML server for connectingwith the MML client (namely, theCG9812 client) locally. The IPaddress is also the IP addressof the CG9812 for connectingwith the NMS.

Set it to the IP addressallocated to the clientduring network planning.

MaxConnectUserNumber

Optional. It indicates themaximum number of LMT toconnect with the CG9812.

10

PersistUser

Optional. The MML userinformation file. Do not modify

this parameter unless in somespecial cases.

/var/other/mml

LocalPortToCMOptional. The maintenanceport of the MML client, whichshould be 6000.

6000

LocalPortToAR

Optional. The alarming port ofthe MML client, which should be6001. Do not modify thisparameter unless in somespecial cases.

6001

LocalPortToRD

Optional. The debugging port

of the MML client, which shouldbe 6007. Do not modify thisparameter unless in somespecial cases.

6007

LocalPortToSynConf

Optional. The synchronousport of MML and M2000. Thedefault value is 6099. Do notmodify this parameter unless inspecial cases.

6099

MaxUserNumber

Optional. The maximumnumber of users allowed by

CG9812, ranging from 1 to 30.If the setting is beyond therange, select the maximumvalue.

30

MaxConnectUserNumber

Optional. The maximum linknumber on the MML client.Default: 5. Maximum: 30. If thesetting exceeds the valuerange, use the maximum value.(The client and debuggingconsole takes a single unit foreach)

10

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-28

Note:

The IP address of LocalIpToMMLClient should be the same as the IP address of

ha-igwb in the /etc/hosts file of igwb1 and igwb2. This IP address is the float IP

address used to connect the NMS and the maintenance console.

For the configuration of the /etc/hosts file, refer to Part II “System Installation”.

1.3.5 Log Parameters

The [Log] field is used to configure the log parameters. The parameters in this field are

optional.


Table 1-7 Configuring log parameters

Configurationitem


Recommendedvalue

LogRootDirOptional. The log storage directory.Do not modify it unless in specialcases.

/var/other/log

ArchiveDir Optional. The log archiving directory. /var/other/log_archive

ArchiveTimeOptional. The log archiving time, in aformat of HH:MM:SS. The defaultvalue is 2:00:00.

Configure based onactual conditions.

LogSaveDaysOptional. The save time of log files.The logs can be stored for six hours.

30

1.3.6 Disk and File Control Parameters

The [DiskFile] field configures the CDR storage path and disk alarming space. Because

these parameters are optional, you can directly use the default values.


Table 1-8 Configuration of disk and file parameters

Configuration item Configuration description

Recommendedvalue

MinDiskAlarmRoom Optional. The size of the front or back disktriggering a critical alarm (%).

5

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-29

Configuration item Configuration description

Recommendedvalue

MinDiskHandoverRoom

Optional. It indicates that the alarm for mediainsufficient space is generated and switchoverhappens if the rest space of theFrontSaveRootDir or BackSaveRootDirdirectory (or file system) is smaller than theMinDiskHandoverRoom . This parameter isrecommended to be 15% of the total disk space,in MBs.

500

FrontSaveRootDir

Optional. The root directory (or file system) forstoring the original CDRs. On UNIX, its path is /var/frontsave. It is related to the mountingpoint of the disk array in the operating system.Do not modify this parameter unless in some

special cases.

/var/frontsave

BackSaveRootDir

Optional. The root directory (or file system) forstoring the original CDRs. On UNIX, its path is /var/backsave. It is related to the mountingpoint of the disk array in the operating system.Do not modify this parameter unless in somespecial cases.

/var/backsave

FetchFileTimeOut

Optional. Indicating that the alarm for CDRfetching delay is generated if the CDR is notfetched by the billing center after the timeconfigured in FetchFileTimeOut. 10–120

minutes is recommended (It is often set to 30. 0indicates that no alarm occurs).

0

1.3.7 Network Backup Parameters

The [NetBackup] and [BackupTaskN] fields are related to backup over the network.

Through some configuration, you can back up the CDRs to the remote computer or

local disk by FTP. The backup mode supports the Push mode that the billing center

uses to collect CDRs. In this mode, the CG9812 works as the FTP client, the billing

center works as the FTP server, and the CG9812 sends CDRs to the billing center by

FTP. For details, see Table 1-9.

Table 1-9 Configuration of network backup parameters

Configurationitem


Recommended value

UserNameOptional. The FTP user name, which contains255 characters at most.

Configurebased onactualconditions.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-30

Configurationitem


Recommended value

DestHostIP

Optional. The IP address of the destinationhost. When network backup is used, thisparameter indicates the IP address of theremote host, and if it is set to “local”, it indicateslocal backup.

Configure

based onactualconditions.

LocalIPOptional. The IP address for FTPtransmission.

Billing center’sIP address isrecommended

BeforeEncode

Mandatory. It indicates that the password is setin plain text for the first time, and BeforeEncodemust be set to 1 when network backup is used. Afterwards, you can modify the password andBeforeEncode values manually. After the

CG9812 runs, it will encrypt the plain code tothe password and modify BeforerEncode to 0.

1

PasswordOptional. The password for logging in to thenetwork backup server. It is used together withUserName.

-

BackupTaskCount

Optional. The number of backup tasks. It depends.

SourceDirOptional. The path of the source files to bebacked up.

/var/frontsave

DestDir

Optional. The destination backup path. It can

be an FTP virtual directory when networkbackup mode is adopted.

/frontsave/backup

ReConnectInter val

Optional. The interval for reconnecting the FTPserver, which ranges from 1 to 3600, inseconds. It refers to the interval. It is the timebetween two successive connections in thenetwork backup mode.

300

SearchFilesInterval

Optional. The CG9812 adopts real-time filescanning, that is, backup immediately after anew file is detected. This parameter indicatesthe scanning frequency, in seconds. The value

ranges from 1 to 604800.

300

DelAfterBakOptional. Indicating whether to delete thesource files after backup (0: Not delete; 1:Delete).

0

DestFilesSaveDays

Optional. The save time of the destination file.If this parameter is set to a number greater than365, 365 is used. If it is set to 0, the systemdoes not support the remote deletion.

0

BakeupLastFileFile

Optional. Indicating to back up the last file (0:Not backup; 1: Backup). Note: This parameterof backing up original CDRs uses the default

value 0.

1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-31

Configurationitem


Recommended value

FileSaveDaysOptional. Indicating the save days of sourcefiles (0-Default; Maximum days=180). 0 means“Not delete”.

0

Note:

The parameters in [BackupTaskN] are related to those in [NetBackup]. The “N” in

[BackupTaskN] indicates the ID of backup task, and its parameter value is the value

of BackupTaskCount in [NetBackup]. For example, if BackupTaskCount is set to 2,

there are two backup tasks, and their parameter fields are [BackupTask1] and

[BackupTask2].

For each parameter, if it is configured in [BackupTaskN] (N indicates the backup

task No.), use the configuration in [BackupTaskN], otherwise use that in

[NetBackup].

When the network backup mode is adopted, the password is set in plain text for the

first time, and it will be automatically encrypted into password after the program

runs.

1.4 CG9812 Dual-System Configuration Instance

After the CG9812 servers are installed, the configuration parameters must be modified

based on the actual requirements of the installation site. Otherwise, the servers cannot

run normally. This section shows you a configuration instance in cluster mode by

introducing networking, IP address configuration principle, and the configuration file.

1.4.1 Networking Diagram

1) If SUN Netra 240 minicomputer is employed, the networking in cluster mode of the

CG9812 is shown in Figure 1-3.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-32

GSN

LAN Switch-1

LAN Switch-0

igwb2

bge3

bge0

bge1

bge2 To Office LAN

To BC

igwb1

bge3

bge0

bge1

bge2 To Office LAN

To BC

Figure 1-3 Networking in cluster mode (with Netra 240)

2) If SUN Netra 20 minicomputer is employed, the networking in cluster mode of the

CG9812 is shown in Figure 1-4.

GSN

LAN Switch-1

LAN Switch-0

igwb2

qfe3

qfe0

qfe1

qfe2 To Office LAN

To BC

igwb1

qfe3

qfe0

qfe1

qfe2 To Office LAN

To BC

Figure 1-4 Networking in cluster mode (with Netra 20)

1.4.2 Configuration of IP Addresses of Network Adapters

When the CG9812 is configured with dual-system, you need to set the float IP address

of the network adapter. In addition, you need to modify the IP address of the files

/etc/hosts and igwb.ini. The IP address of these two files must be the same.

Otherwise the system cannot work normally.

1) If SUN Netra 240 minicomputer is employed, the IP address planning in cluster

mode of the CG9812 is listed in Table 1-10.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-33

Table 1-10 IP address planning in cluster mode (with Netra 240)

Computer NameNetworkidentific

ation

Peerdevice

Fixed IPDefaultvirtual

IP

Actualvirtual IP

bge0For NMSand LMTconnection

129.1.1.1129.1.1.3

10.11.5.30

bge1/bge2

For GSNconnection

129.2.1.1129.2.1.3

202.11.6.20

Primarynode

igwb1

bge3For billingcenterconnection

129.3.1.1129.3.1.3

5.16.17.18

bge0For NMSand LMTconnection

129.1.1.2129.1.1.

310.11.5.30

bge1/bge2

For GSNconnection

129.2.1.2129.2.1.3

202.11.6.20

Secondarynode

igwb2

bge3For billingcenterconnection

129.3.1.2129.3.1.3

5.16.17.18

2) If SUN Netra 20 minicomputer is employed, the IP address planning in cluster

mode of the CG9812 is listed in Table 1-11.

Table 1-11 IP address planning in cluster mode (with Netra 20)

Computer NameNetworkidentific

ation

Peerdevice

Fixed IPDefaultvirtual

IP

Actualvirtual IP

qfe0For NMSand LMTconnection.

129.1.1.1

129.1.1.3

10.11.5.30

qfe1/qfe2

For GSNconnection.

129.2.1.1

129.2.1.3

202.11.6.20

Primarynode

igwb1

qfe3For billingcenterconnection.

129.3.1.1

129.3.1.3

5.16.17.18

qfe0For NMSand LMTconnection.

129.1.1.2

129.1.1.3

10.11.5.30

qfe1/qfe2

For GSNconnection.

129.2.1.2

129.2.1.3

202.11.6.20

Secondarynode

igwb2

qfe3For billingcenter

connection.

129.3.1.2

129.3.1.3

5.16.17.18

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-34

Note:

The network adapter naming mode of the services provided by Netra 240 and Netra

20 are different. The naming mode of Netra 240 is bge0 – bge3. The naming mode

of Netra 20 is qfe0 – qfe3.

The float IP address providing services by the CG9812 need to be modified based

on actual conditions. The IP address listed here is just an example.

1.4.3 Content of the igwb.ini Configuration Files

When the CG9812 runs in cluster mode, you need to configure the igwb.ini files for

both servers. The configuration content for the two CG9812 severs is different.

I. Configuration instance of igwb.ini file in primary node

[Common]

APCount = 1 /*Accesspoint count*/

ServerNo = 0 /*Server No., 0-Primary, 1-Secondary*/

ClusterMode = 1 /*Flag of cluster or not, 1-cluster mode,

0-single-host mode */

[Cluster]

CLUSTVER=3.0 /*version of SUN Cluster, the default value is 3.0*/

[AccessPoint1]

APType = 4 /*Accesspoint type, the value of APType is 4 when the

release is R4*/

APName = R4 /*Accesspoint name, need no modification*/

Release = R4 /*Release version of 3GPP, need no modification*/

LocalIpToEx = 129.2.1.3 /*Virtual IP to connect GSN, modify based on actual

virtual IP 202.11.6.20*/

LocalPortToEx = 3386 /*UDP port to connect GSN, need no modification*/

MustMerge = 1 /*whether merge the CDRs (0: Not need; 1: Need)*/

SaveSecond = 1 /*Save two shares for each final CDR file (0: Not

need; 1: Need)*/

RedirAddress = 0.0.0.0

[MML]

LocalIpToMMLClient =129.1.1.3 /* Virtual IP to connect client, modify based

on actual virtual IP 10.11.5.30*/

[NetBackup]

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-35

UserName=administrator /* FTP user name, modify based on actual condition*/

DestHostIP=5.16.17.20 /* Destination host IP address, modify based on actual

condition*/

LocalIP=129.3.1.3 /* Local host IP address, modify based on actual

virtual IP 5.16.17.18*/

Password=***** /*T FTP user password, modify based on actual condition */

BeforeEncode=1 /* Flag of indicating whether the password is encoded,

0 means yes, 1 means no */

BackupTaskCount=1 /*Total number of backup task, modify based on actual

condition */

[BackupTask1]

SourceDir=/var/backsave/R4 /* Source files' directory*/

DestDir=/home/huawei /R4 /* Destination directory*/

Note:

After the server software is installed, the parameters in bold in the configuration

instance must be modified:

For LocalIpToEx under [AccessPoint1], its float IP address connecting with GSN

should be set based on actual conditions, and should be the same as the IP address

of ha-igwb1 in the /etc/hosts file.

For LocalIpToMMLClient under [MML], its float IP address connecting with NMS

should be set based on actual conditions, and should be the same as the IP address

of ha-igwb in the /etc/hosts file.

The network backup parameters [NetBackup] and [BackupTask1] should be

modified based on actual conditions. For the configuration of network backup, refer

to 1.7 “Network Backup Configuration Instance”.

II. Configuration instance of igwb.ini file in secondary node

[Common]

APCount = 1 /*Accesspoint count*/

ServerNo = 1 /*Server No., 0-Primary, 1-Secondary*/

ClusterMode = 1 /*Flag of cluster or not, 1-cluster mode,

0-single-host mode */

[Cluster]

CLUSTVER=3.0 /*version of SUN Cluster, the default value is 3.0*/

[AccessPoint1]

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-36

APType = 4 /*Accesspoint type, the value of APType is 4 when the

release is R4*/

APName = R4 /*Accesspoint name, need no modification*/

Release = R4 /*Release version of 3GPP, need no modification*/

LocalIpToEx = 129.2.1.3 /*Virtual IP to connect GSN, modify based on actual

virtual IP 202.11.6.20*/

LocalPortToEx = 3386 /*UDP port to connect GSN, need no modification*/

MustMerge = 1 /*whether merge the CDRs (0: Not need; 1: Need)*/

SaveSecond = 1 /*Save two shares for each final CDR file (0: Not

need; 1: Need)*/

RedirAddress = 0.0.0.0

[MML]

LocalIpToMMLClient =129.1.1.3 /* Virtual IP to connect client, modify based

on actual virtual IP 10.11.5.30*/

[NetBackup]

UserName=administrator /* FTP user name, modify based on actual condition*/

DestHostIP=5.16.17.20 /* Destination host IP address, modify based on actual

condition*/

LocalIP=129.3.1.3 /*Local host IP address, modify based on actual virtual

IP 5.16.17.18*/

Password=***** /*FTP user password, modify based on actual condition*/

BeforeEncode=1 /*Flag of indicating whether the password is encoded,

0 means yes, 1 means no*/

BackupTaskCount=1 /*Total number of backup task, modify based on actual

condition*/

[BackupTask1]

SourceDir=/var/backsave/R4 /*Source files' directory*/

DestDir=/home/huawei /R4 /*Destination directory*/

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-37

Note:

After the server software is installed, the parameters in bold in the configuration

instance must be modified:

For ServerNo under [Common], set it to 1 representing the secondary node 1.

For LocalIpToEx under [AccessPoint1], set the float IP address connecting with

GSN based on actual conditions, and ensure that it is the same as the IP address of

ha-igwb1 in the /etc/hosts file.

For LocalIpToMMLClient under [MML], set the float IP address connecting with

NMS based on actual conditions, and ensure that it is the same as the IP address of

ha-igwb in the /etc/hosts file.

The network backup parameters [NetBackup] and [BackupTask1] should be

modified based on actual conditions.

1.5 Port Usage

The common ports and their functions are listed below.

I. Ports Used by CG9812

Table 1-12 lists the ports used by the CG9812 while the CG9812 runs normally.

Table 1-12 Ports used by the CG9812

Port Type Function

21 TCP FTP server (control channel)

20 TCP FTP server (data channel)

23 TCP telnet server

137 UDP NetBIOS name service

138 UDP NetBIOS datagram service

161 UDP SNMP

162 UDP SNMP

II. Ports Used by Application

Table 1-13 lists the ports used by the application while the CG9812 runs normally.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-39

Note:

MAINTAINPORT is the configuration item of the maintenance port. DEBUGPORT is

the configuration item of the debugging port.

Make sure that the configuration of the MAINTAINPORT port must be the same as

that of the corresponding port of the server. For server configuration, refer to the

value of LocalPortToCM under [MML] in the igwb.ini configuration file.

1.7 Network Backup Configuration Instance

Network backup is an important function of the CG9812. This section provides you with

some network backup instances for reference. The following parameters are all out ofthe configuration file of igwb.ini. This chapter mainly introduces the following contents:

Network backup instance

Description for backup parameters

Backup precautions

1.7.1 Network Backup Instance

I. Task Description

This section provides a full-process operation instance about the complete network

backup parameter configuration.

II. Operation Procedure

1) Set up the FTP server in the Windows 2000 operating system:

No. Operation Steps

1Run Start/Programs/Administrative Tools/Internet Service Manager tocreate an FTP site.

2 Click New FTP Site Guide to configure the parameters. The IP address isconfigured with the local IP address. TCP port is 21. Then, set the FTP maindirectory to read & write.

3

After the FTP is created, configure other parameters in the Open SiteProperty window. Disable anonymous connection. Add an FTP useraccount. Select UNIX for catalog list style. Use the default values for otheroptions.

4 After the configuration is complete, log in to the FTP site. Check if the sitecan be logged in, written, accessed, and operated by the added useraccount.

5If login is successful, the site is writable, and files and catalog can be

accessed, then the FTP server is set up successfully.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-40

2) Modify the igwb.ini file by using the vi editor and configure the network backup

parameters.

No. Operation Steps

1

Use the following command to log in to the active and standby nodes of theCG9812, for example, igwb1.

# telnet igwb1

2Enter the correct user name and password to log in to igwb1, and thefollowing prompt is displayed: root@igwb1#.

3

Go to the directory /opt/igwb/config/ini, and edit the igwb.ini file by usingthe vi editor.

root@igwb1#cd /opt/igwb/config/ini

root@igwb1#vi igwb.ini

4Modify the [NetBackUp] field, change or add the parameters DestHostIP,LocalIP, UserName, PassWord, BeforeEnCode, and BackUpTaskCount based on the actual conditions.

5

Modify [BackUpTask1] field, and then configure the items SourceDir andDestDir (in UNIX path format) based on the actual conditions.

For example:

[NetBackUp]

UserName= administrator ; use network backup login user name

DestHostIP=10.70.141.160 ; Backup destination IP

LocalIP=10.70.141.170 ; Backup local IP

Password=****** ; Use network backup login user password (casesensitive)

BeforeEncode=1 ; 1 is set for the first time. The CG9812encodes the password after started. Then, the value becomes 0. If thepassword is changed, set it to 1 and reset the CG9812.

BackupTaskCount=1 ; Total number of backup tasks

[BackupTask1]

SourceDir=/var/backsave/R4 ; Source path for the backup task

DestDir=/home/huawei /R4 ; Destination path for the backup task

6

(Optional) If there are two or more backup tasks, you can add the parametersection [BackUpTaskN] (N for sequence number of the backup task) to theparameter configuration console. Then add and configure SourceDir andDestDir based on the actual conditions.

7Other network backup parameters are optional or configured by default. Aftermodifications, enter ”wq!” to exit from the vi editor.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-41

Note:

When the billing center works in UNIX, the users opened to the CG9812 are not the

root users in general cases, so directories must be configured with full names.

For the usage of vi commands, refer to common vi commands in Appendix A

“Common UNIX Commands”.

3) Reset the CG9812 server to activate the changed parameters.

No. Operation steps

1

Run the CG9812 server process, and then log in to the CDR console.Double-click Frame.exe in the Bin directory on the CG9812 client or clickStart/Programs/iGateway Bill V200 Client/iGWB Client to open the CDR

console interface.

2On the main interface of the CDR console, choose Operation > ResetiGWB.

3 In the popup dialog, click Yes to reset the CG9812 server process.

4) Open the debugging console to view the network backup process of a single task.

No. Operation Steps

1

Make sure the debugging process runs normally on the CG9812 Clientbefore login. Double-click debugws.exe in the installation directory Bin of

the CG9812 or choose Operation > Debug on the main interface of theCG9812 Client to open the Login dialog.

2Enter the correct user name and password. Select the office to be managed.Click OK to log in to the debugging console.

3

Choose Debug > Browse Debug Message or click on the tool bar todisplay the Debuginfo window. In the Debuginfo window, you can view thereal-time debugging information and the related message on backupsuccess.

5) Check if the backup is succeeful and correct in the destination path.

1.7.2 Simplest Backup Configuration

I. Task Description

Configure the simplest backup task.

II. Configuration instance

[NetBackup]

UserName=administrator

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-42

DestHostIP=10.70.141.160

LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=

BeforeEncode=1 ; 1 is set for the first time. The CG9812 encodes the

password after it is started. Then, the value becomes 0. If the password is

changed, set it to 1 and reset the CG9812.


[BackupTask1] ; The first backup task

SourceDir=/var/backsave/R4 ; Source path of the backup task

DestDir=/home/huawei/R4 ; Destination path of the backup task

1.7.3 Configuring Two Backup Tasks

I. Task Description

Configure two backup tasks with the same user name and password.

II. Configuration Instance

[NetBackup]



LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=








[BackupTask2] ; The second backup task

SourceDir=/var/backsave/Second/R4 ; Source path of the backup task


1.7.4 Configuring Two Backup Tasks with Different User Names and

Passwords

I. Task Description

Configure two backup tasks with different user names and passwords.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-43


[NetBackup]



UserName=root


LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password= BeforeEncode=1 ; 1 is set for the first time. The CG9812 encodes

the password after it is started. Then, the value becomes 0. If the password

is changed, set it to 1 and reset the CG9812.



[BackupTask2] ; The second backup task



LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=




SourceDir=/var/backsave/Second/R4 ; Source path of the backup task


Note:

Both 1.7.2 “Simplest Backup Configuration” and 1.7.4 “Configuring Two Backup Tasks

with Different User Names and Passwords” belong to the configuration of different

auto-backup modes.

1.7.5 Configuring Defaulted Backup Mode

I. Task Description

Configure the default backup mode: back up the files every 10 minutes.

The backup mode is controlled by the following two parameters (values given by

default):

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-44

SearchFilesInterval =300; The search interval (in seconds) when the backup module

backs up the files

ReConnectInterval = 300; The time interval (by second) when the FTP Server is

reconnected


[NetBackup]



LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=


password after it is started. Then, the value becomes 0. if the password is



SearchFilesInterval =300 ; The search interval (in seconds) when the backup

module backs up the files

ReConnectInterval = 300 ; The time interval (by second) when the FTP Server

is reconnected




1.7.6 Configuring Backup Time List

I. Task Description

Set the backup time list. The daily listed time is backed up. If there is no listed time, the

system will wait.

The backup is controlled by the parameter backup_list_time=HH:MM:SS,HH:MM:SS .

The format is hour:minute:second. Different time is separated by comma. This

parameter is optional. If you configure this parameter, then the backup mode will have

the highest priority.


[NetBackup]



LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-45






backup_list_time=HH:MM:SS,HH:MM:SS ; Hour:minute:second



1.7.7 Configuring the Backup Start Time and End Time

I. Task Description

Set the backup start time and end time. The backup task is started only during this

period.

The backup is controlled by the following two parameters (values are given by default).

These parameters are optional. The backup priority is lower than that of backing up

time list.

backup_begin_time=00:00; Backup task start time. The format is MM:SS.

backup_end_time = 23:59; Backup task end time. The format is MM:SS.


[NetBackup]



LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=

BeforeEncode=1 ; 1 is set for the first time. The CG9812 encodes

the password after it is started. Then, the value becomes 0. if the password

is changed, set it to 1 and reset the CG9812.



backup_begin_time=00:00 ; Backup task start time. The format is MM:SS.

backup_end_time = 23:59 ; Backup end time. The format is MM:SS.



7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-46

1.7.8 Configuring One-off Backup List

I. Task Description

One-off backup list indicates that the time point is deleted after the files are backed up

at this time point, and the related configuration items in igwb.ini are also removed. The

backup is controlled by the following parameter:

once_bk_list_time = YYYY-mm-DD HH:MM:SS, YYYY-mm-DD HH:MM:SS. The format

is year-month-day hour:minute:second. Different time is separated by comma. This

parameter is optional. The backup priority is lower than that of configuring the

backup start time and end time.


[NetBackup]



LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=






once_bk_list_time = YYYY-mm-DD HH:MM:SS ; The format is year-month-day

hour:minute:second.



1.7.9 Configuring the Last File Backup

I. Task Description

This configuration aims at backing up the last file in the backup source directory. For a

Windows platform, it means that you can backup the last file in the directory of

/var/frontsave when it is generated. It is unnecessary to wait till the last file is closed

(This is because the size is restricted before the file in the /var/frontsave directory of

the front save disk is closed.) The configuration is controlled by the following

parameters (values are given by default):

BackupLastFile = 0 ; Flag of backing up the last file (0-no; 1-yes)

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-47

This parameter can be used together with other parameters.


[NetBackup]



LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=








BackupLastFile = 0 ; Flag of backing up the last file (0-no; 1-yes)

1.7.10 Configuring the Deletion of Source File after Backup

I. Task Description

Delete the source file after it is successfully backed up. The configuration is controlledby the following parameter (by default):

DelAfterBak = 0 ; Flag of deleting the source file after backup (0-no; 1-yes)



[NetBackup]



LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=








7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-48

DelAfterBak = 0 ; Flag of deleting the source file after backup (0-no;

1-yes)

1.7.11 Configuring the Deletion of the Second Bill Copy without Date

Directory after Backup

I. Task Description

Delete the files in the second directory of the back save disk (UNIX /var/backsave).

The configuration is controlled by the following parameter:

FileSaveDays = 0 ;#ave days for the source file (0-Default; Max.=180). 0 means “Not

delete”.

Caution:

This parameter is only applicable to the second bill copy without date directories. In

addition, only the files in the directory are deleted, but the directory is not deleted.

If the source directory is backed up before it is deleted, because it is backed up by

two backup tasks, you must configure the same FilePoolID for the directory to

prevent it from being deleted by one task before the other task backs it up.

This parameter can be used together with other parameters. In addition, SourceDir

must be in the directory of Second.


[NetBackup]



LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=








7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-49

FileSaveDays = 0 ; Save days for the source file (0-Default; Max.=180).

0 means “Not delete”.

1.7.12 Configuring the Save Days for Files under the Destination Path

I. Task Description

Delete the files in the specific directory of DestDir . The configuration is controlled by

the following parameter:

DestFilesSaveDays = 0 ; save days for the files under the destination path. If it is

configured with more than 365 days, the value is 365; if it is configured with 0, then the

files should not be deleted.



[NetBackup]



LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=








DestFilesSaveDays = 0 ; save days for the files under the destination path.

If it is configured with more than 365 days, the value is 365; if it is configured

with 0, then the files should not be deleted.

1.7.13 Configuring Connection Retry Times When Backup Fails

I. Task Description

When a file fails to be backed up, you can configure the retry time within a backup cycle.

The configuration is controlled by the following parameter:

BackupRetryTimes = 2 ; connection retry times when backup fails (0–5)


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-50


[NetBackup]



LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=





BackupRetryTimes = 2 ; Connection retry times when backup fails (0-5)




1.7.14 Configuring the Source Backup Path for Status Files

I. Task Description

Configure the backup path for the status files. The configuration is controlled by the

following parameter:

/var/other/StatusFile/Status ; Source backup path for Windows status files


[NetBackup]



LocalIP=10.70.141.170

Password=





StatusBackupSrcDir= /var/other/StatusFile/Status ; Save path for the status

file of the backup module




7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





1-51

1.7.15 Backup Precautions

I. Setting the Local Backup Function

The backup function of the CG9812 includes network backup and local backup. For

local backup, configure DestHostIP=Local. Other configuration is the same as that of

network backup.

II. Setting the Backup FTP

If the CG9812 provides the network backup function, it must be configured with the FTP

server. This is because the CG9812 is the Client of the FTP server in backup.

Note: Backup can be successful only if the full path for DestDir is configured for some

FTP servers. For example, for the FTP Server-U, if /var/backup is set to the FTP

directory, you should follow the following settings for DestDir: DestDir = /backup/R4.

III. Setting the Backup Source Path

When you configure the backup source path and the backup destination path, note that

the source path can be configured to the second-level directory only. If you want to

backup the file /var/backsave/R4/200040115/b000000001.dat, the path /var

/backsave/R4 is the shortest path that can be configured to backup the file, or you can

configure the path /var/backsave/R4/200040115.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part III Parameter Configuration and System CommissioningHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 2 System Running


2-1

Chapter 2 System Running

2.1 Introduction

This section introduces the running of the CG9812 server, including:

Program Startup on the CG9812 Server

Program Close at the CG9812 Server

2.2 Program Startup on the CG9812 Server

Programs on the CG9812 server are started automatically when the operating system

(OS) is started. Program startup does not need manual operation and can be

automatically restarted after the exceptional exit. (The prerequisite is that the CG9812

configurations are correct).

Program startup sequence is as follows:

1) After the startup of Solaris OS, the SC system is automatically started.

2) The SC starts the ha script group (that is, the scripts after installing sc30_script.tar)

that manages the igwbapp resource.

3) The SC system starts the cluster process (cls_proc) by using the ha scripts.

4) The cluster process starts the Kernel process (knl_proc).

5) The Kernel process sequentially starts the operation and maintenance process

(om_proc) and access point process (ap_proc).

Note:

Execute steps 3) - 5) sequentially. Any failure in these steps may lead to the CG9812

startup failure and active/standby switchover.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-2

2.3 Program Close at the CG9812 Server

Programs at the CG9812 server are stopped in the following sequence:

1) The cluster process (cls_proc) receives the exit signal.

2) The cluster process sends the exit command to the Kernel process (knl_proc).

3) The Kernel process receives the exit command and sends the exit command to

operation and maintenance process (om_proc) and access point process

(ap_proc).

4) The operation and maintenance process (om_proc) and access point process

(ap_proc) exit after receiving the command.

5) The Kernel process (knl_proc) exits.

6) The cluster process (cls_proc) exits.

The CG9812 server uses the dual-system. On the UNIX platform, the active node

(active server) runs a cls_proc, a knl_proc, an om_proc, and one or multiple ap_proc

processes according to the access point number. These processes cannot run on the

standby node (standby server). You can use the command ps -ef | grep _proc on two

nodes respectively to view the running status of processes.

Note:

For the directory structure and system manitenance of the CG9812, refer to Part V“System Maintenance".

2.4 Running Status of the CG9812 Client

You can log in to the CG9812 server through the CG9812 Client to perform daily

management and maintenance. The CG9812 client consists of the CDR console,

system debugging console.

For detailed operations on the client, refer to Part IV “Basic Operations” or CG9812

Online Help.

I. Operation Procedure

To start the bill console, do as follows:

1) Ensure that processes of the active CG9812 server are already started. Log in to

the active CG9812 server and use the command ps -ef | grep _proc to see

whether the cls_proc, knl_proc, om_proc, and ap_proc processes are started.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-3

2) On the CG9812 client, choose Start > Programs > iGateway Bill V200 Client >

iGWB Client, or double-click Frame.exe in the Bin directory under the installation

directory of the CG9812 Client. Then the User Login dialog is displayed, as


Figure 2-1 User Login

3) Click Office Management to open the Office Management dialog, as shown in

Figure 2-2. In the dialog, enter the office parameters, including office name, IP

address, and type. Click Set to add it to the list box. Click Save to complete this

operation. The system will return to the User login dialog.

Figure 2-2 Office management

4) In the User Login dialog, enter the correct user name, password, and set the

office to be managed. Then click OK. If the login is successful, the main interface

of the CDR console is displayed.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-4

II. Parameter Description

1) Parameters in the User Login dialog

Parameter Operation Example

User name

Mandatory. This is the user name that theoperator uses to log in to the CG9812 parameterconfiguration console. The default value is thesystem administrator “admin”.

admin

User Pwd

Mandatory. The password of the operator’saccount. The initial password is blank. Thepassword of the system administrator is at least 8digits, with letters and numbers mixed. Thepassword of a normal operator is at least 6 digits,with letters and numbers mixed.

-

OfficeMandatory. This refers to the office name of theCG9812 server that is maintained by theparameter configuration console.

Shenzhen

Office IP

Mandatory. It is the IP address used by theCG9812 server to connect with the CG9812 client(or the NMS). It must be consistent with theLocalIpToMMLClient value under the MML configuration item in the igwb.ini file.

129.3.1.1,modify itbased onactualcondition.

Use GatewayOptional. The proxy function that the NMSprovides the network elements.

-

Gateway IP Optional. Configure the IP address if you use thegateway.

129.1.1.8,

modify itbased onactualcondition.

Note:

The default user name and password of the CG9812 client are “admin” and null

respectively. You need to change the password of the administrator immediately.

Configure the office direction before you log in to the client.

Hereinafter, the mark “-” in a table means an example is omitted.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-5

2) Parameter description of [Office Management] Interface

Parameter Operation Example

Office

Mandatory. Office refers to the CG9812 server

offices maintained by the CDR console. Set anoffice before logging in to the Client.

Beijing

IP

Mandatory. For the parameter configurationconsole, the office IP can be configured with theactual IP address of any network adapter on theCG9812 server.

10.70.141.11

Type Mandatory. Select the office type to be added. iGWB

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



Chapter 3 SystemCommissioning


3-1

Chapter 3 System Commissioning

3.1 Introduction

After installing the CG9812, you must commission the system to check the connectivity

between the CG9812 and the GSN, billing center, and NMS.

Commissioning includes:

Typical Networking in Packet Switched Domain

CG9812 and Other Devices

3.2 Typical Networking in Packet Switched Domain

The CG9812 is an independent unit in GPRS/UMTS. Major network elements (NEs) in

the CG9812 networking include the GSN (SGSN and GGSN), M2000, and billing

center.

Figure 3-1 shows the networking relationship between the CG9812 and the GSN

(SGSN and GGSN), NMS, and billing center in GPRS/UMTS.

CG9812

BC

GSN(GGSN/SGSN)

MML FTP/FTAM

Ga

M2000

OSS

Core Network

Figure 3-1 CG9812 networking in GPRS/UMTS

3.2.1 CG9812 and GSN

In general, the CG9812 and GSN (GGSN/SGSN) are in the same equipment room.

They connect to each other through LAN (or WAN) and communicate by using the

standard Ga interface (over UDP/IP) to transfer bills. They also follow the GTP

prescribed by 3GPP. Ensure the following:

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





3-2

The network between the CG9812 and GSN are connected normally.

The bill protocols of the sender (GSN) and the receiver (the CG9812) are the

same. For example, the bill protocols are all in the form of R98, or R99, or R4.

The Ga interface settings are the same and the IP address and port in GSN forsending bills are the same as those in the CG9812.

3.2.2 CG9812 and Billing Center

Billing center connects with the CG9812 through LAN/WAN. The CG9812 is the

passive party when it uses FTP (in PULL mode) or FTAM, that is, bill collector actively

logs in to the CG9812 to collect bills. Therefore, accounts should be added on the

CG9812 for the bill collector.

I. Setting Directories for Billing Center Users

If a bs user is opened for the billing center, and the directory of the second final CDR to

set is /var/backsave/Second, do as follows:

1) The “root” user logs in to the CG9812 server with disk array (active CG9812

server).

2) Add the bs user: #useradd -d /var/backsave/Second bs.

3) Set a password for the bs user: #passwd bs. Enter the password and confirm it.

4) Check the settings and log in to the CG9812 server as the bs user to validate

whether CDRs can be taken or deleted successfully.

II. Setting Static Routing

You can create a file under the /etc/rc3.d directory of igwb1 and igwb2 and add

routings in the file.

Configure as follows:

1) #cd /etc/rc3.d

2) #vi S99CGENV /*”S” is in capital*/

3) File content: route add local IP address/subnet mask

4) Assign authority for users to execute the file: #chmod 755 S99CGENV5) Restart the system and perform necessary validations.

3.2.3 CG9812 and NMS

M2000 is the NMS of the GPRS/UMTS network structure. The CG9812 provides

M2000 with the NM interface in MML to manage the CG9812 alarms. The CG9812

communicates with M2000, or local maintenance terminal (LMT) on the CG9812 client

by using the MML interface.

Ensure that the network between the CG9812 and NMS are normal.

Ensure that their maintenance port settings are the same.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812





3-3

Note:

The maintenance port of the CG9812 does not need to be reset without special

requirpements or changes.

When you need to reset it, see 1.6 “Modifying Client Settings”.

3.3 CG9812 and Other Devices

When the CG9812 runs normally, check the connectivity between the CG9812 and

other devices.

3.3.1 CG9812 Receives CDRs

After SGSN or GGSN sends the generated CDRs, you can log in to the CG9812 server

from the LMT of the CG9812 client. In the original CDR navigation tree, check whether

there are CDRs send from GSN. If there are CDRs, it proves that no error exists on the

Ga interface.

3.3.2 Billing Center Collects CDRs

After the CG9812 generates the final CDRs (It takes some time to transfer the original

CDRs to the final CDRs), you can see the final CDRs on the LMT of the client. Then

check whether the billing center can take the open CDRs normally.

3.3.3 Connectivity Between NMS and CG9812

To check whether the LMT of the CG9812 client can be logged on and work normally,

check CDRs and version numbers.

To check whether M2000 can be connected normally and whether alarms are normal,

do as follows:

1) On the CG9812 client, log in to the CG9812 with an incorrect password for three

times sequentially.

2) The CG9812 generates an event alarm of illegal login.

3) Check whether the alarm is displayed on M2000.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



HUAWEI


Part IV Basic Operations

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part IV Basic OperationsHUAWEI CG9812 Table of Contents


i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Quick Start.................................................................................................................... 1-1


1.2 Introduction to CG9812 Client ........................................................................................... 1-1

1.3 GUI of the CDR Console ................................................................................................... 1-2

1.4 GUI of the Debugging Console.......................................................................................... 1-6

Chapter 2 Common Operations...................................................................................................2-1


2.2 Logging in to the CDR Console ......................................................................................... 2-1

2.3 Locking CDR Console ....................................................................................................... 2-3

2.4 Logging out of the CDR Console....................................................................................... 2-3

2.5 Closing the CDR Console.................................................................................................. 2-4

2.6 Customizing the Layout ..................................................................................................... 2-4

2.7 Managing Operators .......................................................................................................... 2-6

2.7.1 Adding an Operator................................................................................................. 2-6

2.7.2 Deleting an Operator............................................................................................... 2-8

2.7.3 Modifying an Operator............................................................................................. 2-8

2.8 Managing Offices............................................................................................................. 2-10

2.8.1 Adding an Office.................................................................................................... 2-10

2.8.2 Deleting an Office.................................................................................................. 2-11

2.8.3 Modifying an Office ............................................................................................... 2-12

2.9 Customizing the System.................................................................................................. 2-13

2.9.1 Customizing Timeout Setting ................................................................................ 2-13

2.9.2 Customizing Lock Time......................................................................................... 2-14

2.10 Managing CDRs.............................................................................................................2-15

2.10.1 Browsing CDRs by Type..................................................................................... 2-15

2.10.2 Browsing CDRs by Format.................................................................................. 2-18

2.10.3 Browsing CDRs by Multiple Conditions .............................................................. 2-20

2.10.4 Saving CDR Information ..................................................................................... 2-22

2.10.5 Printing a CDR .................................................................................................... 2-22

2.11 Managing Performance ................................................................................................. 2-23

2.11.1 Querying System Performance Status................................................................ 2-25

2.11.2 Setting State Query Properties ........................................................................... 2-27

2.11.3 Clearing State Information .................................................................................. 2-28

2.12 Managing Logs .............................................................................................................. 2-29

2.12.1 Browsing Logs..................................................................................................... 2-29

2.12.2 Saving Logs......................................................................................................... 2-32

2.12.3 Clearing Logs ...................................................................................................... 2-34

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part IV Basic OperationsHUAWEI CG9812 Table of Contents


ii

2.12.4 Printing Logs ....................................................................................................... 2-34

2.13 Manual Switchover ........................................................................................................ 2-35

2.14 Auxiliary Upgrade........................................................................................................... 2-36

2.15 Logging in to the Debugging Console ........................................................................... 2-37

2.16 Exiting the Debugging Console ..................................................................................... 2-38

2.17 Managing Debugging Messages ................................................................................... 2-39

2.17.1 Browsing Debug Messages ................................................................................ 2-40

2.17.2 Saving Debug Messages .................................................................................... 2-41

2.17.3 Masking the Debug Level.................................................................................... 2-42

2.17.4 Setting Debug Colors.......................................................................................... 2-44

2.18 Managing Protocol Messages ....................................................................................... 2-45

2.18.1 Browsing Protocol Messages.............................................................................. 2-46

2.18.2 Saving Protocol Messages.................................................................................. 2-46

2.19 Managing Workflow Messages...................................................................................... 2-47

2.19.1 Browsing Workflow Messages ............................................................................ 2-48

2.19.2 Saving Workflow Messages................................................................................ 2-49

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part IV Basic OperationsHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 1 Quick Start


1-1

Chapter 1 Quick Start


This section introduces the CG9812 client interfaces and guides you to use the online

help system, to get familiar with the CG9812 quickly and includes the following

contents:

Introduction to CG9812 Client

GUI of the CDR Console

GUI of the Debugging Console

1.2 Introduction to CG9812 Client

The CG9812 client consists of the CDR console, system debugging console, and the

parameter configuration console. Their functions, access methods, and related

reference chapters are indicated as shown in Table 1-1.

Table 1-1 Brief introduction to CG9812 client

No. CDR console

System debuggingconsole

Parameterconfiguration

console

FunctionDescription

The CDR console isthe maintenanceconsole of theCG9812 system. Youcan execute variousoperations throughthe CDR console,including CDRquerying andbrowsing, CDR

statistics, systemperformancemonitoring, logmanagement, usermanagement, and soon.

Through the systemdebugging console,you can query thesystem debuggingmessages, protocoltrace messages,and serviceworkflow trace

messages, tomonitor the runningof the system in realtime.

Through theparameterconfiguration console,you can remotelymodify and maintainthe configuration fileigwb.ini of the server

and compare thesystem parameters ofdifferent offices to helpusers in O&M.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-2

No. CDR console

System debuggingconsole

Parameterconfiguration

console

Entry 1

Double-clickFrame.exe in the Bindirectory under theinstallation directoryof the CG9812 Client.

Double-clickdebugws.exe in theBin directory underthe installationdirectory of theCG9812 Client.

Double-clickParaCfg.exe in theBin directory underthe installationdirectory of the iGWBClient.

Entry 2

SelectStart/Programs/iGat

eway Bill V200Client/CDRConsole.

On the maininterface of the CDRconsole, selectServices/Debug, or

click the shortcutbutton in the toolbar.

SelectStart/Programs/iGat

eway Bill V200Client/ParameterConfigurationConsole.

Note:

This chapter covers the basic operations of the CDR console and the system

debugging console only. Part III introduces the operation of the parameter configuation

console.

1.3 GUI of the CDR Console

The CDR console enables you to maintain the CG9812 system. You can perform such

operations as CDR querying, system performance monitoring, log management, and

user management. The CDR console is a graphic user interface (GUI) as shown in

Figure 1-1. It consists of a main window, a menu bar, a toolbar, a navigator tree, a

sub-window, and a status bar.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-3

2

3

4

1

5

6

1. Main window 2. Menu bar 3. Toolbar

4. Navigator tree 5. Sub-window 6. Status bar

Figure 1-1 Main interface of the CDR console

I. Main window

The main window contains all elements of the CDR console interface, including the title,

menu bar, toolbar, navigator tree, and status bar.

II. Menu bar

The menus are the entry to all functions and features of the CDR console. The CDR

console provides the following main menus according to the menu functions: System,

View, Operation, Security, Window and Help. The menus of CDR console are dynamic,

and different operation menu options are provided in different modes. For example, if

the Client is in the “state query” mode, you will see the State Query menu item.

Table 1-2 lists all the menus on the main window of the CDR console.

Table 1-2 Menus on the CDR console GUI


Relogin To log out the current user and log in asanother user.

LogoutTo log out the current user and end thecurrent operation.

System

Lock SystemTo lock the CDR console when it is not used.The shortcut key is F12.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-4


Office ManagementTo set the offices managed by the CDRconsole.

System Customization To set the wait time for locking the systemand the timeout time of the system.

Exit To quit the CDR console.

Navigator Tree To show or hide the navigator tree. Theshortcut key is F2.

Toolbar To show or hide the toolbar.

Status Bar To show or hide the status bar.View

RefreshTo refresh the navigator tree and display newCDR files. The shortcut key is F5.

Debug To enter the system debugging mode.

State Query To enter the state query mode.

SwitchTo manually switch over the active andstandby CG9812 servers.

Operation

Upgrade To execute auxiliary upgrade of the system.

OperatorManagement

To enter the operator management mode.Security

Log Browse To view the operation logs and system logs.

Cascade

To cascade all windows.

Tile To tile all windows.

Arrange Icons To arrange all window icons.Window

Close All To close all windows.

Help Topics To open the help.Help

About iGWB To display the version of the CDR console.

III. Toolbar

The toolbar provides shortcuts to the basic operations. On the toolbar, the shortcut

icons vary with the current mode. Table 1-3 lists the shortcut icons on the toolbar.

Table 1-3 Toolbar on the CDR console GUI

ShortcutRelated menu

optionFunction

Relogin To log out and log in as another user.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-5

ShortcutRelated menu

optionFunction

Office Management To set the offices managed by the CDR console.

Logout To log out the current user and end the currentoperation.

Lock System To lock the CDR console when it is not used.

Navigator Tree To show or hide the navigator tree.

Debug To enter the system debugging mode.

Help Topics To open the help.

IV. Navigator tree

The navigator tree is composed of one or more tabs, each of which contains the

information of an access point. It displays the CDR storage mode in the server. See

Figure 1-2.

1) Under Original Bill, the CDRs are displayed by date. The corresponding CDR file

is *.bil.

2) Under Final Bill, the bill types (also called “channel”) supported by the system are

displayed. Under each channel node, the final bills are displayed by date. The

corresponding CDR file is *.dat. The channels are determined by the format

library.

Name

Original BillDate

Final BillChannel

Date

2#Access

Point

1#Access

Point

Figure 1-2 Bill storing mode

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-6

For the SGSN, the channels are S-CDR, M-CDR, S-SMO-CDR, S-SMT-CD,

LCS-MO-CDR, LCS-MT-CDR and LCS-NI-CDR. The bill formats include:

S-CDR: The PDP context bills.

M-CDR: The user mobility management bills. S-SMO-CDR: The short message sending bills.

S-SMT-CDR: The short message receiving bills.

LCS-MO-CDR: The MS location sending bills.

LCS-MT-CDR: The MS location receiving bills.

LCS-NI-CDR: The network-initiated location bills.

For the GGSN, the channel is G-CDR. The bill format is:

G-CDR: The PDP context bills.

Note:

LCS-MO-CDR, LCS-MT-CDR and LCS-NI-CDR are only available in R4 or later

versions.

The final bill channel is determined by the distribution type selected by the user

while installing the server.

V. Sub-window

The sub-window is displayed after you select a menu or click a shortcut icon. It

implements the specific function.

VI. Status bar

The status bar shows the IP address of the CG9812 server connecting to the client.

1.4 GUI of the Debugging Console

You can switch the CDR console to the system debugging console to view the system

debugging information, protocol trace information, and the workflow trace information.

With these data, you can monitor the system running in real time. The debugging

console is a GUI as shown in Figure 1-3. The interface consists of a menu bar, a toolbar,

a main window, a sub-window, and a status bar. You can customize the layout of the

debugging console.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-7

2

3

4

1

5

1. Main window 2. Menu bar 3. Toolbar

4. Sub-window 5. Status bar -

Figure 1-3 Interface of the debugging console

I. Main window

Main window includes all the elements on the debugging console GUI: title, menu bar,

toolbar, and status bar.

II. Menu bar

Menus provide entries to all functions and features of the CG9812 debugging console.

The debugging console provides the following main menus according to the menu

functions: System, View, Debug, Protocol, Workflow, Window, and Help. Table 1-4 lists

all the menus on the main window of the debugging console.

Table 1-4 Menus on the debugging console GUI


ReloginTo log out the current user and log in asanother user.

Set Debug ColorsTo set different colors for the debugginginformation based on the debugging level.

Open iGWB ClientTo switch to the CDR console from thedebugging console.

System

Exit To exit the debugging console.

View Toolbar To show or hide the toolbar.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-8


Status bar To show or hide the status bar.

Browse Debug Message

To browse the running state of each

module of the CG9812 server in real time.

Save Debug MessageTo save the running state of each moduleof the CG9812 server in real time.

List MaskLevel

Query the mask debug information.

Debug

MaskLevel Set Mask

LevelSet the conditions for masking debugginginformation.

Browse ProtocolMessage

To browse the messages between theCG9812 and the switch in real time.

Protocol

Save Protocol Message To save the messages between theCG9812 and the switch in real time.

Browse WorkflowMessage

To browse the service messages amongmodules and processes on the CG9812server in real time.

Workflow

Save Workflow MessageTo save the service messages amongmodules and processes on the CG9812server in real time.

Cascade To cascade all windows.

Tile Horizontally To tile all windows horizontally.

Tile Vertically To tile all windows vertically.

Arrange Icons To arrange all window icons.

Minimize All To minimize all the opened windows.

ClearTo clear all the information in the currentwindow.

Clear AllTo clear all the information in all openedwindows.

Close To close the current window.

Window

Close All To close all windows.

Help About iGWBTo display the version information of theCG9812 debugging console.

III. Toolbar

The toolbar provides shortcuts to the frequently performed operations. Table 1-5 lists

the shortcut icons on the toolbar.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-9

Table 1-5 Toolbar on the debugging console GUI

Shortcut Related menu option Function

Relogin

To log out the current user and log in as

another user.

Browse Debug MessageTo browse the running state of eachmodule of the CG9812 server in real time.

Browse Protocol TraceMessage

To browse the messages between theCG9812 and the switch in real time.

Browse WorkflowMessage

To browse the service messages amongmodules and processes on the CG9812server in real time.

Exit To exit the debugging console.

Set Debug ColorsTo set different colors for the debugginginformation based on the debugging level.

Open iGWB LocalManager

To switch to the CDR console from thedebugging console.

IV. Sub-window

The sub-window is displayed after you select a menu or click a shortcut icon, to

implement the specific function.

V. Status bar

The status bar shows the IP address and network connection status of the CG9812

server connected with the client.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part IV Basic OperationsHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 2 Common Operations


2-1

Chapter 2 Common Operations


This section introduces common operations in the CG9812 system.

2.2 Logging in to the CDR Console

I. Task description

To log in to the CG9812 server from the client to perform routine management and

maintenance.

II. Prerequisites

The CG9812 server process is running, run #ps -ef|grep _proc on active node,

ensure that cls_proc, knl_proc, ap_proc and om_proc are running.

No conflicts occur among ports.

III. Operation procedure

No. Operation description

1

Double-click Frame.exe in the Bin directory under the installation directory ofthe CG9812 Client, or select Start\Programs\iGateway Bill V200Client\iGWB Client. Then the Login dialog box is displayed.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-2


2In the Login dialog box, enter the correct user name, password, and set theoffice to be managed. Then click OK. If the login is successful, the maininterface of the CDR console is displayed.

IV. Parameter descirption


User nameMandatory This is your user name used to log in tothe CG9812 CDR console. The default value is“admin”.

admin

Password

Mandatory It is your password. The default value is

null. It is recommended that the password of theadministrator be an alphanumeric string of at least8 digits, and that of an operator be an alphanumericstring of at least 6 digits.

-

Office name

Mandatory This refers to the name of the officemanaged by the CDR console. You need toconfigure the office before logging in to the client.For details, refer to 2.8 “Managing Office”.

Shenzhen

Office IPaddress

Mandatory It is the IP address used by the CG9812server to connect with the CG9812 client (or theNMS). It must be consistent with theLocalIpToMMLClient value under the MML

configuration item in the igwb.ini file.

10.70.141.111

UseGateway

Optional It is to enable the proxy function providedby the network management system (NMS).

-

Gateway IPOptional It is the IP address of the gateway.Configure it if you use the gateway.

10.70.141.133

Note:

The default user name and password of the CG9812 client are “admin” and null

respectively. You need to change the password of the administrator immediately.

Configure the office direction before you log in to the client.

Hereinafter, the identifier “-” in a table means an example is omitted.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-3

2.3 Locking CDR Console

I. Task description

To lock the CG9812 client to avoid unauthorized operations.

II. Prerequisites

None.



1

On the main interface of the CDR console, select System/Lock System or

click on the toolbar (or press F12) to display the Lock System dialogbox.

2

To return to the current system, enter your password in the Lock System dialog box, and then click OK.

To re-log in to the system, click Relogin in the Lock System dialog box.In the dialog box that pops up, click OK to confirm your operation.

2.4 Logging out of the CDR Console

I. Task description

To log out of the system.

II. Prerequisites

None.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-4



1On the main interface of the CDR console, select System/Log Out or click

on the toolbar. Then the system asks you to confirm.

2 After you confirm your operation, the system closes all windows of the CDRconsole.

2.5 Closing the CDR Console

I. Task description

To close the CDR console.

II. Operation procedure


1On the main interface of the CDR console, select System/Exit. A dialog boxis displayed, prompting you to confirm your operation.

2 Click Yes to close the CDR console.

2.6 Customizing the Layout

I. Task description

To customize the layout of the CDR console as desired.

II. Prerequisites

None.



1

On the CDR console, select View. Then select

Navigator Tree (or press F2) to show or hide the navigator tree.

ToolBar to show or hide the toolbar.

StatusBar to show or hide the status bar.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-5


2

On the CDR Console, select Window. Then select

Cascade to display all opened windows in a cascading manner.

Tile to tile all the opened windows orderly on the lower right part of themain interface.

Arrange Icons to arrange the icons of all opened windows.

Close All to close all the opened sub-windows.

Note:

Once you customize the layout of the CDR console, the layout will be saved and you

need not customize it again.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-6

2.7 Managing Operators

I. Brief Introduction

Taskdescription

The CG9812 system has two types of users with differentauthorities.

Administrator is automatically generated during systeminstallation. Its user name is "admin" and default password is null.It has all the authorities.

Operator is created by the administrator or another operatorauthorized to create operators. Its user name and authorities areallocated by the creator, and can be changed by theadministrator later.

Through operator management, you can control the authorities of alloperators to avoid unauthorized operations.

EntryOn the main interface of the CDR console, selectSecurity/Operator Management. The Operator Management window is displayed.

OperatorManagement Interface

II. Function Description

This section introduces the following contents:

Adding an Operator Deleting an Operator

Modifying an Operator

2.7.1 Adding an Operator

I. Task description

To add an operator.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-7

After the Client software is installed, the system automatically creates the administrator

named “admin”. It is the only administrator in the system and cannot be deleted. Other

operators are added manually.

II. Prerequisites

You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to create new

operators.



1On the main interface of the CDR console, select Security/OperatorManagement to display the Operator Management window. Then the User

menu is added to the menu bar of the main interface.

2

Select User/Add or click in the Operator Management window todisplay the Add Operator dialog box.

3Enter values in all fields, and then click OK. View the Operator Management window, and you can find that the new operator has been added.

IV. Parameter Description


Name Mandatory Enter the full name of the new operator Zhangshan

Description Optional Describe the new operator Operator

AuthorityOptional Determine the operator type. The value is“Normal”, unchangeable.

Normal User

PasswordMandatory Enter the login password of theoperator. Note: The password must be an

alphanumeric string of no less than six digits.

Z123456

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-8


ConfirmMandatory Enter the login password of theoperator again.

Z123456

2.7.2 Deleting an Operator

I. Task description

To delete an operator.

II. Prerequisites

You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to delete operators.



1On the main interface of the CDR console, select Security/OperatorManagement to display the Operator Management window. Then the User menu is added on the menu bar of the main interface.

2Select the operator to be deleted in the list. Select User/Delete or click the

button in the Operator Management window.

3 Click Yes in the popup dialog box, and click to refresh the user list. Youcan find that the selected operator has been deleted.

2.7.3 Modifying an Operator

I. Task description

To modify the account of an operator.

II. Prerequisites

The administrator can modify the description and password of itself or any

operator.

An operator can only modify its own description and password.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-9



1On the main interface of the CDR console, select Security/OperatorManagement to display the Operator Management window. Then the User menu is added on the menu bar of the main interface.

2

Select the operator to be modified in the list. Select User/Modify or clickin the Operator Management window to display the Modify OperatorProperty dialog box.

3The administrator and Operator can modify all information except the name.

After modification, click OK.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-10

2.8 Managing Offices


Taskdescription

Office refers to the CG9812 server offices maintained by the CDRconsole. The office management is used to set the IP address of anoffice. The system allows you to set the IP addresses of multipleoffices so that you can select any of them to maintain from the client.

EntryIn the CDR console, select System/Office Management or click

on the toolbar to display the Office Management dialog box.

OfficeManagement Interface


This part introduces the following contents:

Adding an Office

Deleting an Office

Modifying an Office

2.8.1 Adding an Office

I. Task description

To add an office maintained by the CDR console.

II. Prerequisites

None.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-11



1Obtain the IP address of the office to be added, that is, the IP address usedby the CG9812 server to connect with the CG9812 client (or the NMS), anddefine the office name.

2 In the CDR console, select System/Office Management or click on thetoolbar to display the Office Management dialog box.

3 Enter the following parameters: office, IP address and office type.

4Click Set, and then the office information will be listed in the list box. Afterconfirmation, click Save to add the office.



OfficeMandatory Office refers to the name of the CG9812server offices maintained by the CDR console. Youneed to set an office before logging in to the Client.

Beijing

IP

Mandatory Enter the IP address used by theCG9812 server to connect with the CG9812 client (orthe NMS). It must be consistent with theLocalIpToMMLClient value under MML in theigwb.ini file.

10.70.141.11

Type Mandatory Select the type of the office to be added. iGWB

Caution:

You must set an office when you run the client for the first time. Otherwise, the client

cannot connect with the CG9812 server. Specifically, when the User Login dialog box

is displayed in the CDR console, click Office Management to set the office in the

Office Management dialog box before you log in.

2.8.2 Deleting an Office

I. Task description

To delete an office that is no longer maintained by the CDR console.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-12

II. Prerequisites

None.



1 Determine the IP address and name of the office to be deleted.


3Select the office to be deleted, and then click Delete. After confirmation, clickSave to delete the office.

2.8.3 Modifying an Office

I. Task description

To modify the information of an office maintained by the CDR console.

II. Prerequisites

None.




2Select the office to be modified in the list box and enter the new officeinformation in the dialog box.

3Click Set, and then the new office information is listed in the list box. After

confirmation, click Save to modify the office information.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-13

2.9 Customizing the System


Taskdescription

Customize the timeout time and lock time of the CG9812 Client.

EntryIn the CDR console, click System/System Customize to display theSystem Customize dialog box.

SystemCustomize

Interface



Customizing Timeout Setting

Customizing Lock Time

2.9.1 Customizing Timeout Setting

I. Task description

To set the timeout time of the client.

Timeout time refers to the maximum interval for the client to receive a result from the

server after it submits a command.

II. Prerequisites

None.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-14



1 In the CDR console, click System/System Customize to display theSystem Customize dialog box.

2Select the checkbox before Timeout Setting (20 – 600s). Enter the timevalue, and then click OK.

Note:

The timeout value ranges from 20 seconds to 600 seconds.

2.9.2 Customizing Lock Time

I. Task description

To set whether to lock the CDR console after a specified idle time.

Once the client is locked, you have to enter the password to unlock it.

II. Prerequisites

None.



1In the CDR console, click System/System Customize to display theSystem Customize dialog box.

2Set the idle time (in minutes) before the system is locked and click OK. Thevalue ranges from 0 to 1440 minutes. If it is set to 0, the system will never be

locked.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-15

2.10 Managing CDRs


Taskdescription

CDR management includes series important functions which arebrowsing, querying, printing, saving CDRs, and manually outputtingCDR files.

Entry

Log in to the CDR console. The left pane shows the navigator treethat is divided into several tab pages based on access points (forexample, the “CG” node shown in the following figure). The navigatortree displays the CDR storage mode in the server.

CDRoperationinterface


This section introduces the following contents:

Browsing CDRs by Type

Browsing CDRs by Format

Browsing CDRs by Multiple Conditions

Saving CDR Information

Printing a CDR

2.10.1 Browsing CDRs by Type

I. Task description

To browse the generated CDRs by type.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-16

II. Prerequisites

You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to browse CDRs.



1

Log in to the CDR console. The left pane shows the navigator tree that isdivided into several Tab pages based on access points (for example, the“CG” node shown in the following figure.), The navigator tree displays theCDR storage mode in the server.

Right-click the sub-window and you will see the following options on theshortcut menu:

Select Refresh to obtain the latest CDR information from the CG9812

server. Select Up to open the upper level directory list

Select Back to open the previous directory.

Select Bill Query to query the CDR files by format.

Select Bill Browse to display the content of a selected CDR.

Select Find to set the specified querying conditions, such as name, typeor size to find the CDRs.

2

Select Bill Browse or click a CDR file to display the Choose Bill Format forFile Browsing dialog box.

Select a bill format.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-17


3

Click OK and the Bill Info menu is added to the menu bar of the CDRconsole. The Browse Original Bill window pops up and displays all bills inthis format.

If the bills are displayed on more than one page, right-click the current page

and select Next page/Previous page or click and to view otherpages. Each page displays 50 records.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-18


4

Click to save the queried bills.

Click to print the queried bills.

Double-click a bill record or click to display the Bill DetailedInformation dialog box.

The bill detailed information varies with the CDR types. Click OK to close thedialog box.

Note:

The example only describes the operations against CDRs. The operations against final

bills are similar.

2.10.2 Browsing CDRs by Format

I. Task description

To browse CDRs by format.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-19

II. Prerequisites

You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to browse CDRs.



1On the main interface of the CDR console, double-click a date underOriginal Bill of the navigator tree in the left pane to display the Original Bill window.

2

Right-click the bill list window and select Bill Query from the shortcut menuto display the Choose Format for Bill Browsing dialog box.

3

Select the bill format to be queried and then click Next to display the SetQuery Condition dialog box.

4The query conditions displayed will vary with the CDR formats. Set the queryconditions, and click OK to display the Bill Query window.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-20


5

If the bills are displayed on more than one page, right-click the current page

and select Next page/Previous page or click and to view otherpages. Each page displays 50 records.

Click to save the queried bills.

Click to print the queried bills.

Double-click a bill record or click to display the Bill DetailedInformation dialog box.

Note:


bills are similar.

2.10.3 Browsing CDRs by Multiple Conditions

I. Task description

To find CDR records based on multiple conditions like CDR name, type, size, modifying

date and creating date.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-21

II. Prerequisites

You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to browse

CDRs.

Only CDRs in the CDR list can be browsed.



1On the main interface of the CDR console, double-click a date underOriginal Bill of the navigator tree in the left pane to display the Original Bill window.

2

Right-click the CDR list window and select Find from the shortcut menu todisplay the Find dialog box.

3 Enter the content of the CDR you want to find in Content.

4 Enter the search type in Field, including Name, Type, Size, Modifying Date,and Creating Date.

5Enter the filed matching condition in Matching, including Entire Filed, FieldHead, and Part of Field.

6

Click Find First to display the first CDR matching the conditions:

If the first CDR is found, you can click Find Next to display the next CDRmatching the conditions.

If no CDR is found, a dialog box is displayed, prompting “Cannot find thesearching string”. After confirmation, lick OK to return to the Find dialogbox

7 Click Close to close the Find dialog box.

Note:


bills are similar.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-22

2.10.4 Saving CDR Information

I. Task description

To save all or selected CDRs on the CG9812 Client in text format.

II. Prerequisites

You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to manage CDRs.



1 Browse or find the CDRs as required.

2

On the main interface of the CDR console, select Bill Info/Save, or clickin the Bill Browse or Bill Query window. Then the Save Bill Information dialog box is displayed.

3Select Save bills of the current page or Only save selected bills asrequired. Enter the name and the path of the destination file, or select anexisting path by clicking Browse. Click OK to save the CDRs.

2.10.5 Printing a CDR

I. Task description

To print the CDRs that you have browsed or queried.

II. Prerequisites

You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to manage CDRs.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-23



1 Browse or query the CDRs as required.

2

In the CDR list window, select the CDRs to be printed. Then select Bill

Info/Print or click in the toolbar of the Bill Browse window to display thePrint window.

3 Set print parameters to print the selected CDRs.

Note:

Select Bill Info/Print Preview to preview the CDRs before printing. Select Bill

Info/Print Setting to set the font of the CDRs to be printed.

2.11 Managing Performance


Taskdescription

To know about the current running status of CG9812, such as CPUusage, disk space usage, and heartbeat state by monitoring the

performance of the system.

EntryOn the main interface of the CDR console, click Operation/StateQuery to display the State Query dialog box.

StateQuery

Interface

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-24



Primary/SecondaryState

It indicates the state of the active/standby server. If the serverruns normally, the corresponding green indicator flashes. 0 represents the active node, and 1 represents the standbynode.

Heartbeat State

It indicates the working state of the heartbeat links. There aretwo values displayed in the "n/m" format. m indicates the totalnumber of heartbeat links (generally m=2) and n indicates thenumber of normal heartbeat links. If n=0, the heartbeat isabnormal. Also, if n≠0 and m≠n, the heartbeat is abnormal.

To ensure the reliable running of the system, check theabnormal heartbeat links and restore them in time.

CPU1 Usage (%) The CPU1 usage of the dual-system. Currently, the CG9812can display two CPU usages at most. If only one CPU isconfigured, then - is used to replace the second CPU usage.

CPU2 Usage (%)The CPU2 usage of the dual-system. Currently, the CG9812can display two CPU usages at most. If only one CPU isconfigured, then - is used to replace the second CPU usage.

Front Disk Space(MB)

Indicates the storage space for CDRs. There are two valuesdisplayed in the "n/m" format. Where, m indicates the totalspace of the disk in MB, and n indicates the available space inMB.

Back Disk Space(MB)

Indicates the storage space for final bills. There are two

values displayed in the "n/m" format. Where, m indicates thetotal space of the disk in MB, and n indicates the availablespace in MB.

Physical MEM(MB)

Indicates the current physical memory usage. There are twovalues displayed in the "n/m" format. Where, m indicates thetotal size of the physical memory in MB, and n indicates theavailable size in MB.

III. Function Description


Querying System Performance Status

Setting State Query Properties

Clearing State Information

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-25

2.11.1 Querying System Performance Status

I. Task description

To query the running state of the CG9812 server, including CPU usage, heartbeat state,

and disk space usage.

II. Prerequisites

You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to query system

information.



1On the main interface of the CDR console, select Operation/State Query.The State Query dialog box is displayed, and the State Query menu isadded to the menu bar of the CDR console.

2The state information for the current server is displayed in the State Query dialog box.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-26


3

Double-click a record to display the State Detailed Information dialog box.You can see all the detailed information in real time.

4 Click OK to close the State Detailed Information dialog box.



CPU1 Used /CPU2Used

Indicate the CPU usage of the dual-system.

Physical MEM Indicate the memory usage.

Primary/SecondaryState

Indicate the state of the active/standby server. If theactive/standby server runs normally, the corresponding greenindicator flashes.

Heartbeat StateIndicate the working state of the heartbeat links. There are twoindicators -- total and active.

Front Disk SpaceIndicate the CDR storage space, including two indicators –

total and active.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-27


Back Disk SpaceIndicate the final bill storage space, including two indicators –total and available.

2.11.2 Setting State Query Properties

I. Task description

To set the state query properties, including the state refreshing period and whether to

save the state query result.

II. Prerequisites


information.




2

Select State/Setting Properties or click in the State Query dialog box todisplay the Setting Prosperities dialog box.

3 Set the two parameters (Save Status and Time Span) as required.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-28



SaveStatus

It means whether to save the state information in theState Query window to the StatsInfo.txt file under theinstallation directory of the Client. Select Open to savethe information. Otherwise, select Close.

Open

Time SpanIt refers to the interval when the server state informationis refreshed. The time span ranges from 0 second to 600seconds.

5

2.11.3 Clearing State Information

I. Task description

To clear the state information manually.

II. Prerequisites


information.




2 Select State Query/Clear , or click in the State Query dialog box. Thedisplayed status information is then cleared.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-29

2.12 Managing Logs


Taskdescription

The system provides both operation logs and system logs to helpyou locate problems. One log file is created daily, named as the dateplus log as its extension. Each log file is saved for one month andthen deleted.

EntryOn the main interface of the CDR console, select Security/LogBrowse to display the LogView dialog box.

Log ViewInterface



Browsing Log

Saving Log

Clearing Log

Printing Log

2.12.1 Browsing Logs

I. Task description

To browse operation logs and system logs.

II. Prerequisites

You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to browse logs.

The administrator can browse the system log and the operation logs of all the

operators.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-30

The operators with log browsing authority can browse their own operation logs, but

they cannot browse the system log.



1On the main interface of the CDR console, select Security/Log Browse todisplay the LogView window. The Log menu is added to the menu bar of theCDR console.

2

Select Log/Browse Log or click in the LogView window, and the SetLog Browse Property dialog box is displayed.

3Enter the log browse conditions. Select the user name and log type, and setthe start time and end time for log browsing. Then, click OK. The logsmeeting the conditions are displayed in the LogView window.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-31


4

Double-click a log entry, or select it and press Enter , to view the detailedinformation of it.

5In the Detailed Information of Log window, click Next to view the next logentry, and click Previous to view the previous log entry.

IV. Parameters in the Set Log Browse Property Interface


User name

The object that generates logs. Its drop-downlist includes "All Users" and each usercreated. “All users” refer to all created users. Ifyou log in as administrator, you can select acreated user or “all users”; if you log in as anoperator, your own user name is selected bydefault.

All users

LogType

Including "System Log" and "Operation Log". A system log records the running process ofsoftware modules. An operation log recordsthe operations of users.

Operation Log

Start/EndStart time/End time indicates the time range inwhich a log is created.

Start:2005-01-22-18:00:50

End:2005-01-24-18:00:50

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-32

V. Parameters in Detailed Information of Log Interface


SequenceNumber The sequence number of a log. 8

User name

For an operation log, the actual user name isdisplayed.

For a system log, - is displayed.

admin

Date The date when the operation is performed.2005-01-2218:00:50

OperationPlace

The IP address of the CG9812 server that sendsthe operation command.

10.70.141.132

Log Source

For an operation log, - is displayed. For a system

log, the module ID is displayed. -

OperationCommand

The operations performed by the user, which arerecorded by the program. Only an operation loghas an operation command; a system has not.

For a systemlog, theoperationcommand is "-".

For an operationlog, theoperationcommand is theactualoperation, such

as “LST OP”.

CommandDetail

Including the position (office) where the commandis executed and the command string.

Query theinformation ofan operator.

OperationResult

Command execution result. "SUC" meanssuccess. "FAIL" means failure.

SUC

LogType"SYS" refers to system log. "OPER" refers tooperation log.

OPRT

2.12.2 Saving Logs

I. Task description

To save all of or selected logs to the Client in text format for future reference.

II. Prerequisites

Only the administrator can save the system logs and the operation logs for all

operators.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-33

The operators with log operation authority can browse their own operation logs but

cannot save the system logs.



1On the main interface of the CDR console, select Security/Log Browse todisplay the LogView window. The Log menu is then added to the menu barof the CDR console.

2

Select Log/Save to File, or click on the toolbar in the LogView window.The Save Log Information dialog box is displayed

3Select Save All Log Record or Only Save Selected Log Record asrequired. Enter the destination file name to save the log records, or select an

existing path by clicking Browse. Click OK to save the log records



Save All LogRecord

Save all logs found. -

Only SaveSelected Log

Record

Save the selected log records found asrequired.

-

Path

Mandatory Manually enter or select thesave path and log file name by clickingBrowse. The default save path isC:\iGWB_Client\Bin of the Client.

If you enter20040702.txt, then thelog is saved in theC:\iGWB_Client\Bin\20040702.txt file.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-34

Note:

The CG9812 system creates the log files everyday. The logs created are saved in the

D:\other\log directory of the CG9812 server.

2.12.3 Clearing Logs

I. Task description

To clear the log records that is no longer needed.

II. Prerequisites

The administrator can clear the system logs and the operation logs for all

operators.

The operators with log operation authority can only clear their own operation logs

but cannot clear the system logs.



1

On the main interface of the CDR console, select Security/Log Browse to

display the LogView window. The Log menu is then added to the menu barof the CDR console.

2 Select Log/Clear or click in the LogView window to clear all log recordsin the LogView window.

2.12.4 Printing Logs

I. Task description

To print the selected log records for future reference.

II. Prerequisites

The administrator can print the system logs and the operation logs for all

operators.

The operators with log operation authority can only print their own operation logs

but cannot print the system logs.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-35



1On the main interface of the CDR console, select Security/Log Browse todisplay the LogView window. The Log menu is then added to the menu barof the CDR console.

2 Select Log/Print or click in the LogView window.

3The Print dialog box is displayed. Set the print parameters as required andclick OK to print the logs.

Note:

Click in the LogView window to preview the logs before printing.

2.13 Manual Switchover

I. Task description

To switch over the active/standby CG9812 server manually.

II. Prerequisites

You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to perform

switchover manually.



1On the main interface of the CDR console, select Operation/ManualSwitch.

2

A confirmation dialog box pops up. Click Yes to check the status of the bulbicon in the status bar. The standby server is activated, and executes #ps-ef|grep _proc, ensure that cls_proc, knl_proc, ap_proc and om_proc arerunning.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-36

Caution:

If the switchover is successful, the server will be disconnected with the CDR console.

Therefore, perform this operation with caution.

2.14 Auxiliary Upgrade

I. Task description

To prepare for upgrading the server software (for example, combine all CDRs, or stop

receiving CDRs).

Only perform auxiliary upgrade in the following cases:

The interface between the CG9812 and the switch changes. In other words, the

bill format changes, such as the CDR length.

The interface between the CG9812 and the billing center changes. In other words,

the CDR format or CDR file format changes.

In both cases, you need to reconfigure the igwb.ini file. In addition, you need to delete

the system status file. Otherwise, the serial number of CDR files still increases.

II. Prerequisites

You have logged in as the administrator.



1On the main interface of the CDR console, select Operation/AuxiliaryUpgrade.

2Click Yes in the popup dialog box to start auxiliary upgrade for the CG9812

server.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-37

Caution:

After you perform auxiliary upgrade, the system no longer receives CDRs, which

may cause CDR loss. Therefore, perform this operation with caution. In case of

indeliberate operation, restart the CG9812 program.

In auxiliary upgrade, determine whether to delete the system state files according to

the installation guide to the specific version.

2.15 Logging in to the Debugging Console

I. Task description

To log in to the debugging console.

Through the debugging console, you can know about the current running state of the

system.

II. Prerequisites

The CG9812 server process is running normally.



1Double-click the debugws.exe file in the Bin directory of the CG9812 clientto display the User Login Dialog box.

2Enter the user name, password, and the office to be managed. Then thedebugging console GUI is displayed.

Note: You can also select Operation/Debug on the main interface of the CDR console or

click on the toolbar to enter the system debugging console.

After you log out, click on the toolbar to log in as another operator.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-38

2.16 Exiting the Debugging Console

I. Task description

To exit the system debugging console.

II. Prerequisites

None.



1Select System/Exit, or click . A dialog box is displayed, asking you forconfirmation.

2 Click Yes, and you can exit the debugging console immediately.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-39

2.17 Managing Debugging Messages


Taskdescription

Debugging message refers to the running state information of eachmodule of the server, which is displayed by level. You can browse theinformation in real time. The debugging information can be used introubleshooting.

EntrySelect Debug/Browse Debug Message, or click on the toolbar.The DebugInfo window appears, displaying the debuggingmessages in real time.

CG9812Debuginfo

GUI

II. Parameters in Debuginfo Interface


DebugContent

Displaying debugging messages in real time.Currently normal. Thesequence number of

the file is 6.

DebugLevel

Displaying the level of debugging messages.The debugging messages of different levelsare displayed in different colors.

Major

DebugInformation

Displaying the module of the debugginginformation.

MT_FRONTSAVE

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-40



Browsing Debug Message

Saving Debug Messages

Masking the Debug Level

Setting Debug Colors

2.17.1 Browsing Debug Messages

I. Task description

To browse the running state information of each module of the CG9812 server in real

time.

II. Prerequisites

None.



1

Select Debug/Browse Debug Message, or click on the toolbar. The

DebugInfo window pops up, displaying the debugging messages in realtime. The debugging messages are displayed in different colors according todifferent levels.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-41


2

Right-click in the debugging information window and select:

Refresh to clear all messages in the window.

No Scrolling to stop scrolling the messages in the window. In this case,

is activated, and you can print the messages.

2.17.2 Saving Debug Messages

I. Task description

To save the current debugging information for future reference.

II. Prerequisites

None.



1

Select Debug/Save Debug Message to enable the save function (then youcan see a “√“ mark before Save Debug Message. The Please select savepath dialog box is displayed.

2The default path is C:\iGWB_Client, and the default file name isD_20040717180106_DB.txt. Click Save.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-42

2.17.3 Masking the Debug Level

I. Task description

To set the level of debugging messages to be masked.

Note that the information masked is not deleted.

List Mask Level

Set Mask Level

Delete Mask Level

II. Prerequisites



1) List Mask Level


1 Select Debug/Mask Level/List Mask Level.

2

The Result of Query window pops up, displaying the mask level.

2) Set Mask Level


1 Select Debug/Mask Level/Set Mask Level.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-43


2

The Add Mask Conditions dialog box pops up.

Select a mask level: Urgent, Important, Normal, and Minor.

3Click OK, the confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click Yes, and thedebugging information of the selected level is masked.

3) Delete Mask Level


1 Select Debug/Mask Level/List Mask Level.

2

The Result of Query window is displayed.

3

Right-click in the window and select:

Delete Selected Condition to delete a selected mask level. In the popupdialog box, click Yes to confirm your operation.

Delete All Conditions to delete all mask levels. In the popup dialog box,click Yes to confirm your operation.

Refresh to refresh the list of mask levels.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-44

2.17.4 Setting Debug Colors

I. Task description

To set the display color of each other of debugging messages.

II. Prerequisites

None.



1

Select System/Set Debug Colors, or click . The Set Debug Colors dialog box is displayed.

2Set the color for each level. Click Restore to Default if you want to restore tothe default settings. Click OK to finish setting.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-45

2.18 Managing Protocol Messages


Taskdescription

The protocol trace information refers to the message informationbetween the CG9812 and the switch. You can browse the protocoltrace information in real time. This is helpful for troubleshooting.

EntrySelect Protocol/Browse Protocol Message, or click . TheProtocolTrace window pops up, displaying the protocol traceinformation in real time.

ProtocolTrace GUI



MsgSender

The party sending the protocol messages,usually the CG9812 or switch (GGSN).

CG9812

MsgReceiver

The party receiving the protocol messages,usually the CG9812 or switch (GGSN).

Module 1

SequenceNumber

The unique ID of the protocol messageframe.

0

Msg Type The type of the protocol message. Saving CDRs.

ProtocolTraceContent

The contents of the protocol message.

The total length of aCDR is, and thesequence number is46.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-46



Browsing Protocol Message Saving Protocol Message

2.18.1 Browsing Protocol Messages

I. Task description

To browse the messages between the CG9812 and the switch, to help troubleshooting.

II. Prerequisites




1Select Protocol/Browse Protocol Message, or click . TheProtocolTrace window pops up, displaying the protocol trace information inreal time.

2

Right-click in the ProtocolTrace window and select:

Refresh to clear all information in the window. Then the system willdisplay new debugging information.



2.18.2 Saving Protocol Messages

I. Task description

To save the current protocol trace information.

II. Prerequisites


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-47



1Select Protocol/Save Protocol Message to enable the save function (thenyou can see a “√“ mark before Save Protocol Message. The Please selectsave path dialog box is displayed.

2The default path is C:\iGWB_Client, and the default file name isD_20040717172622_PT.txt. Click Save.

2.19 Managing Workflow Messages


Taskdescription

The workflow information refers to the service messages betweenthe CG9812 and the switch. You can browse the workflow messagesin real time. This is helpful for troubleshooting.

EntrySelect Workflow/Browse Workflow Message, or click . TheWorkflow window pops up, displaying the workflow information inreal time.

WorkflowGUI



SenderPID

Each process of the CG9812 server has aprocess ID (PID). The workflow messagecontains the PID of the sender.

PT_OM

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-49



1 Select Workflow/Browse Workflow Message, or click . The Workflow window pops up, displaying the workflow information in real time.

2

Right-click in the Workflow window and select:

Refresh to clear all the information in the window. Then the systemdisplays new workflow trace messages.



2.19.2 Saving Workflow Messages

I. Task description

To save the current workflow trace messages for future reference.

II. Prerequisites




1Select Workflow/Save Workflow Message to enable the save function(then you can see a “√“ mark before Save Workflow Message. The Pleaseselect save path dialog box is displayed.

2The default path is C:\iGWB_Client, and the default file name isD_20040717173210_WF.txt. Click Save.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



HUAWEI


Part V System Maintenance

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part V System MaintenanceHUAWEI CG9812 Table of Contents


i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 System Overview......................................................................................................... 1-1


1.2 Types of System Users...................................................................................................... 1-1

1.3 System Directory and Main Files....................................................................................... 1-1

1.3.1 Directory structure and main files of the server ...................................................... 1-1

1.3.2 CDR storage directory and main files ..................................................................... 1-3

1.3.3 Common directory structure and main files ............................................................ 1-5

1.4 Directory Structure of the CG9812 Client .......................................................................... 1-6

Chapter 2 Routine Maintenance................................................................................................... 2-1


2.2 System Running................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.3 Hard Disk Detection........................................................................................................... 2-2

2.4 Operation Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 2-3

Chapter 3 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 3-1


3.2 Fault Positioning Information on the CG9812.................................................................... 3-1

3.3 Fault positioning information on OS................................................................................... 3-3

3.4 Collection of Fault Positioning Information ........................................................................ 3-4

3.5 Trace Information and Maintenance.................................................................................. 3-5

3.5.1 Usable Front Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Alarming Space................. 3-5

3.5.2 Usable Back Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Alarming Space................. 3-5

3.5.3 Usable Backup Medium Space Insufficient for the Minimum Alarming Space....... 3-5

3.5.4 Usable Front Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Switchover Space ............. 3-6

3.5.5 Usable Back Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Switchover Space.............. 3-6

3.5.6 Access Point Type, Access Point Type Being %d.................................................. 3-6

3.5.7 Failure of Reading IP Address from MML Server (Default Value %s).................... 3-7

3.5.8 Error Code %d Returned in Socket Registration When Connecting Kernel Process3-7

3.5.9 Kernel Process Not Running................................................................................... 3-7

3.5.10 Failure of Opening Listening Port with Error Code %d......................................... 3-7

3.5.11 Activation Failure of Asynchronous Resource...................................................... 3-8

3.5.12 Dual-System Activation Failure............................................................................. 3-8

3.5.13 Switchover............................................................................................................. 3-8

3.5.14 Switchover Failure................................................................................................. 3-9

3.5.15 Operation Failure at Failover Response End........................................................ 3-9

3.5.16 Starting to Perform Handover Operation .............................................................. 3-9

3.5.17 Multiple Failed Activation Attempts at Local Node and can Never be Activated

Unless Heartbeat is Interrupted ....................................................................................... 3-9

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




ii

Chapter 4 Frequently Asked Questions...................................................................................... 4-1


4.2 Logging in to CDR console failed ...................................................................................... 4-1

4.3 Conflicting TCP Port 6000 ................................................................................................. 4-2

4.4 Failure to Decode ASN.1 CDR.......................................................................................... 4-2

4.5 Failure to Run Setup Script................................................................................................4-3

4.6 Sequence of Powering on Dual-System............................................................................ 4-4

4.7 Sequence of Powering off Dual-System............................................................................ 4-4

4.8 Delayed CDR Fetching...................................................................................................... 4-5

4.9 Failure to Restart Sun Mini Computer after Sudden Power-off ......................................... 4-5

4.10 "No utmpx entry" When Logging in Solaris System......................................................... 4-6

4.11 Oversize /var/adm/wtmpx File ......................................................................................... 4-7

4.12 A 3MB Original CDR Generated after One or Two Calls................................................. 4-7

4.13 Connection Failure Alarm During Backup over Network................................................. 4-8

4.14 Making Generated CDRs Meeting Special Requirements .............................................. 4-8

4.15 SUN Netra 20 cannot be started...................................................................................... 4-9

4.16 Sun Netra t1405 cannot be switched over..................................................................... 4-10

Chapter 5 System Alarms............................................................................................................. 5-1


5.2 ALM-0001 Insufficient Disk Space..................................................................................... 5-2

5.3 ALM-0003 BS Not Fetch CDRs for a Long Time............................................................... 5-2

5.4 ALM-0005 Heartbeat Interruption ...................................................................................... 5-3

5.5 ALM-0007 Cluster Switchover ........................................................................................... 5-3

5.6 ALM-0009 Private Network Interruption ............................................................................ 5-4

5.7 ALM-0013 IP Resource Failure ......................................................................................... 5-4

5.8 ALM-0015 Volume Resource Failure................................................................................. 5-5

5.9 ALM-0017 Hardware Failure.............................................................................................. 5-5

5.10 ALM-0019 Write File Failure ............................................................................................ 5-5

5.11 ALM-0021 Abnormal CDR............................................................................................... 5-6

5.12 ALM-0023 File Backup Failure ........................................................................................ 5-6

5.13 ALM-0025 Backup Connection Failure............................................................................ 5-7

5.14 ALM-0027 CPU Busy....................................................................................................... 5-7

5.15 ALM-0029 Insufficient Available Memory ........................................................................ 5-7

5.16 ALM-0031 Unauthorized Client Login.............................................................................. 5-8

5.17 ALM-0033 License Notice................................................................................................ 5-8

5.18 ALM-0035 Cluster Handover ........................................................................................... 5-9

5.19 ALM-0037 Hardware Failure............................................................................................ 5-9

5.20 ALM-0039 Software Reset............................................................................................. 5-10

5.21 ALM-0051 Alarm Box Disconnection............................................................................. 5-10

5.22 ALM-0053 User information Change............................................................................. 5-11

5.23 ALM-0055 Insufficient Disk Space (major) .................................................................... 5-11

5.24 ALM-0057 Insufficient Available Memory (major).......................................................... 5-11

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




iii

5.25 ALM-0059 No GSN Response....................................................................................... 5-12

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part V System MaintenanceHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 1 System Overview


1-1

Chapter 1 System Overview


This section describes the basic knowledge necessary for maintaining the CG9812

system, including:

Types of System Users

System Directory and Main Files

Directory Structure of the CG9812 Client

1.2 Types of System UsersThe CG9812 has two types of system users. See Table 1-1.

Table 1-1 User authority

Role Description

Administrator It is automatically created during the system setup process. Theadministrator has the highest authorities.

Normal user It is created and can only be modified by the administrator or otheruser with the user-creating authority.

1.3 System Directory and Main Files

1.3.1 Directory structure and main files of the server

Usually, the CG9812 runs in UNIX. The installation directories of the CG9812

applications are listed in Table 1-2.

Table 1-2 Directory structure of CG9812 server

File path Description

/opt/igwbStores all executable process files, configurationfiles, and trace files.

/opt/igwb/config Stores all configuration files of the CG9812.

/opt/igwb/config/alarm Stores all alarm configuration files.

/opt/igwb/config/formatStores configuration files of the currently used CDRformats.

/opt/igwb/config/iniStores the system parameter configuration file,igwb.ini.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-2


/opt/igwb/config/mml Stores operation command tables of the CG9812.

/opt/igwb/config/resource

Stores the resource data used to support the

bilingual operation interface.

/opt/igwb/config/specailformat

Stores configuration files related to special CDRformats. To use a special format, copy thecorresponding configuration file to/opt/igwb/config/format. Modify igwb.ini accordingto the parameter configuration guide.

/opt/igwb/traceStores trace files recorded by the CG9812 aboutsignificant running information and faultinformation.

Table 1-3shows the main files of the server.

Table 1-3 Main files of CG9812 server


/opt/igwb/cls_proc Executable file of the dual-system process.

/opt/igwb/ap_proc Executable file of the access point process.

/opt/igwb/knl_proc Executable file of the kernel process.

/opt/igwb/om_procExecutable file of the operation andmaintenance process.

/opt/igwb/libformat.so Dynamic link library of the format library.

/opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.iniParameter configuration file, in whichsignificant parameters such as systemworking mode and external interface are set.

/opt/igwb/config/resource/resource.dat

Language resource file.

/opt/igwb/config/mml/*.datFive MML command tables used by the MMLServer.

/opt/igwb/config/alarm/alarmconfig.cfg

Alarm parameter configuration file, in which

the alarm related parameters, for example,alarm level, are set.

/opt/igwb/trace/ap_procN_trace.txt

Trace file of the access point process. Theremay exist multiple process instances on theaccess point process. N refers to the accesspoint ID.

/opt/igwb/trace/cls_proc_trace.txt Trace file of the dual-system process.

/opt/igwb/trace/knl_proc_trace.txt Trace file of the kernel process.

/opt/igwb/trace/om_proc_trace.txtTrace file of the operation and maintenanceprocess.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-3

1.3.2 CDR storage directory and main files

The CG9812 processes a great amount of CDRs of different formats every day. The

maintenance personnel can find the problems as quickly as possible if they know the

structure of the CDR storage directory.

I. Structure of CDR storage directory


/var/frontsaveThe root directory of the front disk, namely the directory storingoriginal CDRs. The original CDRs are stored by access point (forexample, R4), and then by date, see Figure 1-1.

/var/backsave

The root directory of the back disk, namely the directory storingfinal CDRs , usually in two copies, see Figure 1-2.1) The final CDRs are stored invar/backsave/AccessPointName/PathName/Date. In other words,the final CDRs are stored by access point, by path and then bydate.2) The backup of the final CDRs is stored invar/backsave/Second/AccessPointName/PathName. Differentfrom the storage structure of the final CDRs, their backup is notstored by date. This directory is open to the billing center to fetchCDRs. The billing center is required to delete the CDRs once theyare fetched. Consequently, the CDRs will not be accumulated inthis directory.

…

Access

PointName

Date

/var/frontsave

Original CDRs

Original CDRs

Original CDRs

Original CDRs

Date

…

…

Figure 1-1 Storage directory of original CDRs

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-4

AccessPointName

Patch 1

/var/backsave/var/backsave

AccessPointName

Second

Patch N

Patch 1

Final CDRs

Final CDRs

Final CDRs

Final CDRs

Patch N

Date

Final CDRs

Final CDRs

…

Final CDRs

Final CDRs

…

Date

Date

Final CDRs

Final CDRs

Final CDRs

Final CDRs

Date

…

…

…

…

…

…

Figure 1-2 Storage directory of final CDRs

II. Main files of CDR storage


/var/frontsave/AccessPointName/Date/b*.bil

The SGSN/GGSN regularly sends CDRs to CG9812. Uponreception of the CDRs, the CG9812 generates an originalCDR file with the CDR contents until the size of the fileexceeds a specified value (3 MB usually). The CG9812replaces another original CDR file and repeats the precedingoperations.The file name of an original CDR is "b*.bil". The "*" representsthe serial number of the CDR, which is numbered from0000000001 to 9999999999 based on access point. For

example b0000000009.bil in the directory of/var/frontsave/R99/20040314 is the ninth CDR file generatedout of the access point of R99 with generation date03-14-2004.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-5


/var/backsave/AccessPointName/PathName/” Date”/b*.dat

When generating an original CDR, CG9812 converts thereceived CDR information and generates a final CDR file withthe information until the size of the file exceeds a specifiedvalue (1 MB usually). Then, CG9812 replaces another CDRfile and repeats the preceding operations.

The file name of an original CDR is "b*.dat". The "*"represents the serial number of the CDR, which is numberedfrom 00000001 to 99999999 based on path name.

For example, b00000009.dat in the directory/var/backsave/R99/mcdr/20040314 is the ninth final bill innormal format generated out of the access point of R99 withgeneration date 03-14-2004.

Note:

The generated CDR file varies with conversion types.

In the CDR storage directory, "AccessPointName"depends on the setting of [AccessPoint%d] /APName inthe igwb.ini file of CG9812.

1.3.3 Common directory structure and main files

The CG9812 also generates log files, alarms files, status files. Through these files, you

can know the current status of the system.

I. Structure of common file directory


/var/other Stores files related to alarm, log, and status.

/var/other/alarm Stores history alarms.

/var/other/log Stores log related files.

/var/other/mml Stores operator information.

/var/other/perf Stores performance and status information.

/var/other/master

Stores the name of the activated SC switch. Either switch

replaces the content in the original file with its own switchname after being activated. In this way, when a switch isactivated, you can know switchover happens if the switchname in the master file is not the actual one. This concernsprogram implementation only.

/var/other/querybr owse

Stores the status file generated by the program during CDRbrowsing. You can ignore this.

/var/other/cdrstat Stores CDR statistical results.

/var/other/log_archive

Stores the packed logs. On UNIX, logs are packed and savedautomatically.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-6


/var/other/statusfiles

Stores backup of status files.

/var/frontsave/AccessPoint

Stores system status files of a particular access point.

/var/frontsave/AccessPoint/netowrk

Stores status file of the access point for communication withthe switch.

/var/frontsave/AccessPoint/save

Stores status files of the access point regarding front and backdisks.

II. Main files


/var/other/log/*.logLog files. The prefix represents the date when the logfile is generated, for example, 20040420.log.

/var/other/statusfiles/backup _status.bsf

Status file of the backup module.

/var/frontsave/AccessPoint/netowrk/status.dat

Status file of the access point for communication withthe switch.

/var/frontsave/AccessPoint/save/R4_FS_MAIN.stf

Stores status files of the access point regarding thefront disk., for example, R4_FS_MAIN.stf is the frontsave disk status file of the access point of R4.

/var/frontsave/AccessPoint/save/R4_BS_*_MAIN.stf

Stores status files of the access point regarding theback disk. The question mark "*" represents the pathnumber, for example, R4_BS_00_MAIN.stf is theback save disk status file of Channel0 of the accesspoint of R4.

1.4 Directory Structure of the CG9812 Client

The default operation system of the CG9812 client is Windows XP or Windows

2000.The default installation directory of the CG9812 Client software is c:\igwb_Client.

This directory contains two subdirectories: Bin and Data. The Bin directory stores the

executable files and DLL files; the Data directory stores the Client data files and help

files.

I. Description of the directory structure

Directory Description

C:\iGWB_Client\bin Store the executable files and DLL files.

C:\iGWB_Client\data Store the Client data files and help files.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




1-7

II. Description of main files.


C:\WINNT\UICONFIG.ini

The Client parameter configuration file. Itspecifies the configuration of the Clientmaintenance port and the debugging port.Generally, it is unnecessary to change the filemanually.

C:\iGWB_Client\bin\Frame.exeThe executable file of the Client CDR console. Itcan be run directly.

C:\iGWB_Client\bin\debugws.exeThe executable file of the Client debuggingconsole. It can be run directly.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part V System MaintenanceHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 2 Routine Maintenance


2-1

Chapter 2 Routine Maintenance


Routine maintenance is the basis to ensure that the equipment can run securely, stably,

and reliably for a long time. The routine maintenance of the CG9812 includes the

following.

System Running

Hard Disk Detection

Operation Maintenance

2.2 System Running

Table 2-1 Routine maintenance regarding system operation (for UNIX)

Maintenancetask

Operation guide Reference standard

CheckingProcess

RunningStatus

Log in the CG9812 server,and enter the command of"#ps -ef|grep _proc" to

check whether cls_proc,ap_proc, knl_proc, andom_proc are running.

For an active dual-system node, allprocesses are running. For aninactive node, all processes are notrunning.

The number of the ap_proc

processes on an active node shouldbe the same as the settings of the[Common]/APCount item in theigwb.ini file.

CheckingDual-SystemHeartbeatState

Open the CDR console,and select[Operation/State Query]to query the heartbeatstatus. The normal

heartbeat status isdisplayed as "2/2".

This operation task is available onlyto dual-system hardwareconfiguration, not to single-systemoffice( the heartbeat state display“0/0” ) .

In the heartbeat state display 2/2,the denominator indicates the totalnumber of the heartbeat links andthe numerator indicates the numberof the currently available heartbeatlinks. The two numbers should beequal.

Checking theCDR receivingstatus of theCG9812 fromthe switch

Make a call on the switchand send the CDR to theCG9812.

Check the generated CDRfrom the CG9812 Client.

The CG9812 can receive the CDRgenerated for this call from theswitch. You can browse this CDR onthe CDR console.

The CDR data is correct without lossor duplicate.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-2

Maintenancetask

Operation guide Reference standard

Checking CDRCollection ofBilling Center

Login the CG9812 server.Open the/var/backsave/second/AccessPointName/APName directory to check whetherCDRs of more than oneday are accumulated.

For "AccessPointName", refer to thesettings of[AccessPoint%d]/APName in theigwb.ini file. If there are severalaccess points, check them one byone.

"PathName" refers to the otherfolders except "default" in the/var/backsave/second/AccessPointName directory, corresponding todifferent types of final CDRs. Theremight be one or several folders.Check them one by one.

Checking thebill backupstatus

After the final bills aregenerated, start thebackup function inaccordance with thedestination path andsource path of theconfigured backup task,and then check the loginformation or thedestination path.

The log records the backup details.

The backed-up bills are saved in thedestination path.

2.3 Hard Disk Detection

Table 2-2 Routine maintenance regarding hard disk detection

Item Operation guide Reference standard

CheckingHard DiskSpace

Open the CDRconsole, and select [Operation/StateQuery] to query thefree space of thefront save disk andback save disk.

On the [State Query] interface, disk space isexpressed as "n/m", in which m represents thetotal capacity in MBs, and the numerator nindicates the usable space in MBs.

When the available disk space is less than 800MB (the minimum alarming space) by default,

the system generates an alarm prompting thatthe medium space is insufficient.

When the available disk space is less than 400MB (the minimum switchover space) bydefault, the system generates an alarmprompting that the medium space isinsufficient. For the dual systems with thenon-sharing hard disk array, the systems willbe switched over. If it is a single system, thesystem cannot receive CDRs. For the dualsystems with the sharing hard disk array, thesystems will be switched over. If it is a singlesystem, the system cannot receive CDRs.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-3


CheckingHard Disk

Fault

Check whether thedisk array of theCG9812 server isoperating well.

Observe the indicator of the disk array. If theindicator is red, the hard disk is faulty and must

be replaced.

2.4 Operation Maintenance

Table 2-3 Routine maintenance regarding system operation


BrowsingCDRs

Start the CDRconsole. View the

CDRs to checkwhether there areincorrect CDRs.

The CDR console marks error on the CDRsthat cannot be resolved.

Checkingtraceinformation

Log in to theCG9812. Checkwhether the latestcontents of the filesin the “Trace” folderall indicate normal.

This operation must be performed on bothnodes of the dual CG9812 systems.

1) Each file in the “Trace” foldercorresponds to a process.

2) Not all the contents in the trace filesindicate abnormal. Analysis is required.Refer to 3.5 “Trace Information andMaintenance“ .

Checkingdebugginginformationandcheckingexceptionalarm

Start the CG9812debugging console.Check whether thedebugginginformation outputsindicate normal andwhether there are

exception alarms.

1) Open the debugging information outputwindow of the debugging console.Observe whether there are abnormaloutputs.

2) Open the protocol information outputwindow of the debugging console.Observe whether there are CDRreception and exception alarms.

3) Open the workflow information outputwindow of the debugging console.Observe whether there are abnormaloutputs.

Note: The outputs in the debugginginformation window will be refreshedfrequently when the traffic is increasing,which might influence your observation.Consequently, use the precedingobservation methods when appropriate, forexample, when the traffic is light.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




2-4


Switchovertest

In dual-systemenvironments, testwhether the activeand standby nodecan be switchednormally.

Open the CDR console, and select [Operation/Manually Switch] to manualswitch over the CG9812 server.

Verify whether the standby device can beactivated within five minutes.

Manually switch over the CG9812 serveragain. Detect whether the active device canbe activated and the standby device can bedeactivated accordingly.

Note: Switchover test might influence thenormal operation of the system. Do not useit frequently.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part V System MaintenanceHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 3 Troubleshooting


3-1

Chapter 3 Troubleshooting


Generally, troubleshooting undergoes the process of information collection -> fault

location -> fault removal.

Fault positioning information about the CG9812 falls into the following types:

Device maintenance and fault positioning interfaces provided in the design of the

CG9812 software, such as trace information, parameter configuration, and log.

Fault positioning measures provided by the operating system, such as ifconfig,

netstat, and ping.

3.2 Fault Positioning Information on the CG9812

I. Trace Information

Trace information plays an important role in positioning a fault. Each piece of trace

information is expressed in the following format:

Trace generation time Module number writing the trace Trace contents

Trace records are significant debugging information for the running of the system.

Trace is not equal to abnormality. Usually a large number of trace records are

generated when the system is started or shut down. A few trace records are generated

when the system is operating normally.

The CG9812 application has five types of processes, see Table 3-1.

Table 3-1 Processes of CG9812 server


/opt/igwb/cls_proc cls_proc_trace.txt

/opt/igwb/knl_proc knl_proc_trace.txt

/opt/igwb/ap_proc ap_proc access point ID_trace.txt

/opt/igwb/om_proc om_proc_trace.txt

In the actual running, the dual-system process, kernel process, and operation and

maintenance processes have only one respective process instance, but the access

point process can start one or more process instances depending on the parameter

configuration. Each process instance of the CG9812 creates a trace file. Each trace file

has a size limit of 6 MB. When this limit is reached, the application changes the

filename suffix of the trace file txt to tmp, and then creates a new trace file.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-2

II. Configuration Information

Because a large number of faults are caused by parameter configuration errors, it is

recommended to analyze both parameter configuration files and trace information.

Configuration information of the CG9812 includes parameter configuration information

and CDR format configuration information. The parameter configuration information is

stored in the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file by default. The CDR format

configuration information is stored in the /opt/igwb/config/format.

III. CDR Files

To remove a CDR exception of the CG9812, analyze the original CDR file and the final

CDR file.

The original CDR files and the final CDR files of the CG9812 are respectively stored in

/var/frontsave and /var/backsave.

Original CDR: the CDR that the CG9812 collects from the switch.

Final CDR: the CDR with the information converted after being received.

IV. Log

Log records the operations performed on the device through the maintenance console.

Log is helpful in positioning faults.

Log files are stored in /var/other . The system creates a log file every day. The

generation date is used as the file name. “.log” is the extension of the file. Log file of the

CG9812 is stored for one month by default. After expiration, the log file will be deletedautomatically. Usually the hardware failure is recorded in the log.

V. State Query

The CG9812 provides the state query function to facilitate routine maintenance, but the

function is not very helpful in positioning faults.

You can query the current running state of the CG9812 through the debugging console.

To query the state, follow the steps below:

1) On the CG9812 Client, select Operation/State Query.

2) In the State Query window, click the Setting Properties shortcut icon. The

Setting Properties dialog box is displayed.

3) Set the Save Status to Open, and the status information will be saved in the

StatsInfo.txt file under the installation directory of the maintenance terminal.

Table 3-2 lists the state available.

Table 3-2 Common running state of the CG9812

State Description

Primary/Secondary

State

0 represents the active node, and 1 represents the standby

node.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-3

State Description

Heartbeat State

Heartbeat state is expressed as "n/m", in which thedenominator m indicates the total number of the heartbeatlinks and the numerator n indicates the number of thecurrently normal heartbeat links. Usually two heartbeat linksare configured, that is, m is equal to 2.

If n is not equal to 0 and m is not equal to n, it indicates thatpart of the heartbeat links is faulty.

To ensure the reliable running of the system, check theheartbeat links and restore the faulty link.

CPU Used (%) Currently, the CG9812 can display two CPU usages atmost. If only one CPU is configured, "-" is displayed in theplace of the second CPU usage.

Disk Space (MB)

Currently you can query the total space and available space

of the front disk and back disk, which is expressed as "n/m".Here, the denominator m indicates the total space of thedisk in MBs, and the numerator n indicates the usablespace in MBs.

Physical MEM (MB)

The current physical memory usage is used. The format is"n/m". Here, the denominator m indicates the total size ofthe physical memory in MBs, and the numerator n indicatesthe available size in MBs.

3.3 Fault positioning information on OS

I. IP Address Configuration

To obtain the IP address configuration, run # ifconfig –a. The IP address can be also

obtained automatically, and this mode is recommended.

II. Network Connection State

When the network connection state is normal, the CG9812 system can run normally.

Execute #netstat –na to obtain the current network connection state of the

operating system, including the protocol used by the routing table, gateway

address, network port No., and so on.

To dump the outputs for future reference, Execute #netstat –na>*.txt to dump the

output results for later query and transfer. It is recommended to name the dumping

file the operation date. For example, “20040805” indicates that operation was

performed on Aug 5th, 2004.

III. Process Running Status

Execute #ps –ef|grep _proc to check whether the processes of the CG9812 are

running. In UNIX, on an inactive node, no process runs; for an active node, the

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-4

processes of cls_proc, knl_proc, om_proc and ap_proc run. Only when these

processes are activated, you can log in to the parameter configuration console.

3.4 Collection of Fault Positioning InformationCollection of fault positioning information depends on the running of the system and the

type of the fault. The following section presents the required information according to

the type of the fault.

I. Interface Communication Fault

This type of fault refers to the faults occurring to the interface between the switch and

the CG9812 or the interface between the CG9812 and the billing system. The following

information is required for removing such a fault.

Parameter configuration file, igwb.ini

All trace files

IP address configuration and network connection state of the operating system

II. CDR Exception

This type of fault refers to the exceptional billing information found when you are

viewing the CDRs or the billing complaints from subscribers. The following information

is required for removing such a fault.


CDR format configuration files (All files in the default directory \config\format). Original and final CDR files containing the exceptional billing information

III. Startup Failure

This type of fault refers to the various exceptions occurring to the startup process of the

CG9812 application. The following information is required for removing such a fault.


CDR format configuration files (All files in the default directory \config\format).

All trace files

IP address configuration of the operating system

IV. Hardware Fault

Provision of the hardware fault positioning system depends on the log function of the

operating system. You can check the hard disk status indicator on the hard disk array. If

the hard disk status indicator is red, the hard disk is damaged.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-5

3.5 Trace Information and Maintenance

When the CG9812 is running, some significant running information and fault

information is recorded in the trace files in /opt/igwb/trace.

The common trace information and the related maintenance measures are presented

as follows.

3.5.1 Usable Front Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Alarming Space

Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check the FrontSaveRootDir and excute

#df -k

Check the available space of the file system. If the available disk space is insufficient,

consider reducing the value in [DiskFile]/DeadLineOfAutoDel or delete unnecessary

CDR files.

If they are not configured, the default values for FrontSaveRootDir and

MinDiskAlarmRoom are /var/frontsave and 15% of the total disk capacity

respectively.

3.5.2 Usable Back Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Alarming Space

Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check the FrontSaveRootDir and

MinDiskAlarmRoom configuration parameters under [DiskFile]. Confirm the disk

storing the final CDRs (back disk CDRs) and the size of the minimum alarming space.Check the available space of the corresponding disk. Execute the following command

on the server.

#df -k


consider reducing the value in [DiskFile]/DeadLineOfAutoDel or deleting

unnecessary CDR files.

If they are not configured, the default values for the parameters are /var/backsave and

15% of the total disk capacity respectively.

3.5.3 Usable Backup Medium Space Insufficient for the Minimum Alarming

Space

Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check MinBakDeviceRoom under

[NetBackup] and [BackupTask*]. Here, the question mark "*" represents the specific

backup task number. Execute the following command on the server.

#df -k

Check the available space of the disk. If the space is really insufficient, and

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-6

the backup medium is a tape, consider changing a new medium, and ensure that

MinBakDeviceRoom is 50 MB.

the backup medium is the local hard disk or network storage, consider moving the

backup data to other place, so as to make available more space in the medium.

3.5.4 Usable Front Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Switchover

Space

Open the /opt/igwb/config/igwb.ini file. Check the FrontSaveRootDir and

MinDiskHandoverRoom configuration parameters under [DiskFile]. Confirm the disk

storing the original CDRs (front disk CDRs) and the size of the minimum alarming

space. Check the available space of the corresponding disk. Then, execute the

following command on the server.

#df -k


consider reducing the value in [DiskFile]/DeadLineOfAutoDel or delete unnecessary

CDR files.

If they are not configured, the default values for them are 5% of /var/frontsave.

3.5.5 Usable Back Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Switchover

Space

Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check the FrontSaveRootDir and

MinDiskHandoverRoom configuration parameters under [DiskFile]. Confirm the disk

storing the final CDRs (back disk CDRs) and the size of the minimum handover space.

Then, execute the following command on the server.

#df -k


consider to reduce the value in [DiskFile]/DeadLineOfAutoDel or delete unnecessary

CDR files.

If they are not configured, the default values for them are 5% of /var/backsave.

3.5.6 Access Point Type, Access Point Type Being %d

Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check whether the APType parameter

under [AccessPointN] is correct. If not, correct the setting of the parameter.

AccessPointN is the parameter related to a specific access point, in which N is the ID

of the access point in the range of 1 to m, and m is the value of the APCount parameter

under [Common].

APType refers to the type of the access point which must be entered correctly. (0: fixed

network 128, 1: GSM or CDMA, 2: STP, 3: GPRS, 4:WCDMA, 5: SoftSwtich).

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-7

3.5.7 Failure of Reading IP Address from MML Server (Default Value %s)

Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check whether the LocalIpToMMLClient

parameter under [MML] is correct. If not correct, correct the setting of the parameter.

LocalIpToMMLClient refers to the local IP address of the MML server for the

connection to the MML CG9812 client, that is, the IP address for the CG9812 to

connect the network management system.

3.5.8 Error Code %d Returned in Socket Registration When Connecting

Kernel Process

Probably the kernel process is not running.

Execute the following command to check whether the kernel process is running.

# ps -ef | grep knl_proc

If some similar result is output, this indicates that the kernel process is running.

root 589 1 0 12:34:54 ? 0:16 ./knl_proc

Otherwise, it is recommended to restart the CG9812 server.

3.5.9 Kernel Process Not Running

Execute the following command to check whether the kernel process is running.

# ps -ef | grep knl_proc

If some similar result is output, this indicates that the kernel process is running.

root 589 1 0 12:34:54 ? 0:16 ./knl_proc

Otherwise, it is recommended to restart the CG9812 server.

3.5.10 Failure of Opening Listening Port with Error Code %d

Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check whether the IP address and the

port number of the MML server under [MML] are correct. If not, correct the settings.

LocalIpToMMLClient refers to the local IP address of the MML server for the

connection to the MML LMT. That is, the IP address for the CG9812 to connect the

network management system.

LocalPortToCM refers to the MML maintenance port of the MML server. It takes the

value of 6000.

LocalPortToAR refers to the MML alarm report port of the MML server. It takes the

value of 6001.

LocalPortToRD refers to the MML debugging port of the MML server. It takes the value

of 6007.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-8

3.5.11 Activation Failure of Asynchronous Resource

The asynchronous resource refers to the knl_proc process. In this case, open the

/opt/igwb/trace/knl_proc_trace.txt file to position the failure. In addition, an activation

failure of the knl_proc process might be caused by its sub-processes (ap_proc and

om_proc), so open the ap_proc_trace.txt and om_proc_trace.txt files for further

positioning purposes. For the specific positioning methods, refer to information in

section 3.5.1 –3.5.10 .

3.5.12 Dual-System Activation Failure

Dual-system activation failure is caused by an activation failure of the asynchronous

resource. To know the reasons of the activation failure, refer to the problem in

Table 3-3.

3.5.13 Switchover

This information indicates that because the local end of the CG9812 becomes faulty, it

must be switched to the peer.

Table 3-3 Switchover cause table

Switchovercause code

Explanation

0

Failed to write file, which is probably caused by insufficient disk

space.

1Insufficient front disk space, which means that the size of theavailable space of the disk storing the original CDRs is less than theminimum switchover space (5% by default).

2Insufficient back disk space, which means that the size of theavailable space of the disk storing the final CDRs is less than theminimum switchover space (5% by default).

3 Asynchronous resource failure, which refers to the failure of theknl_proc process. For specific troubleshooting methods, refer to the3.5.11 .

4

Activation failure of the cls_proc process, which is probably causedby an asynchronous resource activation failure or resource creationfailure. Such a failure is positioned according to the specific traceinformation.

5Resource failure. Resource failure includes virtual IP resourcefailure, volume resource failure, and service failure. Refer to thetrace information for the further troubleshooting.

6 Damaged hard disk of the array. Replace the damaged disk.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




3-9

3.5.14 Switchover Failure

Two possible causes may result in such a fault.

One is the failure of the local CG9812, in which the local CG9812 detects the

interruption of all heartbeats.

The other is the activation failure when the peer attempts to activate itself upon

reception of the failover command.

Such a fault is generated by the local CG9812. In this case, confirm that the peer is

running, and remove the faults at the peer.

3.5.15 Operation Failure at Failover Response End

Such a fault is caused when the local CG9812 attempts to activate itself upon reception

of the failover command, but fails.

Check other specific trace information to position the activation failure.

3.5.16 Starting to Perform Handover Operation

This information may appear in the following cases.

The active server is being started.

The peer CG9812 is faulty, and the local end is deactivated.

The local CG9812 receives a manual switchover command from the CG9812

LMT.

3.5.17 Multiple Failed Activation Attempts at Local Node and can Never be

Activated Unless Heartbeat is Interrupted

The local end continuously performs activation attempts (three times by default), but all

fail. In this case, the local end stops the activation operation, and enters the

FAILDOWN state. After one hour, the local end restores to the normal state, and starts

the activation operation again. The local end repeats the same until the heartbeat links

are restored to be normal.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part V System MaintenanceHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 4 Frequently Asked Questions


4-1

Chapter 4 Frequently Asked Questions


This section collects the frequently asked questions and the solutions regarding the

CG9812.

4.2 Logging in to CDR console failed

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault None

Problem description Logging in to the CDR console failed

1) The CG9812 is not running.

If you enter the correct username and password to log in tothe CDR console but the system prompts “Connecting theserver failed, re-login?” , it indicates that the CG9812 is notrunning or running abnormally. In this case, start or restartthe CG9812 and log in to the CDR console again.

2) Network fault occurs.

When you work on the CDR console, for example, browsethe bills or log information, if the system displays a promptas shown in the following figure, it indicates that thenetwork is faulty. In this case, check the networkconnectivity, or quit the Client and reconnect the network.

Causes and solutions

3) The CG9812 is switched over.

When you work on the CDR console, if the CG9812 isswitched over, the connection between the Client and theServer will be interrupted until you log in to the CG9812again after the switchover.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-2

4.3 Conflicting TCP Port 6000

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault None

Problem description

Execute ps -ef | grep _proc on the SUN Solaris workstationwith CG9812 installed, and you may find the ap_proc,cls_proc, knl_proc, and om_proc processes are notrunning. Check /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini, and noparameter errors are found. Check the files in the /opt/igwb/trace directory, and you find the TRACE file ofthe om_proc contains some abnormal records.

Sat May 22 17:22:30 2004 (MT_COMM) Failed to open

listener port(129.3.1.3:6000),ErrCode=125(Address

already in use)Sat May 22 17:22:30 2004 (MT_COMM) Failed to init

CommLayer object,ErrCode=-1


If the IP address of 129.3.1.3 exists on the SUNworkstation, the om_proc is not started because the TCPport 6000 has been used. On Solaris, the default TCP portof X-Windows is 6000, and the default TCP port betweenthe CG9812 and the maintenance console is also 6000.That's why the TCP port 6000 conflicts.

To solve this problem, modify the following information inthe /usr/dt/config/Xservers file of SUN workstation :0Local local_uid@console root /usr/openwin/bin/Xsun :0

–nobannerto

:50 Local local_uid@console root /usr/openwin/bin/Xsun :50 –nobanner

Then, restart the Solaris OS.

4.4 Failure to Decode ASN.1 CDR

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault None

Problem description

The billing center reports that decoding the ASN.1 CDRsfrom the CG9812 fails. But nothing is error when youbrowse the final CDRs of the same in the equipment room.

Check the CDRs collected from the billing center usingUltraEdit, and you can find the 0D 0A content.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-3

Title Description


There are various causes that may lead to decodingfailure. And the most common cause is that the billingcenter collects CDRs in an error FTP mode. To collect ASN.1 CDRs, the binary mode must be used. However,the default FTP mode after login is text mode. This isusually ignored by the billing center.

In this case, you can ask the billing center to modify theFTP mode and recollect CDRs.

For the binary CDRs, this problem also occurs if the billingcenter collects CDRs in a wrong FTP mode. In this case,you can handle it likewise.

4.5 Failure to Run Setup Script

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault None

Problem description

While installing the CG9812 on Solaris, executesh ./igwb_install.sh script. The script works abnormally.Some prompts appear.

: nstall.sh not found:

' unexpected tall.sh: syntax error in line 75: `in

Check the igwb_install.sh script using the vi editor, and youcan find "^M" at the end of each line.


The cause is that the FTP mode used to upload CG9812Solaris version is incorrect. On Solaris, any .gz file must betransmitted in binary mode, and any .sh file must betransmitted in text mode through FTP.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-4

4.6 Sequence of Powering on Dual-System

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault 4.7 Sequence of Powering off Dual-System

Problem description None


SUN mini computers work as the CG9812 server, thesequence of powering on dual systems is as follow.

1) Power on the disk array (for two disk arrays, thepower-on sequence is not specified).

2) Power on the mini computer working as the activeCG9812 and wait for 3 to 5 minutes.

3) Power on the mini computer working as the standbyCG9812.

For preceding procedures, be sure to first power on thedisk array.

4.7 Sequence of Powering off Dual-System

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault 4.6 Sequence of Powering on Dual-System

Problem description None


SUN mini computers work as the CG9812 server, thesequence of powering off dual systems is as follow.

1) Power off the mini computer working as the standbyCG9812.

2) Power off the mini computer working as the activeCG9812.

3) Power off the disk array (for two disk arrays, thepower-off sequence is not specified).

For the preceding procedures, be sure to power off the diskarray at last. Beside, power off the mini computer in correctprocedures. That is, first close the CG9812 program, andthen shut down the OS. Direct power-off during running ofOS is prohibited.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-5

4.8 Delayed CDR Fetching

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault None

Problem descriptionThe CG9812 always reports the alarm for delayed CDRfetching.


If the office generating the alarm is not cut over, that is, theCG9812 and billing center are not interconnected, thisalarm is normal. If a cutover office generates this alarm,check the alarm parameter given in Description. Theparameter indicates the channel of the CG9812 whereCDRs accumulate. You can check the directory

accordingly. If there are really CDRs accumulated, checkwhether the link between the CG9812 and billing center isinterrupted, or confirm with the billing center whether thecollection frequency is too low.

In addition, for some product lines, although the CG9812sorts many channels, the billing center only needs andcollects the CDRs under a certain channel. For example,when applied in radio packet domain, the CG9812generates CDRs such as S-CDR, G-CDR, and M-CDR.But usually, only the S-CDR is used for billing. In this case,you may use some parameter to disable the channelswhere G-CDR and M-CDR are generated to generateanother CDR. For example, provided the ID of the channelwhere G-CDR is 2, configure the following parameters.

[Channel1-2]

SaveSecond=0

Here, Channel1 indicates the access point ID, andchannel2 indicates the channel number.

4.9 Failure to Restart Sun Mini Computer after SuddenPower-off

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault None

Problem description

The CG9812 cabinet powers off suddenly. After you poweron the CG9812 again, the Solaris system enters the singleuser mode, and SUN Cluster and CG9812 software cannotrun.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-6

Title Description


Sudden power-off of the Solaris, including other UNIXoperating systems, may damage the file system. In thiscase, log in the system, enter the single user mode, andthen execute the command of #fsck -y repeatedly until thesystem does not prompt an error to be fixed.

You must repeatedly execute the fsck command till the filesystem is completely fixed, because this is the only way foryou. If this command still does not work, the only thing youcan do is to rebuild the file system, which means a loss ofall data.

4.10 "No utmpx entry" When Logging in Solaris System

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault 4.11 Oversize /var/adm/wtmpx File

Problem description

After you input the user name and password for loginSolaris system, the system prompts an error.

SunOS 5.8

login: oracle

Password:

No utmpx entry. You must exec login from the lowest

level shell.


This is usually because the root partition ( /)or /var partitionare used up. For each login, the operating systemgenerates a record in the /var/adm/utmpx and /var/adm/wtmpx files for audit purpose. If the disk is full,the system rejects any login.

In this case, the login user should not log out, and the loginuser who does not login as the root user should switch tothe root user using su command. Otherwise, the user canlogin as the root user from the console.

Then, use the command of df -k to check the / partition or /var partition are completely or nearly used up. Delete theunnecessary files in the partition. Usually, the files in the

/var/adm directory, such as messages.0, and messages.1,are the backup log files, which can be deleted. Note thatthe /var/adm/messages files cannot be deleted directly,use the following command instead.

# > /var/adm/messages

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-7

4.11 Oversize /var/adm/wtmpx File

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault 4.10 "No utmpx entry" When Logging in Solaris System

Problem descriptionWith long-term running of the system, the /var/adm/wtmpx file occupies more and more space.Consequently, the system may reject user login.


Execute the following command.

# > /var/adm/wtmpx

This command is only to clear the content of the file. In thiscase, the file length becomes 0 byte, but the file still exists

and file authority is kept unchanged.The content of the /var/adm/wtmpx file is in binary format.To view the content, use the following command to convertit into the text format.

# /usr/lib/acct/fwtmp < /var/adm/wtmpx > wtmpx.txt

Now, you can use the vi editor to read the generatedwtmpx.txt file.

4.12 A 3MB Original CDR Generated after One or Two Calls

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault None

Problem description After making one or two calls, you find that an original CDRfile of 3MB in the CG9812 server, but you only find one ortwo CDRs through the CG9812 LMT.


This is a normal case. The CG9812 reserve 3MB space tostore a CDR file when receiving original CDRs. The file isempty at first, and then has data written into it. When more

than 3MB data are written, a new file is created. This file isalso closed when the CG9812 is stopped or after severaldays, which may truncate invalid data and reduce the sizeof the original CDR.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-8

4.13 Connection Failure Alarm During Backup over Network

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault None

Problem description

The alarm box always sends the alarm for "networkconnection fail". The alarm cannot be removed. The settingof the ftp server is correct, but the backup cannot be made.The backup data in igwb.ini are as follows.

[NetBackup]

DestHostIP = 10.66.151.74 ;Destination host IP

address

LocalIP = 10.66.153.11 ;Local host IP address


Password=adminBeforeEncode=0

BackupTaskCount=1 ;Total number of backup

tasks


The password for site configuration is a plain code. Youshould change the BeforeEncode value from 0 to 1, andthen restart the CG9812. This is because for backup overnetwork, if you configure the password to a plain code forthe first time, you must set BeforeEncode to 1. TheCG9812 will automatically encrypt the plain code inigwb.ini, and change BeforeEncode to 0. Afterwards, youneed not modify password and BeforeEncode manually.

4.14 Making Generated CDRs Meeting Special Requirements

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault None

Problem description

The office requires that all SCDR files on the CG9812 arein a format of GGfileXX.YYYY. Here, GGfile is fixed; XXvalues 01-99, representing different SGSN; YYYY is the

postfix, representing the sequence number. Note that thesequence number of CDRs values 0001-9999, andrecycles from 0001 after 9999 is numbered.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-9

Title Description


You can modify configuration in igwb.ini to meet the office'srequirements.

Add the following information under [AccessPoint] in theigwb.ini files of the active and standby servers of CG9812.

CsnLen=4

Prefix=GGfileXX.

Postfix=

Here are some explanations.

CsnLen=4, namely YYYY.

Prefix=GGfileXX. Namely GGfile + XX (changed with the

specific requirement) + "." (a point)

Postfix= (null). That is, configure it to null.

4.15 SUN Netra 20 cannot be started

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault 4.9 Failure to Restart Sun Mini Computer after SuddenPower-off

Problem description

The system cannot be started when it is powered on at thecommissioning site. The red indicator marked with ejectorlever flashes all the time, and the following prompt isshown from the serial port:

lom>[Host console]

LOM event: +3d+4h29m22s host power on

LOM: Couldn't read SCC ID: ensure correct insertion

LOM: insert SCC to avert power-down in 60s.

LOM event: +3d+4h29m24s host FATAL FAULT: SCC removed

LOM event: +3d+4h29m24s Fault LED 1Hz

LOM: correct SCC not replaced - shutting system down

lom>

LOM event: +3d+4h30m28s host power off

lom>


This is because SCC cards are provided with the Metra20and the successive medium- and high-level SUN servers.These cards are provided for identification purpose. The

SCC card, which comes with the product ex factory, shouldbe inserted into the slot on the back of the small computer.However, as shown in the prompt information, the card isnot inserted or not well contacted. This card is configuredon the leftmost back of the device. To solve the aboveproblem. Make sure the card is inserted and wellcontacted.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-10

4.16 Sun Netra t1405 cannot be switched over

Title Description

Severity level

Related fault 4.9 Failure to Restart Sun Mini Computer after SuddenPower-off

Problem description

The dual system consisting of the Netra t1405 and the A1000 is employed at the commissioning site. However,the system cannot be normally switched over, and thefollowing prompt is displayed:

>root@igwb1 # vxvm:vxconfigd: WARNING: Disk igwbdg02

in group igwbdg: Disk

>device not found

>Jul 28 16:35:52 igwb1 Cluster.Framework: stderr:

vxvm:vxdg: WARNING

>Jul 28 16:35:52 igwb1 Cluster.Framework: stderr: :Disk igwbdg02: Not

>found, las

>t known location: c2t5d1s2

>

>root@igwb2 # vxvm:vxconfigd: WARNING: Disk igwbdg01

in group igwbdg: Disk

>device not found

>Jul 28 16:34:38 igwb2 Cluster.Framework: stderr:

vxvm:vxdg: WARNING

>Jul 28 16:34:38 igwb2 Cluster.Framework: stderr: :

Disk igwbdg01: Not found, last known location:

c1t5d1s2

>

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




4-11

Title Description


To solve this problem, follow the steps below:

1) In UNIX, run the commands below:

#cd /opt/SUNexpl*/*bin#./explorer -v Save the generated system information in /opt/SUNWexpl*/output. With this information, themaintenance personnel can find out why the systemcannot be switched over.

2) In the disks\sonoma\ directory, check the SCSI anddisk information. By comparing the informationbetween the two nodes, you can find that only thecomplementary disk array information is detected forthe igwb1 and the igwb2. So, we can figure out thatthe SCSI cable is not correctly connected. Check andreconnect the SCSI cable tightly. The problem is

solved.

In the igwb1:

>Health Check Summary Information

>A1000-1: Failed Module

>A1000-2: Optimal

>

>healthck succeeded!

>-------------------------------------------------

----------------------

A1000-1: single-controller

Active controller a (c1t5d0) units: 0 1

/usr/sbin/osa/rdacutil succeeded!


Active controller a (1T31878248) units: none


In the igwb2:


Active controller a (1T30354225) units: none



Active controller a (c2t5d0) units: 0 1


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual Part V System MaintenanceHUAWEI CG9812 Chapter 5 System Alarms


5-1

Chapter 5 System Alarms


This chapter introduces the internal alarms of the CG9812.The alarms are listed in

Table 5-1.

Table 5-1 System alarms

Index Alarm

Alarmtype

Alarmlevel

NMS category

ALM-0001 Insufficient Disk Space Fault Critical Software system

ALM-0003BS Not Fetch Bills for aLong Time

Fault Major Software system

ALM-0005 Heartbeat Interruption Fault Critical Software system

ALM-0007 Cluster Switchover Fault Critical Software system

ALM-0009Private NetworkInterruption

Fault Critical Software system

ALM-0013 IP Resource Failure Fault Critical Software system

ALM-0015 Volume ResourceFailure


ALM-0017 Hard disk Failure Fault Critical Software system

ALM-0019 Write File Failure Event Critical Software system

ALM-0021 Abnormal CDR Event Critical Software system

ALM-0023 File Backup Failure Event Critical Software system

ALM-0025Backup ConnectionFailure


ALM-0027 CPU Busy Fault Critical Software system

ALM-0029Insufficient AvailableMemory


ALM-0031Unauthorized ClientLogin

Event Major Software system

ALM-0033 License Notice Event Major Software system

ALM-0035 Cluster Handover Event Major Software system

ALM-0037 Hardware Failure Fault Critical Software system

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-2

Index Alarm

Alarmtype

Alarmlevel

NMS category

ALM-0039 Software Reset Event Major Software system

ALM-0051 Alarm BoxDisconnection


ALM-0053User InformationChange


ALM-0055Insufficient Disk Space(major)


ALM-0057Insufficient AvailableMemory (major)


ALM-0059 No GSN Response Fault Major Software system

5.2 ALM-0001 Insufficient Disk Space

Title Description

Alarm descriptionThe disk space for storing CDRs, final bills, or backup filesis lower than the minimum space.

Alarm parameter Disk type: 0-Front save; 1-Back save; 2-Backup disk

Impact on system

For a dual system, it may cause active/standby

switchover. For a single system, the bills cannot be saved so that

they may be lost or not backed up.

System response None

Correlative alarms Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None

Possible causeThe disk space is insufficient to store CDRs, final bills, orbackup files.

Solution According to the alarm parameter, find the specific diskand then delete expired bills, or reduce the time for storing

bills.

5.3 ALM-0003 BS Not Fetch CDRs for a Long Time

Title Description

Alarm description The billing center has not fetched the bills for long.

Alarm parameter Channel No.: Channel ID, access point ID.

Impact on system None

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-3

Title Description


Correlative alarms

Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None

Possible cause Connecting with the billing system failed.

Solution

Check whether the connection between the CG9812and the billing system.

Check whether FTP or FTAM runs normally.

Check whether the billing system runs normally.

5.4 ALM-0005 Heartbeat Interruption

Title Description

Alarm descriptionIn the dual system, the private network and serial portsused for heartbeat have not received any signal from thepeer end for long.

Alarm parameter None




Parent alarm: None

Possible causeThe private network and serial ports for heartbeat of thedual system are not connected well.

Solution

Check whether both nodes of the dual system arerunning.

Check if the cable between the serial ports is correctlyconnected.

Check if the private network cable is correctlyconnected.

Check if the IP addresses are correctly set.

5.5 ALM-0007 Cluster Switchover

Title Description

Alarm description The active server runs abnormally.




7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-4

Title Description


Parent alarm: None

Possible cause The active server runs abnormally.

SolutionCheck whether there are some concurrent/subsequentalarms. Then remove the fault in time.

5.6 ALM-0009 Private Network Interruption

Title Description

Alarm descriptionThe two nodes of the dual system cannot communicate

with each other through the private network for heartbeat.

Alarm parameter 0-Private network 1; 1-Private network 2.

Impact on systemHeartbeat No.: It may result in synchronization orswitchover failure.



Parent alarm: None

Possible causeThe two nodes of the dual system cannot communicatewith each other through the private network for heartbeat.

Solution Check the private network and IP addresses. Check if the network cables are correctly connected.

5.7 ALM-0013 IP Resource Failure

Title Description

Alarm descriptionThe active server cannot use a virtual IP of the dualsystem.

Alarm parameter IP resource No.: Virtual IP No.

Impact on systemIt may cause communication failure with the billing center,the GSN, and the NMS console.



Parent alarm: None

Possible causeThe active server cannot use a virtual IP of the dualsystem.

SolutionCheck whether the network adapter bound with the IPaddress is disabled or the network cable is unplugged.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-5

5.8 ALM-0015 Volume Resource Failure

Title Description

Alarm description The active server detects that some volume resource forbill storage is not available.

Alarm parameter Volume No.: 0-Front save; 1-Back save.

Impact on system CDRs or final bills may not be stored.



Parent alarm: None

Possible causeThe active server detects that some volume resource forbill storage is not available.

SolutionLocate the volume based on the alarm parameter andcheck whether the data line of the disk is connected well.

5.9 ALM-0017 Hardware Failure

Title Description

Alarm description The system detects an I/O read/write error on a hard disk.

Alarm parameter Slot No.: slot number for the hardware

Impact on system Bills cannot be saved and may be lost.



Parent alarm: None

Possible cause I/O read/write error occurs on a hard disk.

SolutionLocate the specific hard disk based on the alarmparameter and replace it immediately.

5.10 ALM-0019 Write File Failure

Title Description

Alarm description The CG9812 cannot store CDRs, final bills or backup bills.

Alarm parameter

Bill type: 0-CDR; 1-Final; 2-Backup

File name: Channel ID, the name of the bill file failed to bestored

Impact on system Bills may be lost.


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-6

Title Description


Parent alarm: None

Possible cause The CG9812 cannot store CDRs, final bills or backup bills.

SolutionBased on the alarm parameter, check whether there is noremaining space on the corresponding disk and whetherthe directory is writable.

5.11 ALM-0021 Abnormal CDR

Title Description

Alarm description The CG9812 detects some abnormal CDR.

Alarm parameterError type: Channel ID, error type (0-Length of CDR;1-Enoding; 2-Decoding; 3-CDR type; 4-Duplicate CDR)




Parent alarm: None

Possible cause Bill length or decoding error.

Solution Check if the length of the bill (for fixed-length bills) or

the ASN.1 description is correct.

5.12 ALM-0023 File Backup Failure

Title Description

Alarm description The CG9812 detects a bill backup failure.

Alarm parameter Backup ID: the sequence number of the backup task




Parent alarm: None

Possible cause

The write authority is not given to the operator, or thedirectory name is incorrect.

The available space on the FTP disk is insufficient.

Solution

Check if the operator has write authority or if thedirectory name is correct.

Locate the disk based on the alarm parameter. Deleteexpired bill files or reduce the time for storing bills.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-7

5.13 ALM-0025 Backup Connection Failure

Title Description

Alarm description The CG9812 fails to connect with the destination device.

Alarm parameter Backup ID: the sequence number of the backup task




Parent alarm: None

Possible cause The CG9812 cannot connect with the destination device.

Solution

Check whether the CG9812 can connect with thedestination device.

Check whether the backup parameters in the igwb.ini file are all correct.

5.14 ALM-0027 CPU Busy

Title Description

Alarm description The CG9812 detects that the CPU usage is too high.





Parent alarm: None

Possible cause Several programs are running simultaneously.

Solution Stop some of the programs.

5.15 ALM-0029 Insufficient Available Memory

Title Description

Alarm description The CG9812 detects that the memory is insufficient.





Parent alarm: None

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-8

Title Description



5.16 ALM-0031 Unauthorized Client Login

Title Description

Alarm description The Client attempted unauthorized login for several times.

Alarm parameter

Error type: 0-Too many login failures; 1-Login duringunauthorized period.

Login information: User IP, user name.




Parent alarm: None

Possible cause

The Client failed to log in for several times.

The Client attempted to log in during unauthorizedperiod.

SolutionFind the IP address and unauthorized user name from theCG9812 log, and stop the unauthorized login.

5.17 ALM-0033 License Notice

Title Description

Alarm description The License is about to expire or is illegal.

Alarm parameter

Alarm type: 0-Invalid License; 1-Temporary Licenseexpired.

Alarm description: The detailed causes of the alarm.

Impact on system The bill service functions of the CG9812 cannot be used ifthe License is illegal or the temporary License expires.

System responseThe CG9812 cannot start the access point process toprocess the bills.


Parent alarm: None

Possible cause

The current License is unauthorized.

The validity time of the temporary License is less thanseven days.

Solution Apply for a valid License.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-9

5.18 ALM-0035 Cluster Handover

Title Description

Alarm description The operator executes switchover manually.



System responseThe system automatically switched from the active serverto the standby server.


Parent alarm: None

Possible causeThe operator executes switchover manually on the serviceconsole.

Solution None

5.19 ALM-0037 Hardware Failure

Title Description

Alarm descriptionSome hardware of the CG9812, such as a disk, CPU, fan,or power module, is faulty.

Alarm parameterHardware ID: 1-Disk; 2-Temperature; 3-Fan; 4-Powermodule

Impact on system

Disk failure can cause bill storage failure.

Overhigh temperature of the CPU can causeswitchover (in a dual system) or system crash (in asingle system).

Fan failure can cause overhigh temperature of theCPU.

Power module failure can cause the CG9812 failureand bill loss.

System responseIn a dual system, the CG9812 automatically switches over

the nodes.


Parent alarm: None

Possible cause

Hardware failure

Overhigh temperature of the CPU

Fan failure

Power module failure

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-10

Title Description

Solution

Find the specific faulty hardware based on the alarmparameter.

If the temperature of CPU is overhigh, stop otherapplications.

Replace the faulty hardware.

5.20 ALM-0039 Software Reset

Title Description

Alarm description The CG9812 is restarted.

Alarm parameter

Cause value: 0-System-triggered switchover;

1-Operator-made switchover. Operator: The operator that resets the CG9812 is “_”

by default.




Parent alarm: None

Possible cause

The operator restarts the CG9812.

The operator executes the killcluster.exe program.

Switchover is performed in the dual system.

Solution None

5.21 ALM-0051 Alarm Box Disconnection

Title Description

Alarm descriptionThe CG9812 does not receive the correct data from thealarm box in 30 seconds.


Impact on systemThe alarm box may be unable to receive the alarmgenerated by CG9812.


Correlative alarms Consequent alarms None.

Triggering alarms None.

Possible cause

The serial port cable connecting the alarm box andCG9812 is loosen.

The alarm box system is abnormal.

Solution Check the serial port cable, and reset the alarm box.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-11

5.22 ALM-0053 User information Change

Title Description

Alarm description The operator adds, deletes, or modifies the userinformation.

Alarm parameter

Update type: 0-Add; 1-Delete; 2-Modify.

Update detail: Update operating IP, updated username.




Parent alarm: None

Possible cause None

Solution None

5.23 ALM-0055 Insufficient Disk Space (major)

Title Description

Alarm descriptionThe disk space for storing CDRs, final bills or backup billsis lower than the minimum value.

Alarm parameter Medium type: 0-Front save; 1-Back save; 2-Backupmedium.

Impact on system It may trigger the alarm for insufficient disk space.



Parent alarm: None

Possible causeThe medium space that stores CDRs, final bills or backupbills is lower than the minimum value.

Solution

According to the alarm parameter, locate the specific disk.

Delete expired bills, or reduce the time for storing bills.

5.24 ALM-0057 Insufficient Available Memory (major)

Title Description

Alarm description The memory is lower than the minimum value



7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




5-12

Title Description


Correlative alarms

Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None



5.25 ALM-0059 No GSN Response

Title Description

Alarm description The GSN does not respond to the system.

Alarm parameter Parameter 1:0-GTP.

Parameter 2:IP address of GSN.

Impact on system The system cannot receive the CDRs from GSN.

System response The system deletes the requests.

Correlative alarms Consequent alarms: None.

Triggering alarms: None.

Possible cause The communication link is abnormal.

The GSN is faulty.

Solution Check the communication link and GSN.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



HUAWEI


Appendix

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual AppendixHUAWEI CG9812 Table of Contents


i

Table of Contents

Appendix A Common UNIX Commands......................................................................................A-1

A.1 Introduction to the Chapter................................................................................................A-1

A.2 Common Operations in UNIX System...............................................................................A-1

A.3 Common Commands for UNIX User Management...........................................................A-6

A.4 UNIX Utility Commands and Programs.............................................................................A-6

A.5 UNIX System Resource Commands.................................................................................A-7

A.6 UNIX Network Communication Commands ......................................................................A-7

Appendix B Abbreviations ...........................................................................................................B-1

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual AppendixHUAWEI CG9812 Appendix A Common UNIX Commands


A-1

Appendix A Common UNIX Commands

A.1 Introduction to the Chapter

This chapter introduces the common UNIX commands, for your reference. Including:

Common Operations in UNIX System

Common Commands for UNIX User Management

UNIX Utility Commands and Programs

UNIX System Resource Commands

UNIX Network Communication Commands

A.2 Common Operations in UNIX System

I. Directory browse and control

The directories of the UNIX file system looks like a tree expanding outwards from the

root. The root directory is usually represented by the symbol /. Under the root directory,

the system directories and user directories are organized. In UNIX system, you usually

enter your own home directory when login. You can create other subdirectories under

the home directory. Table A-1 lists the common directory browse and control

commands.

Table A-1 Directory browse and control commands

Command/Syntax Function

pwd Display the current working directory.

cd [Directory ] Switch the directory.

mkdir [Directory ] Create a directory.

rmdir [Directory ] Delete a directory.

ls [Option] [Directory or File] List directory contents or file information.

II. File maintenance commands

To create, copy, delete or modify files, you can use the file maintenance commands

listed in Table A-2.

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




A-2

Table A-2 File maintenance commands

Command/Usage Function

cp [Option] File 1 File 2 Copy a file

mv File 1 File 2 Move or rename a file

rm [Option] File Delete a file

chmod [Option] File Change the authority of a file

chown [Option] Owner File Change the owner of a file

chgrp [Option] Group File Change the group of a file

III. Text File Content-Displaying Command

Table A-3 lists some common system commands used to display and browse contents

of text files.

Table A-3 Commands for text file content display & browse


echo Character String [Option] Send character strings back to the screen

cat [Option] File Display file contents

more [Option] File

Display contents by page

head [Value] File Display the file header

tail [Value] File Display the file tail

clear Clear screen

IV. vi Command

Usage: # vi filename

Remarks: vi is a full-screen editor. In case of the command followed by several file

names, the second file is automatically opened when the first one is closed, and so on.

You must master vi for UNIX development.

The vi works in either command mode or input mode. In the input mode, all inputs are

inserted into the buffer area being edited currently as text. In the command mode, input

characters are translated into commands.

In the input mode, you can press <ESC> to enter the command mode.

1) Commands for entering input mode from command mode

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




A-3

Table A-4 Commands for entering input mode


a Insert text after the cursor

A Insert text to the end of the line where the cursor is placed.

C Modify the text after the cursor

cw Modify the character(s) in the word after the cursor

i Add new text into the place where the cursor resides

I Insert new text to the beginning of the current line

o Insert a line after the current line

O Insert a line before the current line

s Replace the current character with a string

2) Move Cursor Command

Table A-5 Commands for moving cursor


h, <Left>, backspace Move the cursor leftwards

j, <Down> Move the cursor downwards

K, <Up>

Move the cursor upwards

l, <Right>, space Move the cursor rightwards

0 (digit) Move the cursor to the beginning of the current line

$ Move the cursor to the end of the current line

b, B

Move the cursor to the first character of the word beforethe original one (B for ignoring punctuations)

w, W

Move the cursor to the first character of the word after theoriginal one (C for ignoring punctuations)

(

Move the cursor to the beginning of the last sentence

) Move the cursor to the beginning of the next sentence

{Move the cursor to the beginning of the last paragraph(paragraphs are divided by an empty line)

}Move the cursor to the beginning of the next paragraph(paragraphs are divided by an empty line)

[[ Move the cursor to the beginning of the last section(sections are divided by “{”)

]] Move the cursor to the beginning of the next section(sections are divided by “{”)

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




A-4


H Move the cursor to the first line of the current buffer area

L Move the cursor to the last line of the current buffer area

M

Move the cursor to the middle line of the current bufferarea

3) Move Edit Area Command (“^” for <Ctrl>)

Table A-6 Commands for moving edit area (“^” for <Ctrl>)


^B One screen up(backward)

^U Half screen up(backward)

^F One screen down(upward)

^D Half screen down(upward)

4) Go to Line N

Table A-7 Going to line n


: n

Go to line n

nG Go to line n

1G Go to line 1 of the file

G Go to the end of the file

5) Modify Command

Table A-8 Modify commands

Command/Usage

Function

r Replace one character, but not enter the input mode

~ Upper case to lower case or vice versa

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




A-5

6) Cancel and Repeat Command

Table A-9 Cancel and repeat commands


. Repeat the last command to modify the buffer area

u Cancel the last command

7) Delete Text

Table A-10 Delete commands


dd Delete the current line

d n d Delete n lines below the current line

dG

Delete the contents between the cursor and the endof the file

DDelete the contents between the cursor and the endof the line.

x Delete the current character

:line1, line2d Delete lines between line1 and line2

:line1, $ d Delete all lines from line1 to the end of the file ($ for

the end of the file)

8) Common Commands after “:” Prompt

Table A-11 Common commands after “:” prompt


:w Save the current file

:w! Save the file forcibly

:w file

Write the contents to the specified file

:w! file Write the contents to the specified file forcibly

:r file Output files to the position where the cursor is placed

:r ! command Output command outputs to the position where thecursor is placed

:q Quit editing

:q! Force quit

:e file name Edit another file

:e ! Re-edit the file and cancel any change

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




A-6


:sh Edit after executing sh

:! command Edit after executing commands

:n Edit the next file

A.3 Common Commands for UNIX User Management

Table A-12 lists the common commands for UNIX user management. Note that only the

root user and authorized users can add, modify and delete users and user groups.

Table A-12 Common commands for UNIX user management


useradd [Option] User Name Add a new user

userdel User Name Delete a user

usermod [Option] User Name Modify user login information

passwd User Name Modify user password

groupadd User Group Name Add a new user group

groupdel User Group Name Delete a user group

groupmod [Option] User Group Name

Modify user group information

A.4 UNIX Utility Commands and Programs

Many powerful and useful commands are provided in UNIX system, as listed in

Table A-13.

Table A-13 Utility commands


find Directory Condition Search the file

grep String File Search the specific character string

tar [Functional Option [Modify Option]][File]

Utility program for file backup andrestoration

pack/unpack File Compress/uncompress the file

pkgadd [Option] Package Name Transfer a package to the system

pkgrm [Option] Package Name Remove a package from the system

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




A-7


bc Calculator

A.5 UNIX System Resource Commands

Table A-14 lists the system resource reports and management commands offered by

UNIX system.

Table A-14 System resource reports and management commands


man [Option] Command Get the help information of the command

df [Option] [File System] Report the free disk space

du [Option] [Directory or File] Report disk space occupied by each file system

ps [Option] Display the status of an active process

kill [Option] [Process Number] Terminate a running process

who [Option] List information of the current login user

whereis [Option] Command Report the command position

which command Display the path of the specified command

hostname [Host Name]

Display or set the host name

uname [Option] Display information about the operating system

ifconfig [Option] View the IP address of the host

script [Option] [File] Record screen I/O activity

date [Option] [+Format] Display the current date and time

A.6 UNIX Network Communication Commands

Table A-15 lists the common network communication commands.

Table A-15 Common network communications commands


ping IP address Test network connectivity

telnet IP address | domain name

Log into a remote computer through network

ftp IP address | domain name

Transmit files through network

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




A-8


finger [User Name] [@HostDomain Name | IP Address]

View the information of the users who are usingUNIX system on the network

netstat [Option]

Display the network status

route [Option] Modify and maintain the routing table

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User Manual AppendixHUAWEI CG9812 Appendix B Abbreviations


B-1

Appendix B Abbreviations

A

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notation One

B

BIOS Basic Input/Output System

BOM Bill of Material

BC Billing Center

BS Billing system

C

CDMA Code Division Multiple Access

CDR Call Detail Record

CG Charging Gateway

F

FDDI Fiber Distributed Digital Interface

FTAM File Transfer Access Management

FTP File Transfer Protocol

G

G-CDR GGSN-CDR

GGSN Gateway GPRS Support Node

GPRS General Packet Radio Service

GSN GPRS Support Node

GTP GPRS Tunneling Protocol

I

IP Internet Protocol

L

LAN Local Area Network

M

MML Man Machine Language, Man-Machine Language

MO Magneto-Optical

MSC Mobile Switching Center

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




B-2

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repair

M-CDR Mobility Management-CDR

N

NE Network Element

NFS Network File System

NM Network Management

NMC Network Management Center

NSAP Network Service Access Point

O

OEM Original Equipment ManufacturerOMC Operation & Maintenance Center

QoS Quality of Service

OSI Open System Interconnection

P

PC Personal Computer

PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect

PID Process Identification

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network

R

RAM random-access memory

RFC Request for Comments

S

SGSN Serving GPRS Support Node

S-CDR SGSN-CDR

S-SMO-CDR SGSN delivered short message Mobile Originated - CDR

S-SMT-CDR SGSN delivered Short message Mobile Terminated - CDR

T

TCP Transport Control Protocol

U

UDP user datagram protocol

UI User Interface

W

WAN Wide Area Network

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




B-3

WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


User ManualHUAWEI CG9812 Index


i-1

Index

A

access point parameters

AP name, 1-3

AP type, 1-3

local IP, 1-4

localport, 1-4

release, 1-3

alarm management,5-3

B

backup precautions

set the backup FTP, 1-30

set the backup source path, 1-30

set the local backup function, 1-30

billing interfaces

FTAM interface, 6-1

FTP interface, 6-1

broadcast messages, 6-12 , 6-11

C

cabinet

appearance, 3-1

cabinet configuration, 2-1

netra 20 plus storedge3310, 3-3

netra240 plus storedge 3310, 3-2

cabinet dimension, 7-2

cabinet weight, 7-2

cable connection

between between netra 20 and TC, 2-12

between LAN switches, 2-12 , 2-13

between primary and secondary server, 2-11,

2-12

netra 20 and storedge 3310, 2-12

netra 240 and storedge 3310, 2-12

netra20 and LAN swiitch, 2-11

netra240 and LAN swiitch, 2-10

power and ground cable, 2-12 , 2-13

SC and LAN switch, 2-12

CDR

browse, 3-9

print, 3-9

quary, 3-9

save, 3-9

CDRs

final bill, 1-4

original bill, 1-4 CDRs management

browsing, 2-15

printing, 2-22

querying, 2-16

saving, 2-22

CG fault information

CDR files, 3-2

configuration, 3-2

log file, 3-2

state query, 3-2

trace information, 3-1

channel, 1-4

checking client software, 8-8

checking system status

backup, 2-2

collecting, 2-2

dual-system heartbeat, 2-1

process running, 2-1

receiving,2-1

clent software

IGWB client, 8-8

uninstall system, 8-8

client

CDR console, 2-2

client consists

CDR console, 1-1

system debugging console, 1-1

client software

help, 8-8

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812


7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




i-3

qfe1, 4-16

qfe3, 4-16

customizing lock tim, 2-14

D

directory structure

CDR storage, 1-3

client, 1-6

common, 1-5

system, 1-1

disk

disk arrary, 1-9

local disk, 1-8

disk partioning

disk group partitioning, 1-9, 1-10

logical volume partitioning, 1-10

display device, 4-1

dual-plane structure, 3-5

dual-system

the active server, 3-5

the standby server, 3-5

E

environmental requirement

running environment, 7-7

storage environment, 7-3

transportation environment, 7-5

ES-IS protocol, 6-12 , 6-11

ethernet ports, 2-7

F

FAQ

cannot be started, 4-9

cannot be switched over, 4-10

conflicting port, 4-2

connection failure, 4-8

decodeing CDR failure, 4-2

delayed CDR fetching, 4-5

logging failed, 4-1

no utmpx entry, 4-6

original CDR generate, 4-7

oversize file, 4-7

powering off failure, 4-4

restart failure, 4-5

run setup script failure, 4-3

sequence failure, 4-4

fault information about OS

IP address configuration, 3-3

network connection state, 3-3

process running status, 3-3

fault positioning information

about CG9812, 3-1

about OS, 3-3

free space

back save disk, 2-2

front save disk, 2-2

front disk space, 2-24

funcation

communicating with the NMS, 3-9

communicating with the billing center, 3-9

communicating with the GSN, 3-8

function of debug console

browsing debug messages, 2-40

masking the debug level, 2-42

saving debug message, 2-41

setting debug colors, 2-44

functional principles, 3-5

functional structure, 3-5

G

getway IP, 2-2

H

hard disk checking

fault, 2-3

space, 2-2

hardware architecture, 3-1

hardware capacity, 7-1

hardware failure, 5-5

hardware power-on, 2-15 , 2-14

hardware preparations

LAN switch, 1-4

netra 240 minicomputer, 1-3

storedge 3310, 1-4

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




i-4

hardware reliability

hot backup, 6-3

over-current protection, 6-3

over-voltage protection, 6-3

power supply, 6-2

redundancy design, 6-3

haredware preparations

3310 disk arrary, 1-4

netra20 minicomputer, 1-4

TC, 1-4

heartbeat link, 3-5

heartbeat links

ce0, 2-11

ce1, 2-11

eri0, 2-12

home0, 2-12

heartbeat path, 3-9

heartbeat state, 2-24

high density, 2-5

highest authorities, 1-1

I

implementation mechanism,3-8

install CG server

installing server software, 7-7

praparations, 7-1

rolling back, 7-13

upgrading server, 7-9

installation flow, 1-1

installation preparations, 1-3

installing client software, 8-1

installing HA system

configuring, 5-19, 5-16

entering, 5-18 , 5-14

installing cluster, 5-3

installing VxVM, 5-15 , 5-11

preparations, 5-1

installing solaris, 4-1

connecting, 4-1

installing, 4-2 , 4-1

installing utilities

the top software,4-17

,4-18

the VTS software, 4-17 , 4-19

introduction FTAM commands

display partners, 6-15 , 6-14

get a file, 6-15 , 6-14

list, 6-14, 6-13

modify partner, 6-15 , 6-14

set up connection, 6-14, 6-13

K

key benefit, 2-1

key terminologies

access point, 3-9

bill protocol versions, 7-7

consolidation, 7-6

sort, 7-6

L

LAN switch description, 2-6 , 2-7

LMT, 1-3

lock system

relogin, 2-3

return to, 2-3

log parameters

archiving directory, 1-7

log storage directory, 1-7

log storage directory

arctive time, 1-7

save days, 1-7

logical host, 5-1

login dialog, 2-1

logs

browsing, 2-29

clearing, 2-34

printing, 2-34

saving, 2-32

LUN, 1-9

M

main hardware

disk array, 3-4

LAN switches, 3-2

mini computer, 3-2

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




i-5

maintenance management, 5-3

manager license

checking correctness, 5-19, 5-16

checking hostid, 5-18 , 5-14

checking permanent, 5-18 , 5-15

entering, 5-19, 5-15

managing mask level

delete mask level, 2-43

list mask level, 2-42

saving, 2-46

set mask kevek, 2-42

managing offices

adding, 2-10

deleting, 2-11

modifying, 2-12

managing operator

adding, 2-6

deleting, 2-8

modifying, 2-8

map logical drive

select chl1 ID 0, 3-15 , 3-18

select logical drive, 3-16 , 3-19

select LUN 0, 3-18 , 3-21

select map host LUN, 3-18 , 3-22

select RAID5, 3-17 , 3-21

select row 0, 3-16 , 3-20

MML server parameters

local IP to MML client, 1-5

local port to AR, 1-6

local port to CM, 1-6

local port to RD, 1-6

max number of LMT, 1-5

max uer number, 1-6

persis user, 1-5

modifying files

netmasks file, 4-16

sd.conf, 4-16 , 4-17

system file, 4-16 , 4-18

N

N68-22, 3-1

navigator tree,1-4

netra 20 description, 2-2

ambient indices, 2-3

configuration, 2-3

physical spec, 2-3

netra 240 description, 2-3

ambient indices, 2-3

configuration, 2-3

physical spec, 2-3

network backup instance

check, 1-20

modify the igwb.ini, 1-18

open the debugging console, 1-20

reset the CG server, 1-19

set up the FTP, 1-18

network backup parameters

dest host IP, 1-8

local IP, 1-8

user name, 1-8

networking capability, 2-2

NMS, 1-2

node, 1-4, 1-5

O

O&M function

configuration management, 5-2

fault management, 5-3

performance management, 5-2

security management, 5-2

offce management, 2-3

office

IP, 2-11

name, 2-11

type, 2-11

OMC networking, 5-1

operation maintenance

browsing CDRs, 2-3

degugging information, 2-3

exception alarm, 2-3

switchover test, 2-4

trace infromation, 2-3

operation on debug console

exiting,2-38

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




i-6

logging, 2-37

managing debug console, 2-39

managing protocol message, 2-45

managing workflow message, 2-47

orientation, 1-1

OSI protocol stack, 6-4, 6-3

P

parameter description of operator

authority, 2-7

confirm, 2-8

description, 2-7

name, 2-7

password, 2-7

parameters in log

command detail, 2-32

date, 2-32

log source, 2-32

log type, 2-32

operation command, 2-32

operation place, 2-32

operation result, 2-32

sequence number,2-32

user name, 2-32

physical MEM, 2-24

planning

dixk space planning, 1-8

HA system Planning, 1-6

IP address planning, 1-7

port usage

ports used by application, 1-16

ports used by CG, 1-16

position in mobile network, 1-1

preparation for install HA

checking hostname, 5-3, 5-2

checking hosts file, 5-1

checking login file, 5-3

cleaning out date, 5-3

primary state, 2-24

processing CDRs

collecting, 4-1

program on the CG server

startup, 2-1

protocol message

browsing, 2-46

Q

quorum device, 5-13, 5-9

R

RAID, 1-8

related parameters

NASP, 6-11, 6-10

partner, 6-11, 6-10

P-SELECTOR, 6-11, 6-10

S-SELECTOR, 6-11, 6-10

T-SELECTOR, 6-11, 6-10

reliability

hardware reliability, 6-2

software reliability, 6-3

system reliability, 6-1

resource planning, 1-6

disk space planning, 1-8

HA system planning, 1-6

IP address planning, 1-7

restarting the hosts, 4-17 , 4-18

root disk

adding, 5-20 , 5-17

checking, 5-20 , 5-16

initialize, 5-20 , 5-16

mirroring, 5-20 , 5-17

routine maintenance

hard disk detection, 2-2

operation maintenance, 2-3

system running, 2-1

S

SC, 3-1

secondary state, 2-24

security management

authority management, 5-2

log management, 5-2

service process

dual_system process, 3-12

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812




i-7

service processes

access point process, 3-11

kernel process, 3-11

operation and maintenance process, 3-12

sliding window protocol, 3-8

software architecture, 3-11

software configuration

application, 1-5

application software, 1-5

system software, 1-5

software reliability

error tolerance, 6-3

fault monitoring, 6-4

fault processing, 6-4

protection measure, 6-3

solaris patches

patch tools, 4-7 , 4-9

SAN patches, 4-7 , 4-10 , 4-12

SCSI card driver, 4-11, 4-13

SCSI card driver patch, 4-12 , 4-14

solaris 8 patch, 4-10 , 4-12

sorting CDRs

consolidates, 3-8

saves, 3-8

stack manager, 6-12 , 6-11

standard protocal

FTAM, 1-3

FTP, 1-2

state query, 1-2

CPU used, 3-3

disk space, 3-3

heartbeat, 3-3

physical MEM, 3-3

primary/secondary, 3-2

status bar, 1-6

storage environment

air cleanness, 7-3

biological environment, 7-3

climate environment, 7-3

mechanical stress, 7-4

storedge 3310 description, 2-5

structure of CDR storage

backsave, 1-3

frontsave, 1-3

sub-window, 1-6

SUN cluster, 1-4, 1-5

checking, 5-10 , 5-7

configuring, 5-6

edit, 5-9, 5-7

installing, 5-4, 5-3

SWAP, 1-8

system alarming

abnormal CDR, 5-6

alarm box disconnection, 5-10

backup connection failure, 5-7

BS not fetch CDRs, 5-2

cluster handover, 5-9

cluster switchover, 5-3

CPU busy, 5-7

file backup failure, 5-6

hardware failure, 5-9

heartbeat interruption, 5-3

insufficient available memory, 5-7 , 5-11

insufficient disk space, 5-2 , 5-11

IP resource failure, 5-4

license notice, 5-8

network interruption, 5-4

no GSN response, 5-12

software reset, 5-10

unauthorized client login, 5-8

user information change, 5-11

volume resource failure, 5-5

write file failure, 5-5

system features

high reliability, 2-1

large capacity and powerful processing

capability, 2-1

scalability, 2-2

simultaneous accesses, 2-1

system information

debug information, 1-6

protocol trace information, 1-6

workflow trace information, 1-6

system parameters

7/24/2019 Huawei CG9812



checking configuration, 5-26 , 5-23

configuring NAFO, 5-24, 5-22

creating group, 5-21, 5-17

installing script, 5-26 , 5-23

mirroring root disk, 5-20 , 5-16

registering group, 5-25 , 5-22

system performance status

clearing, 2-24, 2-28

querying, 2-25

setting, 2-27

system reliability

component selection, 6-1

maintainability design, 6-2

power reliability, 6-2

redundancy design, 6-1

original CDR, 3-10

primary/secondary, 3-10

resiyrces, 3-10

time planning, 1-2

timeout setting, 2-13

toolbar on the CDR console

debug, 1-4

help topics, 1-4

lock system, 1-4

navigator tree, 1-4

office management, 1-4

relogin, 1-4

relogout, 1-4

toolbar on the debugging console

browse debug message, 1-8

huawei cg9812

Documents